HP PhotoSmart 618 User Manual
HP 618 Digital Camer a Userâs Guide HP Imaging T echnology
HP 618 Digital Camera Userâs Guide 2 Legal Notices Legal Notices  Copyright 20 00 Hewlett -Packa rd Comp any. ALL RIGHT S RESERVED. The information contained in this document is subject to ch ange without notice. Hewlett-P acka rd Co mpany shal l not be li able for err ors con tained h erein or for consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of th is material. No pa rt of this document ma y be photocopied, r eproduced, or tr anslated to another language without the prior written conse nt of Hewlett-Pack ard Com pany. HP , the HP logo, JetSend, the JetSend logo, PhotoSmart, and the PhotoSmart logo are proper ty of Hewlett-Pa ckar d Company. PENT AX is a trademark of Asahi Optical Co., Ltd. The Digit a camera operating system is  copyright 2000 FlashPoint T echnol ogy, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RES ERVED. Digita and the D igita logo are trademarks of FlashPoint T echnology, Inc. SanDisk and CompactFlash are trademarks of SanDisk Corpor ation. Adobe and Acrobat are re gistered tra demarks of Adobe Systems Incorporat ed. Microsoft and Windows are r egistered tr ademarks of Micr osoft Corporat ion. Apple, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
HP 618 Digital Camera Userâs Guide 3 T able of Contents Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapter 1: Introduction ............................. ................................. ................................ ......... ........................ .............................. 5 Product Overview ...................... ................................. ................................ ....................... ..................... ................... 5 Whatâs in this Guide ................................................... ................................ ....................... ..................... ................... 6 How to Use this Guide ........................ ................................. ........................................... ..... ............................ .........7 Related Information ...... ............................................ ................................ ......................... ........ ............................... 7 Chapter 2: Preparing to Take Pictures .......................................... ................................ ............... .................. ................... 8 Accessing the Capture Mode and Powering on the Camera ................................. .............................. 8 Using the Status LCD ... ............................................ ................................ ........................... ................. ................... 9 Using the Image LCD ............................................... ................................ ............................ ................ .................. 12 Chapter 3: Taking Pictures ...................... ................................. ................................ ............. .................... ............................ 16 Taking Simple Point-and-Shoot Pictures .................................................. ...................................... ............ 16 Taking More Adv anced Pictures .............. ................................. ................................ .................. ............... ....... 17 Using the Zoom Lever .. ................................. ................................. ................................ ...... ................................. 22 Using the Diopter Control .... ................................. ................................ ................................ . ............................ 22 Understanding the LEDs on the Camera ........ ................................ ................................. ................. ........... 23 Using Instant Review ..... ................................. ................................. ................................ ....................................... 25 Recording Sound ....................... ................................. ................................ ....................... .......... ........................... 26 Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewin g Images .......... ................................. ................................ ................................. ...... 27 Using Playback Mod e .. ................................. ........................................... ............................. .... ............................ 27 Using Review Mode .................. ................................. ........................................... ............... .................. ................ 30 Chapter 5: Sharing Images ................................ ............................................ ......................... ............................. ................. 38 Transferring Images to Your Computer .......... ................................ ............................................ ................. 38 Using a Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) File ..... ................................ ................................. .......... ...... 44 JetSending Images to a Printer ..... ................................. ................................ .......................... .................. ..... 46 Transmitting Images Between Two Cameras ...................... ................................ ................................. ..... 48 Connecting the Camera to Your Television ........................ ................................ .............................. ........ 50 Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference . ................................. ................................ ...................... ........... ................. 52 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys ............... ........................................... ................................. ... .............. 52 Playback Mode Menu and Sof t Keys .......................... ................................ ................................. ... .............. 74 Review Mode Men us and Soft Keys ............................. ................................ ................................. . ................ 7 8
HP 618 Digital Camera Userâs Guide 4 T able of Contents Chapter 7: Troubleshooting ................... ................................. ................................ ................ ............................ ................ 88 Troubleshooting Common Problems .................................... ................................ ........................... ...... ..... 88 Contacting HP Customer Care ...... ................................. ................................ ............................ ..... .................93 Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu . ................................. ................................ ...................... ...................... ..... 94 Accessing the Preferences Menu ........................ ................................ ................................. ....... .................... 94 Setting the Display ................... ................................. ................................ ....................... ..................................... 95 Controlling Camera Sounds .......... ................................. ................................ .......................... .................. ......9 7 Formatting the Memory Card ................... ................................. ................................ ................ ...................... 9 8 Selecting the PC Connect Mode ......................... ................................ ................................. ....... ............... ..... 98 Setting the Date and Time ............... ................................. ................................ ..................... ............ ................ 9 9 Setting the Image Counter ......................... ................................. ................................ ........... ...................... ... 100 Naming Your Camera .. ................................. ................................. ................................ ........ ......................... .... 101 Selecting a Language ........................ ................................. ........................................... ...... ................ .............. 102 Resetting Camera Settings ... ................................. ........................................... ...................... ...................... ... 102 Appendix B: Camera and Accessories Information .......................... ........................................... ........... ............... 103 Camera Specifications ....................... ................................. ........................................... ...... ................ ...............103 Battery Life .. ................................. ................................. ................................ .............. ................... ......................... 106 HP Accessories for Powering the Camera ...... ................................ ................................. ................. ..... ....107 Storage Capacities of Memory Cards .............. ................................ ................................. ............. ............ 109 Appendix C: Product Warranties ......... ............................................ ................................ ........... ...................... ............... 110 Limited Product Warranty ................ ................................. ................................ ..................... ....................... .... 110 Hewlett-Packard Year 2000 Warranty ....................... ................................ ................................. .... ............ 112 Appendix D: Product Safety and Regulatory Information ..................... ................................. ................... ........ 113 Safety Information ......................................... ........................................... ........................ ......... ........................... 113 Regulatory Notices ................... ................................. ................................ ........................ .................... ................ 114 Glossary ... ................................. ............................................ ................................. ..... ........................... ................................. ..... 115 Index ........... ................................. ................................. ................................. ........... ..................... ................................. ............... 125
Chapter 1: Introduction 5 Product Overview Chapter 1: Introduction Wel c o m e t o t h e HP 618 Digit al Camera User âs Guide . This guide will help you take high-qu ality pictures quickly and easily with your HP 618 digital camer a. Product Over view The HP 618 is a versatile, point-and-s hoot digital camera. It provides th ese ke y features: î HP Imaging T echnology î 3x optical /2x digital zoom î Three ima ge ty pe set tings â One Shot, Continuous, and Timelapse î T wo focus modes â Auto and Manual î Three auto focus r a nge settings â Normal, Macro, and Infinity î Six ex posur e settings â Auto, Landscape Progra m, Portr ait Program , Action Program , Aperture Priority, and Shutter Priority î Built-in flash with seven flash modes â Auto, Auto with Red-Eye Reduction, For ce d On, Force d On with Red-Eye Redu ction, For ced Off, Night, and Night with Red-Eye Reduction Note: For more detaile d information about t he camera âs features, see âCamer a Specificationsâ on page 103. î Three ti mer m odes â Off, 10-Second Timer, and 3-Second Remote Y our camer a comes equipp ed with four oper ating modes (see T able 1). T o s et the mode, turn the camera mode dial on top of t he camer a to the mode you want to us e. Note: C apture, Play back, and Review modes have menus and related s oft ke ys you can use to change your camer aâs settings and to edit and organize images. (PC Connect mode does not have menus or soft k eys.) Ta b l e 1 : Camera Mod es Mode Use this Mode to... C ap tu r e Capture Capture Capture T ake pict ures (or âcap ture imag esâ) . Playbac k Playback Playback Playback View the capt ured images in a variet y of ways. Y ou c an view images ful l screen, play back t imelapse and grouped image sequences, and create slid eshows of images. R ev ie w Revi ew Revi ew Revi ew Sort and edit t he capt ured i mages i n a v ariety of ways. F or example, you can gr oup, c ategorize, delete, and se arch f or captur ed images. PC Connect PC Connect PC Connect PC Connect T ransf er images fr om the c amera to a comput er.
Chapter 1: Introduction 6 Whatâs in this Guide Whatâs in this Guide This Userâs Guid e provides all the âhow toâ and re ference information you need to use your camera successfully. Part of Manual What is Covered âChapter 2: Preparin g to T ak e Pictur esâ How t o ad just s ettings in t he st atus LCD, imag e LCD, and Capt ure mod e menus t o pr epare your cam era to ta ke pictur es. âChapter 3: T aking Pictur esâ How to tak e simple point- and-shoot pi ctur es, as well as mor e advanc ed picture s. Also how to us e the zoo m, Instant Review, a nd the sound record ing fea tures . âChapter 4: View ing and Revie wing Imagesâ How t o vie w image s full screen, p lay b ack ti melaps e and g rouped image sequences, and create s lideshows of images in Playba ck mode. Also how to edit, organize, d elete, a nd search for images in Review mod e. âChapter 5: Sharing Imagesâ How to share images by tr ansferring them to your computer, JetSen ding them to a p rinter, tr ansmitting them to other came ras a nd printers, and view ing th em on a t elev ision . âChapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Referenceâ What each of your camer aâs m enus a nd re lated s oft k e ys do. âCh apter 7: T roubl eshoo tin gâ Ho w t o f ix co mmo n p ro bl em s w he n us i ng t he ca me ra, an d h ow to co nt ac t HP Customer Car e for help, if need ed. âAppendix A: Usin g the Preferen ces Menuâ How to use the P ref eren ces m enu t o cha nge a vari ety of your camer aâs general settings. â Appendix B: C amer a and Accessories Informationâ Specifica tions for the camer a, as well as informati on about some of the accessories t hat the c amer a supports. â Appendix C: Product W arrantiesâ Limited product warranty and the HP Y ear 2000 warranty for the camera. âAppendix D: Produ ct Safe ty and Regulatory Informationâ Safety information and regulat ory notices regar ding the camera and some o f its access ories. âGlossaryâ Definitions of the terms re lated to you r camer a that ar e used t hroughout this gu ide and in t he ca mera âs Quick Sta rt Guide . âInd exâ Where to find particular topics about yo ur camera throughou t this guide.
Chapter 1: Introduction 7 How to Use this Guide How to Use this Guide Y ou can use this guide online, or you can print it out. The main advantage of using it online is that you can use its built-in sear ching and linking capabilities on your computer t o quickly find the in fo r ma t io n y o u n ee d. Of co u rs e, an ad v an t ag e o f h av i ng a p ri n t- ou t is th at y ou ca n ta ke i t an y wh er e you want to use your camer a. Y ou may also prefer to r ead information about your camer a from a printed version, rather than on a computer screen. Note: If y o u c ho o se t o p r i n t t h is g u i d e , b e a wa r e that printing it in color may tak e a long time. Therefore, you may want to print this guide in black and white, instead. This online guide is provided in Adob e ® Acrobat ® version 4.0 (.pdf) format. T o le arn how to use Acrob atâs sear ching and linking fe atures , see the online H elp for the A croba t softwar e. T o print this guide, s elect P ri n t Print Print Pr i nt from Acrobatâs File m enu. In the Print dialog box, eithe r click the OK OK OK OK button to print the entir e guide, or specify t he P r in t Ra n g e Print Range Print Range Pr i n t R a n ge of pages you want and then click OK OK OK OK. Related Information For a comple te listing and description of your camer aâs features, including diagrams showing the locations of all the buttons, dials, displays, and so on, see the printed HP 618 D igital Camera Quick Start Guide that was include d w ith your camera. Along with helping y ou use your camera for the first ti m e to c ap t ur e a nd vi ew i ma ge s , t he Quick Start Guide als o ex pl ai n s h ow to t ran sf er im a ge s f rom th e camera to your computer. Note: It is assumed that you have already used the HP 618 Di gital Cam era Quic k Star t Guid e to install the batteries and the memory card in your camera. T o learn how to us e the softwar e that came with your camera, se e the softwareâs online Help. All the documentation for the softwar e is provided in the form of online Help within the softwar e itself. Finally, you can get project ideas, troubleshooting assistance, and up-to-date information about yo ur ca m era and th e HP Ph ot o I ma gi n g So f tw a re f ro m th e HP we bs i te at : w w w . h p . c o m / p h o t o s m a r t www.hp.co m/photosmart www.hp.co m/photosmart www.hp.co m/photosmart . Updates for your camer aâs firmware are also posted to this website from t ime-to-time. Y ou can install these updates on your camer a so that you can always have the most c urrent fu nctionality running on it.
Chapter 2: Preparin g to T ake Pictures 8 Accessing the Capture Mode a nd Powerin g on the Camera Chapter 2: Pr eparing to T ak e Pictures Overvie w Y ou can use your camer aâs default settings to tak e pictures in a point-and-shoot fashion, or you can use more advanced features that you set via the cameraâs status LCD and image L C D. This chapter explains how to pre pare your camer a to take pictur es by adjusting various settings on it. This chapter covers t he followin g topics: î â Accessing the Capture Mode and Powering on the Cameraâ on page 8 î âUsing the Status L C Dâ on page 9 î âSetting the Flash Modeâ on page 10 î âSetting the Timer Modeâ on page 11 î âSetting the Auto Fo cus Rangeâ on page 11 î âUsing the Image L CDâ on page 12 î âSetting the Image T ypeâ on pag e 13 î âUnderstanding the T ext Message Ar eaâ on page 12 î âViewing the Camera Statusâ on page 14 î âUsing the Overlay Soft K eyâ on page 14 î âUsing the Captur e Mode Menusâ on page 15 î âUsing the 4-W ay Controllerâ on page 15 Accessing the Capture Mode and Powering on the Camera Figure 1: Sett ing the Cam era to Capture Mod e T o prepare your camera to take pictures, you must first set your camera to Capture mode and p ower on the camer a: 1 T urn the camera mode dial on the top of the camer a to (see Figure 1). 2 Power on the camer a by sliding the ON/OFF power switch on the back of the camer a to the right and releasing it. The statu s L CD on the top of the camer a turns on and displays the statu s of the camer a.
Chapter 2: Preparing to T ake Pictures 9 Using the Status LCD Using the Stat us L CD Figure 2: Statu s LCD Ind ica tors The st atus LCD conveys impo rta nt inf ormat ion about the c ameraâs statu s. Th e stat us LCD show s you the status of the camer aâs batteries, the settings for the flash mode, timer mode, and auto focus range, as well as the number of pictures r emaining on the memory card (see Figur e 2). The status L CD turns on every time you power on the camer a. Y ou can use the status L CD to assess the current statu s of the camer a, and to change the flash mode, timer m ode, and auto focus range settings when p reparing to tak e pictures. The buttons be neath the status L CD â the flash mode bu tton , the timer mode button , and the auto focus r ange button â toggle the associated cam era settings on and off within the status L CD (see Figure 3). T o change one of thes e settings, press th e associated button until y ou see the desired icon or se t of icons displayed in the status L CD for the setting y ou want. Fig ur e 3: Stat us L CD Buttons The next three sub sections explain the possible setting s for the flash mode, timer mode, and auto focus ra nge on the camer a. Note: If you see 000 flashing in the status L CD, this means that either there is no memor y card in the camer a , or the memory car d is full. Flash Batter y status Timer Pictures rem ai ni n g focus ran ge mode mode Auto Auto focus r ange Time r mode Flash mode
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 10 Using the Status LCD Setting the Flash Mode Y o u r c am era h as se v en fl a sh mo d es . Th e d ef au l t f l as h m o de is Au t o ( no i co ns d is pl a ye d ). E ac h m od e is d is p la ye d o n th e s t at us LCD wi t h t he ic o n( s ) s ho wn i n T a bl e 2. T o se t th e fl as h mo de , p re ss t he fl a sh mode button beneath the status LCD to togg le through the icons on the sta tus L CD until you se e the flash mode s etting you want (see T able 2). Note: The flash mode setting r emains se t between shots, bu t will return to Aut o after you cycle the power on the camer a (power it off and then on again). If the batteriesâ charge is low, the camer a will not tak e a picture if the flash mode is set to Force d On or Night, and it will disable the flash if set to Auto. Also note that flash p ictures m ay be over- exposed when using the Macr o a uto focus range (see âSetting the Auto F ocus Rangeâ on page 11). Thus, you may want to turn off the flash (set the flash m ode to For ced Off) when taking pictures with the Macr o auto focus range setting. Ta b l e 2 : Flash Mode S ettings Flash Mode Icon Displayed When to Use Auto (default) No Icon T o allow the camera to determin e the need for flas h based on the lighting conditions. Auto with Red-Eye Reduction T o a llow the camera to deter mine the need for flash based on the lighting conditions. When flash is used, red-eye reduc tion minim izes the occurrence of red- eye in pictures of people or anima ls by flashing twice. For ce d O n T o use the flash, regardle ss of the lighting conditions. Fo r c e d O n w i t h R e d - E y e Reduction T o use the flas h, regard less of the l ighting conditi ons. Red-eye reduc tion minimizes t he occurre nce of red- eye in pictures of people or anima ls by flashing twice. Forced Of f T o take pictur es w ithout fla sh, regardle ss of t he lighting conditions. Night T o use a s low sync m ode of the flash in whi ch the camer a collects t he im age backg roun d with the available light and f lashes to ill uminate the foreground of the imag e. Night with Red -Eye Reduction T o use a s low sync m ode of the flash in whi ch the camer a collects t he im age backg roun d with the available light and f lashes to ill uminate the foreground o f the im age. Red- eye reductio n minimi zes the o ccurrence of red-eye i n pictures of people or animals by flashing twice.
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 11 Using the Status LCD Setting the Timer Mode Note: The 10-Second Timer mode is disabled for the Tim elapse imag e type. (S ee âSett ing the Image T ypeâ on page 13.) Y our camera has t hree timer modes. The default timer mode is Off. Each mode is displayed on the status L CD with the icon shown in T a ble 3. T o set the timer mode, press the timer mode b utton bene ath t he st atus LCD to tog gle t hrou gh th e ico ns on the statu s LCD unti l yo u see t he t ime r sett in g you want (see T able 3). Note: After each timed exposure in 10-Second Timer mode, the camer a will default to the Off timer mode setting. Y ou must rese t the timer to tak e another time d pictur e. In contr ast, the 3-Second Remote timer mode setting remains set shot-to-shot . Ta b l e 3 : Timer Mode Settin gs Note: The auto focus range rem a ins set between shots, bu t returns to Norm al after you cycle the power on the camer a (power it off and then on again). If you change the focus mode fr om Auto to Manual Focus in the Photo Ass ist menu (see âUsing the Capture Mode Me nusâ on page 15), the auto focus range is cancelled. If you set the camer a to the Macro auto focu s range, the image L CD will turn on. This is because you will be u nable to fr ame an image prope rly in th e viewfind er due to par allax err or. Finally, if the camer a cannot focus when set to the Normal auto focus r ange, it will make a âbest gu essâ at the focus and tak e the picture . Howev er , if i t ca nnot foc us wh en set to M acro , it will not take a picture. Setting the Auto Focus Range Y ou can choose from thr ee auto focus r a nges that are available via the status L CD. The default auto focus ra nge is Normal. Each r ange setting is displayed on the status L C D with the icon shown in T able 4. T o set the auto focus range, pres s the auto focus range butt on benea th th e stat us LCD to toggle thr o ugh the ic ons on t he status L CD until you see the se tting you want (se e T able 4). Ta b l e 4 : Auto Focus Range Settin gs Timer Mode Icon Displayed When to Use Off (default) No Icon T o t ake pictures without using t he ti mer. 10-Seco nd Timer T o tak e a pic ture 10 s econd s af ter pressing the s hutter release b utton. 3-Second Remot e T o use the r emote infr ared t rigger on the HP Remote Contr ol (included with the camer a), which has a 3-seco nd delay. Auto Focus Range Icon Displayed When to Use Normal (default) No Icon T o take a pictur e of a subjec t that is within the normal focus range (neit her clos e-up nor in the di stance). The fo cus r ange is s et fr om 0.5 meter s to infini ty. Macro T o t ake a cl ose-up p ict ure of a subj ect, s uch a s a fl ower . The fo cus ra nge i s set f rom 0.1 to 0.6 meter s. Infinity T o t ake a pic ture of a subj ect in th e dis tance, such a s a mountain r ange. The focus r ange is set at infinity.
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 12 Using the Image LCD Using the Ima ge L CD Figure 4: Image LC D Screen in Live View T urn the image LCD on by pr essing the DISPLA Y button on the back of the camera. Y ou now see the live view of Capture mode on the image L CD. Live view lets you preview the pictu res you can tak e with the camer a, as well as view and change some of the camer aâs settings. The image L CD screen in the live view of Capture mode inclu des two opaque overlay b ars and an i m ag e a re a i n t h e c e n t e r f o r v i e w i n g y o u r p i c t u r e s u bj ec t s ( s e e F i g u r e 4 ) . T h e t o p o v e r l a y b a r d i s p l a y s status information about the c amera wh ile you are tak ing pictures. The b ottom overlay b ar contains labels that de scribe the fu nction of the soft k e ys immediatel y below them. For e xampl e, if you pr ess th e r ig h t (S t at us ) sof t key i n Ca p tu re mod e, th e Sta t us sc ree n d is p la ys . T o t ur n t he ov er la y ba rs off or on, pres s th e middl e (Ove rlay) soft key. Y ou can also use the image L CD to access menus to change camer a settings in the Captu re, Playback, and Review modes, and to play back and review captured images in the Playback and Review modes, re spectively. The image L CD is disabled in PC Connect mode. Note: By default, th e image L CD is turned off when you power on the cam era in Ca pture mode. If you want the imag e LCD to always turn on instead, you can change the setting in the Displa y su bmenu of th e Pref erences menu. ( See âDisplay Submenuâ on page 67 and âSetting the Displayâ on page 95.) However, note that the image L CD uses a lot of battery power. If y ou are running your c amer a on batteries r ather than with the HP -approved AC power adapter, you may want to limit you r use of the image L CD. The following subsections pr ovide more information about the overlay bar s and the soft k eys in the live view of Capture mode. Understandi ng the T ext Message Area The text message are a is a one-line text ar ea in the middle of the top o verlay bar. An ex ample text message is: âBattery Low.â The fol lowing indicators will also appear in the text m essage area when y o u c h a n g e c e r t a i n s e t t i n gs i n t he C a pt u r e m o d e m en us . F o r i n f or m at i o n o n u s i n g t h e C a p t ur e m o d e menus to change camer a settings, see âUsing the Captur e Mode Menusâ on page 15. Exposure Mode Indicator When you set the Exposure Mode in the Photo Assist menu to e ither Landscape Progr am, Portrait Progr am, or Action Progr am, the curr ent Exposur e Mode is displayed in the text message are a. Note: For information on setting the Exposur e Mode, see âExposure Mode Submenuâ on page 56. Aperture V alue an d Shutte r Speed I ndicators When you set the Expos ure Mode in the Photo As sist menu to Ap erture Priority (Av) or Sh utter Prior ity ( T v) , the c urrent apertu re val ue and sh utte r spee d are dis play ed in t he tex t mes sage a rea (fo r example: T v 1/125 F5.6). The aperture value and shutte r speed will update automatical ly and change continually as the camer a zooms and measures the exposur e. When the camera cannot se t the correct exposur e becaus e y ou have selected an apertu re or shutter speed that is too big or small, the line in the text mess age area will turn r e d. Manual Focus Distance Note: For information on setting the Focus Mode, see âF ocus Mode Submenuâ on page 59. When y ou se t th e Focus Mode i n th e Phot o As sist menu t o Man ual Focu s, t he fo cus d ista nce appe ars on the left side of the te xt message ar ea. Soft keys To p overlay bar shows status Bottom overlay bar shows soft ke y labels
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 13 Using the Image L CD Macro and Infinity A uto Focus Range Indicators When the auto focus r ange is set to Macro, a Macro icon is displayed on the right side of th e text message area. Wh en the auto focus range is se t to Infinity, INF is displayed. Digital Zoom Indicator When the camera is in digital zoom, the digital zoom icon is displayed on the right side of the text message area. F or information on digital zooming, see âUsing the Zoom Leverâ on page 22. Setting the Image T ype Y our camer a can tak e three types of pictur es (that is, thre e âimage typ esâ): î One Shot î Continuous î Timelapse Note: For the Ti melapse image type, you ca n set t he numb er of imag es tha t wi ll be capt ured and t he int erval bet ween th em in t he Ti melap se Settings submenu of the Capt ure Settings menu. (See âTimelapse Set tings Submenuâ on page 54.) Also note that if the inte rval you set for Timelaps e image c apture i s long, the camera m a y g o i n t o s l e e p m o d e ( s h u tt i n g o f f t h e i m a g e L CD) between taking pictur es to conserve battery powe r. Finally, if you set the Timela pse i nterval to 15 or 30 sec and you have the File T ype set to TIFF , the camer a may skip capturing an image if it is not finished processing the pre vious image i n the Time lapse sequ ence. The image type is displayed at t he left side of the bott om overlay bar in the live view of C apture mode. Ima ge typ e se ttings a re listed in T able 5. The def ault image type is O ne S hot. T o set the i mage type, pr ess the left soft k ey to toggle throu gh the typ es until you see the i mage type setting you want (see T able 5). Ta b l e 5 : Image T ype Settings Image T ype When to Use How to Use One Shot (default) When captu ring a sing le image. Press and release the shutter release button to cap ture a s ingle im age. Continuous When c apturin g a series of images in rap id succession. Recommend ed for action shots. Hold the shutter release button down. Continuous images ar e captured u ntil you releas e the butt on or until th e memory c ard is f ull. Timelap se When captur ing a s low pro cess with a ser ies of imag es. Press and releas e the sh utter releas e button, and the camera cap tures the first image. Then it displays a countdown to the next image c apture on t he top overlay bar. T o cancel, press t he Stop soft key.
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 14 Using the Image LCD Using the Overlay Soft K ey Press the middle (Overlay) soft key to tu rn both overlay b ars off in the live view of Captur e mode. T o turn the overlay bars on again, press any of the thr ee soft k eys. When the ove rlay bars are off, the soft key s are disabled for their normal functions and ar e, instead, enabled only to turn the overlay bars on again. Viewing the Camer a Status Figure 5: Status Scr een Y ou can pr ess the right (Status) soft k ey while in the live view of C apture mode to display the Statu s screen (see Figure 5). This scr een allows you to ch eck the curr ent camer a status, such as the cur rent resolution, quality, and wh ite balance settings. (T o change these settings, use the Captu re mode menus. See t he next subs ection for details.) One or more icons may also appear on the Status screen, in cluding: î means that a memory car d is inserted in the camer a. î means that the cu rrent auto focus range setting is M acro. î shows the batte ry status. The following status information is provided: T o exit the Status sc reen and r eturn to t he live view of Captur e mode, pr ess the right (Exit) soft k ey. Resoluti on Resolu tion setti ng for captu ring imag es (Full Size or 1/4) Quality Quality setting for c apturing images (Good , Better, or Best for the JPEG file type, or T IFF for the T IFF file t ype) White Balance Color corr ection setting to make white areas ap pear white with no color cast EV Comp Exposur e V alue compensat ion setting for expos ure c ontro l ISO Speed ISO Speed setting AE Metering Auto Exposur e Metering s etting Ve r s i o n The ver sion numb er of y our cam eraâs firmw are
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 15 Using the Ima ge LCD Using the Capture Mode Menu s Y our camer a has four Captu re mode men us: Note: For more information about all of the Captur e mode menus a nd r elated soft k eys, see âChapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Referenceâ starting on page 52. For m ore information about the Pr e ferences menu, see â Appendix A: Using the Pr eferences Menuâ starting on page 94. î Captur e Settings î Photo Assist î Image Stamp î Preferen ces The Capture Settings, Photo Assist, and Image Stamp menus have settings you can change which affect the images you capture. The P refere nces menu allows you t o change a variety of your camera âs general settings. Figure 6: Parts of a Menu T o access the Capture mode menus: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Capture mode menus are displayed on the image LCD (see Figure 6). 4 Press th e right or left arrow on the 4-way contr oller to m ove acr oss the m enu icon bar t o access a particular menu. (See the next subsection, âUsing the 4-W ay Controller.â) 5 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move t he highlight to the menu option you want to selec t. 6 Press the left soft k ey to select the hi ghligh ted menu opti on. Fig ur e 7 : 4-W ay Controller Using the 4-Way Contro ller The 4-way controlle r is the lar ge button located on the back of your cam era (se e Figure 7). P ress an arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move in the direction of that arr ow (up, down, right, or left) in the image L CD, such as within the me nu structur es of the Capture , Review, or Playback modes. Menu icons Current Menu options menuâ s t itl e Ove rla y bar Soft key s
Chapter 3 : T aking Pictu res 16 T aking Si mple Point- and-Shoot Pi ctures Chapter 3: T aking Pictures Overvie w On ce y ou h av e se t yo ur c am era t o Ca pt u re mo de a nd y ou h av e a b a si c u n de r st an d in g of h ow t o u se your camer aâs status L CD and image LCD (see âChap ter 2: Preparing to T ake Pictur esâ starting on page 8), you are r eady to take pictures. T o optimize your camer aâs capabilities, it is important to understand how to use th e zoom lever, what t he various LEDs mean when the y light solid or blink, how to use Instant Review, and how to use the sound record ing features when taking pictur es. This chapter covers t he followin g topics: î âT aking Simple Point-and-Shoot Picturesâ on page 16 î âT aking More Advanced Picturesâ on page 17 î âUsing Focus Lockâ on page 18 î âShooting a One Shot Imageâ on page 19 î âShooting Continuous Imagesâ on page 20 î âShooting Timelapse Imagesâ on page 21 î âUsing the Zoom Leverâ on page 22 î âUsing the Diopter Controlâ on p age 22 î âUnderstanding the LEDs on the Camer aâ on page 23 î âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25 î âRecording Soundâ on page 26 T aking S imple Po int-a nd-Shoo t Pictu res Note: These instruction s for taking simple point-and-shoot pictur es assume that y our camera is set to the defaul t image type (One Shot), and that Instant Review is on as well. (See âSetting the Image T ypeâ on page 13 and âUsing Instant Rev iewâ on pag e 25 for more information.) Here is the simp lest meth od for taking picture s with your camer a: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to the Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Look through the vie wfinder to select and fr ame a subject for you r picture.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 17 T aking Mo re Advanced Pi ctures 4 Press the shutte r rele ase button. W ait for the shutter sound, indicati ng the cam era ha s capture d the image . Then r eleas e the b utton. The captured image appear s for a 3-second Instant Review period on the im age L CD. If you ar e happy with it, do nothing, and the image will be saved on the me mory card. If not, you can delete the image while it is still dis played in Instant Review by pr essing the middle (Delete ) soft k ey. T aking Mor e Advanced Pictures As explained in Chapter 2: âPr eparing to T ake Pictur es,â yo ur camer a has mor e advanced features that you can set via your camer aâs status L CD and image LCD. Her e is the gener al procedu re for taking more advanced pict ures: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to the Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Set the flash mode, timer mode, and/or the auto focus range via the status LC D buttons on the top of the camera, as desired. (F or information on these settings, see âUsing the Status L CDâ on page 9.) The settings you choose ar e displayed in the status L CD. 4 Press the DISPLA Y button on the back of the camera to turn the image L CD on. 5 Press the left soft k ey to se t the image ty pe (One Sho t, Continuous, or Time lapse). (F or more information, see âSetting the Image T ypeâ on page 13.) The image type you choose is displayed on the left side of the b ottom over lay bar in the image L CD. 6 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a to display the Captur e mode menus on the image L CD, if you wish to change any of the def ault camera se ttings in the menus. 7 S e le c t th e men u opt i on s you wi sh to ch an g e in th e Ca p tu re Se tt in g s , Ph o to As si st , an d/ or Im a ge Stamp menus, and then mak e the changes to the camer a settings within those menus, as desired. (F or information about ch anging settings in these Captur e mode menus , seeâCaptur e Mode Menus and Soft K eysâ on page 52.) For ex ample, if you have set t he camera to th e Timelapse image type, th en you might want to change the default settings in the Timelapse menu option of the Captur e Settings menu. In this case, you could change the num ber of images and/or the interval betwee n them for the time- lapse sequence that you want to shoot.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 18 T akin g More Advan ced Pictures 8 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to exit the Captur e mode me nus. Note: The image L C D uses a l ot of battery power. If you ar e runn ing your camer a on batteries r ather than with the HP-approved AC power adapter, you may want to limit y our use of the image L CD and use the viewfinder instead. T o turn the image LCD off, pr ess the DISPLA Y button on the back of the camer a. 9 Use the i mage L CD or the viewfinder to selec t and fr ame the su bject fo r your pictu re. If nee ded, use the z oom lever (see page 22) to adjust the focal length of the cam era lens to zoom in or out on the picture subject. Y ou can also use the diopte r control (s ee page 22) wh en looking thr ough the viewfinder to adjust the focus of the picture su bject in the viewfinder. Note that the diopter control has no effect on the image you capture, however. If you cannot obtain focus on your pictur e subject, see th e next subsection, âUsing F ocus Lock.â Otherwise, go on to the âWhatâs Next?â su bsection. Using F ocus Lock If you cann ot obt ain f ocu s on yo ur pic ture sub jec t, use Foc us Loc k as f ollow s to g et the p rope r focu s: 1 If the main subject of your pictu re is: î Not within the center of the viewfinder fr ame or image L CD screen, center the main subject of your picture in the center of the viewfinder frame or image L CD screen. Go on to ste p 2. î Ne a r a ve ry b ri gh t or da rk a re a, or i s b eh in d an o th er o bj ec t (s uc h as a s cr ee n o r f e nc e ) w hi c h ov er l ap s t h e s ub j ec t, f oc us t he c am era on a no th er o bj ec t t he sa me d is ta n ce fr om yo u a s th e subject. Go on to step 2. 2 Press the shutte r rele ase button halfway down and continue to hold it halfw ay down . This locks the focus. 3 Without re leasing th e shutter r elease button, r ecompose the pictur e as you orig inally wante d it, and then press th e shutter butt on all the way down to tak e the pictur e. (Also see the foll owing subsections for how to tak e pictures for each image type.) Whatâs Next? What you need to do next to actuall y take a pictu re depends on the image type yo u have selected, and whether or not you have set a timer mode. The following subsections describe how to captur e the image(s), as well as what occur s once you do, for each image type setting.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 19 T aking Mo re Advanced Pi ctures Shooting a One Shot Image If you are using the: î Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter r elease button with no timer mode set, pre ss the shutte r release button. W ait for the shutter soun d, indicat ing the ca mer a has captu red the ima ge. Then relea se the but ton. î 10-Sec ond Timer 10-Sec ond Timer 10-Sec ond Timer 10-Secon d Timer mode mode mode mo d e, pres s an d r eleas e t he shu tter relea se but ton. The timer LED on the front of the cam era (see p age 24) lights solid for 7 seconds. It the n blinks for the fi nal 3 seconds before the camera c aptures t he image. î 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote timer mo de timer mo de timer mode t im e r m o d e, point the HP Re mote Control at t he camer a, and press and release the Remot e Controlâs trigger button. The timer LED on the front of the cam era (se e page 24) blinks faster for 3 sec onds. Then the camer a captures the image. If I ns t an t Re vi e w i s on ( se e âU si n g I n st a nt Re v ie w â o n pa ge 2 5) , yo u ca n d o a ny o f t h e f ol l ow i ng w hi le the image you just cap tured is displayed in Instant R eview on the image LCD: î Record sound that will be attached to this image. F o r information on how to do this, see âRecording Soundâ on page 26. î Delete the image by pr essing the middle (Delete) soft key. î Save the image to the memory card and return to the Captur e mode immediate ly by pr essing the right (Exit) s oft k ey. î Do nothing and, when Instant Review times out (the def ault time-out is 3 seconds), the image is then saved t o the memory ca rd au tomatically.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 20 T aking Mo re Advanced Pi ctures Shoo ting Con tinu ous Ima ges Note: If you set the timer mode to 10-Second Timer or 3-Second Remote for the Continuous image ty pe, you can only tak e one pictur e. Therefore, to capture a Continuou s sequence of images, use the sh utter r elease button wit h no timer mode set (that is, with the time r mode set to its default Off set ting). Press the shut ter re lease bu tton and continue to hold the button down . Then the camera begins to capture the i mages in t he Co ntinuous sequen ce. Continuous images are captur ed until you release the shu tter rele ase button, or the m emory card becomes full, whiche ver comes first. The camera will capture image s as fast as it can. The captur e ra te (that is, the time be tween pictures) will vary depending on the proce ssing requir ed (for such things as the resolut ion and image quality settings) before e ach image is saved to the memory card (see the second Note on the left). The capture r ate als o depends on whether or not the fl ash is being charged between shots. If you wish to increase the captur e rate of Continuous images, you can turn the live view of Cap ture mode off by pressing the DISPLA Y button on the back of the came ra, t urn Instant Re view off thr ough the Display menu option in the Prefere nces menu of Captur e mode (see âDisplay Submenuâ on page 67), and set the flash mode to Forced Off (see âSetting the Flash Modeâ on page 10). Note: If Instant Review is on, each image in a Continu ous se quence except for the final one i s a u to ma t i c a l l y s a v e d t o th e m e m o r y c ar d b e f o re the camer a captures the next ima ge in t he sequence. If Instant Re view is off, each image is automatically saved befor e the nex t one is captured, and then the final one is saved automatical ly, as well. Also not e that , unli ke Timel apse imag es, Continuo us images ar e not grouped toge ther but are individual images. Thus , they are save d as individual images on the memory card. If Instant Review is on (see âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25). at the end of taking a Continuous sequen ce of images , the final ima ge o f t h e s e qu en c e i s di sp l ay ed i n t h e In st a nt R ev i ew on t he i ma ge L CD. Y ou can do any of the following during the Instant Review period: î Record sound that will be attached to the final image of the sequence . For information on how to do this, see âRecording Soundâ on page 26. î Delete t he final image of the sequence by pr essing the middle (De lete) soft ke y. (All of the other images in the sequen ce were alread y save d to the me mory c ard.) î Save t he final image of the sequence to th e memory card and r eturn to the Cap ture mode immediately by pressing the right (Exit) soft k ey. (All of the other images in the sequ ence wer e already saved to the memory card.) î Do nothing and, when Instant Review times out (the def ault time-out is 3 seconds), t he final image of the sequence is the n saved to the mem ory card automatically. Note: If you are unhappy with any othe r images within a Conti nuous sequence (rather than just the final image, which you can only delete during Instant Review), you can delete those images in the Review mode. T o do this, see âDel eting I magesâ o n page 32 .
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 21 T aking More Adva nced Pictures Shooting Timelapse Images Note: The 10-Second Timer mode is disabled for the Timelap se image type. If you are using the: î Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter r elease button with no timer mode set, press and release the shutter release button one time . Then the camera captu res the firs t image of the Timelapse sequence . î 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote timer mo de timer mo de timer mode t im e r m o d e, point the HP Re mote Control at t he camer a, and press and release the Remote C ontrolâs trig ger button one time . The timer LED on the fr ont of the camer a (see page 24) b links fast er for 3 seconds. The n the camer a cap tures th e first image of the Timelapse sequence. Note: If the interval you set for Timelapse image capture is long, the camer a may go into sleep mode (shutting off the i mage L CD) between tak ing pictur es to conserve battery powe r. Also, if you set the Timelapse interval to 15 or 30 sec and you have the File T ype set to TIFF , the camer a may skip capturing an image if it is not finished processing the pre vious image i n the Time lapse sequ ence. The settings in the Timelapse menu option of the Capture Settings menu determine the number of pictures that ar e taken and the interval between pictures in th e Timelapse sequence of images th at are captur ed. (T o change the Timelap se settings, see âTimelapse Settings S ubmenuâ on page 54.) The image L CD displays the previously captur ed image while counting down to the next image capture. The only option you have is to stop the Timelapse sequence by pres sing the right (Stop) soft k ey. If Instant Review is on (see âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25). at the end of taking a Timelapse sequen ce of images, the first image in the se quence i s displ ayed in the Ins tant Revi ew on t he imag e L CD. Y ou can do any of the following during the Instant Review period: Note: If you are unhappy with one or mor e images within a Timela pse sequence, you can delete only those images in the Review mode (rather tha n deleting all of the images in th e sequ ence d uri ng In stant Revi ew). T o d o thi s, see âDeleting Imagesâ on page 32. î Record sound that will be attach ed t o th e first image of the sequence. For information on how to do this, see âRecording Soundâ on page 26. î Delete all of the images in the sequ ence by pre ssing the middle (Delete) soft key. î Save all of the images in the sequence to the memor y card and retur n to the Captur e mode immediately by pressing the right (Exit) soft k ey. Note: Al l images in a Timela pse sequence are saved as one group on the mem ory card. î Do nothing and, when Instant Review times out (the def ault time-out is 3 seconds), all of the images in the sequence are then saved to the memor y card automatically. Whatâs Next? The following sections provide m ore information ab out various features of your camera th at you can us e whe n takin g pic tures ( such a s the zo om), or tha t provi de you with i mpo rtant feed back o n the status of your came ra while y ou are taking pictur es (such as the LEDs). Once you have read through the following sections, continue on to Chapter 4 to l earn how to view and review the images you have captured via the came raâs Playback and Review modes.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 22 Using the Z oom Lever Using the Zoom Lever While you are fr aming the subject for a picture , you will lik ely find that you need to zoom in or out on the subject. This section explains the cam eraâs z oom lever, which you can use for th is purpose. Fig ur e 8: Zoom Lev er Rocking the zoom le ver (see Figure 8) left and right moves the lens continuou sly between wide angle and telephoto focal lengths for optical zo oming. The zoom lever also controls digital zooming. Digital zooming refers to digital cropping of the image, g iving the appear ance of gr eater zoom. After the opti cal z oom is at its maxi mum s etting, you can digitally zoom in three ste ps (see below). Note, however, that you must have th e image L CD on for the digital zoom to operate. (T o turn the image LCD on, press t he DISPLA Y button on the back of the camer a.) If the image L CD is turned on and the cameraâs zoom is at the end of the tele photo range, r eleasing and pressing the zoom lever will initiate digital zooming. A digital zoom icon will appear in the text message area of the image L CDâs top overlay bar. Digital zooming occurs in three st eps: Note: In di gital zoom mode, enlar gement is accomplished without changes in the lens configuration. Since the lens is not involved in d igita l zoo m, the c han ges appe ar only in the image L CD; they ar e not evident thr ough the viewfin der. î 1.2x î 1.5x î 2x The camera p auses for 250 milliseconds (1/4 second) betwe en steps. Digital zoom remains se t shot- to-s hot, but tu rns of f when you c ycle the pow er on t he ca mera. It also t urns off an y time you exi t th e live view of Capture mode (for example , you press the MENU button on the camer a to display the Capture m ode menus, or you tu rn the camer a mode dial to set the camer a to another mode). T o exit the digital zoom, you can also press, r elease, and then re-pr ess the zoom lever in the wide angle direction. Fig ur e 9 : Diopter Control Using the Diopter C ontrol The diopter contr ol (see Figure 9) is the small dial on t he left side of the viewfinder that you can turn to adjust the focus of t he p ictur e subj ect i n the viewfinder . Note that the di opter control has n o effec t on the image you captur e , however. Note: The diopter control does not affect the captured im age itself.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 23 Understanding the LEDs on th e Camera Understanding the LEDs on the Cam era Y our camer a has sever al LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) that light solid or blink to indicate that certain actions are occurring within the camera, or partic ular problem s may have occurr ed while you wer e performing a particular task with the camera. This sec tion describes what the se LEDs are and how they behave. Viewfinder LEDs The LEDs on the right side of the viewfinder (see Figure 10) display either a green light, re d light, or both, indicating ei ther the focus status, fl ash status, a memory card problem, or that the camera is processing an image and is not re ady to tak e a picture. Figur e 10 : Viewfind er LEDs Ta b l e 6 : Viewfinder LEDs Green Red LED Function Behavior Green (T op) Indicates focus status Lights solid when the s hutter release button is pressed halfway down to indic ate that the picture is ready t o take. Blin ks w hen t he c amera c anno t foc us on the picture subject. Red (Bottom) Indicates flash status Lights solid when the s hutter release button is pressed halfway down to indic ate that the flash is char ged and rea dy to fire. Blinks when the s hutter release bu tton is pressed halfway down to indi cate that the flash is char ging. Both Indicate a memory card prob lem, or that the camer a is processi ng an image and is not re ady to tak e a pictu re In t h e e ve n t o f a f u l l or m i s si n g m em o r y ca r d , both LE Ds blink when you pr ess the shutter release bu tton halfway down. In this case, 000 will also blink on the status LCD. In t he event of a bad or unformatted mem ory card, or when the came ra is pr ocessing an image and is not ready to take a picture, both LE Ds blink when you pr ess the shutter release bu tton halfway down.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 24 Understa nding the LEDs on the Camera Timer LED Figur e 1 1: Timer LED The red timer LED on the fr ont of the camer a (see Figur e 11) lights solid and/or blinks depe nding on the timer mode you set (see âSetting the Timer Modeâ on page 11). If you set the timer mode to the: î 10-Secon d Timer setting 10-Secon d Timer setting 10-Secon d Timer setting 1 0 - S e c o n d Ti m e r s e t t i ng , when you pres s a nd release t he shutter release button, the ti mer LED lights solid for 7 seconds. It then bl inks for the final 3 seconds befor e the camer a captures the imag e. î 3-Second Remote setting 3-Second Remote setting 3-Second Remote setting 3 -S e c on d R e m o te s e t ti n g , the t imer LED blinks slowly while waiting for you to pre ss the Remote Control âs trigger button. Once you press the t rigger button, the timer LED blinks faster for 3 seconds before the c amer a captures th e image. Memory Card Access LED Figure 1 2: Memory Card Access LED The amber memory car d access LED on the back of th e camera (see Figure 12) blinks whe never the camera is r eading from or writing to the memory card. Caution: Make sure t he came ra is pow ered off any time you remove the memory card fr om the camer a. Removing the me mory card when the memory card acce ss LED is blinking could corrupt the im ages and other files on the memory card.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 25 Using In stant Review Using Instant Review The Instant Review featur e a llows you to see displayed on the image LCD either t he One Shot image, the final image of a Conti nuous image sequence , or the first image of a Timelapse sequence you just capture d. The default se tting is that Instant Review is on for 3 seconds after the One Shot imag e or the final image in a Continuous or Timelapse sequence is captur e d. Y ou can change the dur ation that the image is displayed in Instant Re view or turn Instant Review off throug h the Display menu option in the Prefer ences menu of Captu re mode. (See âDisplay Submenuâ on page 67 and âSetting t he Displayâ on page 95.) Note: When Instant Review is set to Off, the camera immediately r eturns to Captur e mode, and the captured image or sequence of images is automatically saved to the m emory card. While an image is displayed in Instant Review on the image L CD, you can do any of the following: î Record s ound that will be attached either to the One Shot image, to the final image of a Continuous seque nce, or to the first image of a Timelapse sequence (see the next section, âRecording Soundâ). î Delete the captured image(s) by pre ssing the middle (Delete) soft key. Either the One Shot image, the final image of a C ontinuous sequence , or all of t he i ma g es i n a T im e la ps e s eq ue nc e will be del eted . Note: If you are unhappy with any othe r images within a Conti nuous sequence (rather than just the final image, which you can only delete during Instant Review), you can delete those images in the Review mode. T o do this, see âDel eting I magesâ o n page 32 . Similarly, if you are unhappy with one or more images within a Timela pse sequence, you can delete only those images in the Review mode (rather tha n deleting all of the images in th e sequ ence d uri ng In stant Revi ew). T o d o thi s, see âDeleting Imagesâ on page 32. When you pre ss the Dele te soft k ey, you will be pr ompted Delete? in the top overlay bar. Y ou can pre ss either the le ft (Delet e) soft k ey to de lete the imag e(s), or th e right (Cancel ) soft k ey to cancel the delete oper ation. If you recorded sound, then th e option of deleting Sound Only is also provided for the middle soft k ey. î Save the image(s) to the memory card and r eturn to the Capture mode immediately by pr es si n g the r ight (Exit) soft ke y. Ei ther t he One Shot image, the final image of a Continuous se quence, or all of the images in a Timelapse sequ ence will be saved. î Do nothing and, when Instant Review times out (the def ault time-out is 3 seconds), the image(s ) are then saved to the memory card automatically. Ei ther the One S hot image, the final image of a Conti nuous sequ ence, or all of the images in a Timelapse sequence will b e saved.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 26 Recording Sound Recording Sound Note: Y ou can record up to 45 seconds of soun d per image or s eque nce of imag es. Y ou can record sou nd to attach to your images when your cam era is in Capture mode and has In st a nt Re vi e w s e t on ( se e t h e p rev i ou s sec t io n ). Du ri n g t he In s ta nt R ev ie w p e ri od , th e c am e ra re co rd s the sound and then attaches it to either the One Shot image, to the final image of a Continuous sequence, or to the first im a ge of a Ti me l a ps e s eq u en ce t ha t yo u ju st c ap t ure d . T h e s ou n d r ec or di ng capability remains active dur ing the entire Instant Revie w period. Note: The microphone is located on the fr ont of the camera. So if you are re cording your own voice, you may get better s ound quality by rotating the camer a around to f ace you. Y ou can also r ecord sound in the P layback or Review modes to attach to images. (See the second Note on the left for mor e information.) On ce y ou h av e ca p tu re d a n im ag e or s e qu en c e o f im ag e s i n Ca p tu re mo de a nd t he I ns t an t Re v ie w is displayed on the image L CD, do the following to record sound that will be attached to the image: Figure 13 : Screen During Sound Recording 1 Press the sound record b utton on the back of the camer a to activate the recor ding. A microphone icon flashes and the le ngth of the recor ding in minutes and seconds (00:00) appears in the top ove rlay bar of the image L CD (see Figure 13). 2 Record your so und (up to 45 seconds). 3 Press the sound recor d bu tton ag ain to stop the re cording . The scr een dis plays Ready i n th e top overl ay ba r, and three soft key labels in th e bott om ove rlay bar: Play , Del ete, and Exi t (f rom left to right). 4 Do any of the following: î Press the left (Play) soft k ey to play back the sound recor ded. Note: Y ou can also record sound to attach to a One Shot im age, any of the imag es in a Continuous sequence, or to the first image in a Timelaps e sequenc e of i mages a fter t he Inst ant Review perio d has finished . T o do so, you must set the c amera to eit her Pl ayback or Rev iew mode. Then select an image or sequence of images in the Playback or Review mode and follow steps 1-4 (to the right on this page) to record sou nd that will be attached to the selected image or se quence of images. î Press the middle (Delete) soft k ey to delete either the image(s) and the sound, or to de lete the sound only. î Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to immediately save the image(s) and the attached sound to the memory card. î Do nothing and allow the Instant Review to time out. In this case , the image(s) and the attached sound are autom atically saved to the m emory card.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Revi ewing Images 27 Using Playback Mode Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images Overvie w This chapter explains how to view capt ured images via the Play back mode and how to review the images via the Review mode. This chapter covers t he followin g topics: î âUsing Playback Modeâ on page 27 î â Accessing the Playback Modeâ on page 27 î âViewing Images Full Scr eenâ on page 28 î âUnderstanding the Overlay Barsâ on page 28 î âT urni ng the Overlay Bars Off and Onâ on page 28 î âZooming in on Imagesâ on page 28 î âPlaying Back Timelapse and Grou ped Imagesâ on page 28 î âCreating and Playing a Slideshowâ on page 29 î âUsing Review Modeâ on page 30 î â Accessing the Review Modeâ on page 30 î âSelecting Imagesâ on page 30 î âMarking and Unmark ing Imagesâ on page 31 î âExpanding and Collapsing Timelapse or Groupe d Imagesâ on page 31 î âDeleting Imagesâ on page 32 î âGrouping Images and Dissolving Image Groupsâ on page 33 î âProtec ting and Unprotecting Imagesâ on page 34 î âCategorizing I mages and Desel ecting Image Ca tegoriesâ on page 35 î âSearching for Images by Date and by Categoryâ on page 36 Using Playback Mode Acces sing the Playba ck Mo de Note: Y ou cannot delete images while in Playback mode. Y ou can delete images in Review mode, however. (See âDeleting Imagesâ on page 32.) T o access the Playback mode: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Playback mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already . The Playback mode scr een is displayed on the image LCD.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Revi ewing Images 28 Using Playback Mode Viewing Images Full Scr een When you first enter Playback m ode, the image L CD displays the last image saved on the memory card. T he im age a ppea rs fu ll sc reen. T o vie w a fu ll sc reen i mage o f the o ther cap tured i mag es on t he memory card, pr ess the right or left arrow on the 4-way c ontroller to scroll thr ough the images. Understanding the Overla y Bars The Playback mode displays two overlay bar s. The top overlay bar c ontains information about the image (including the image number, the date and time the image was capt ured, as well as some of the key ca mera set tings t hat w ere used to ca pture t he imag e, such as th e ima ge type and e xposure mode). The bottom ove rlay bar contains the soft k e y labels. T urning the Overlay Bars Off and On By default, bo th the top and bottom ov erlay bars are displayed in Playback mode. Howe ver, you can t urn o ne or bo th ov erla y bars off so you can se e more o f eac h imag e on t he ima ge LCD. Sim ply press the DISPLA Y button on t he back of the camer a once to tu rn both overlay bars off, a se cond time to turn the botto m one on only, and a third time to turn bot h on again. Zooming in on Images If you want to see a portion of an image in more detail, press the middle (Zoom) soft ke y. When you are zoomed in, you can use the 4-way contr oller to see differ ent parts of the im age. Y ou must then zoom out by pr essing the middle (Zoom Out ) soft k ey before m oving to a different image. Playing Back Timelapse and Grouped Images Note: Y ou can chang e the playback r a te in the Playback Rate submenu of the Play Se ttings menu. F or more information, see â Playback Rate Submenuâ on page 76. Y ou can play back sequences of Timel apse and grouped images at a pr e-defined r ate, much like a slideshow. T o play back image sequences: 1 Use the 4-way contr oller to scr oll to the Timelaps e or grouped images you want to play back. 2 Press the left (Play) s oft ke y. The images, including any sound you have attached t o them, will play back on the image L CD. 3 Press t he left (Stop) soft k ey to stop playing back your images.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Revi ewing Images 29 Using Play back Mode Creating and Playing a Slideshow Y ou can create a slide show to display your images on the image L CD or on a television scr een. Y our slideshow can incl ude all of the images on t he mem ory car d, or you can choose a single category of images to use. For mor e information on: î Categor ies, s ee âCat egorizing Images and Des electin g Image Catego riesâ o n page 35 . î Connecting your camer a to a television so that you can view a slideshow on the t elevision, see âConnecting the Camera to Y our T elevisionâ on p age 50. T o create and play a slideshow: 1 Press the MENU butt on on the back of the camera. The Slideshow option of the Play Settings menu is highlighted. 2 Press the left (Edit) soft key to go to the Slideshow submenu. 3 Change any of the settings in the Slideshow submenu, as desired. For mor e information about these settin gs, see â Slideshow Subme nuâ on page 75. 4 Press the left (Start) soft k ey to begin the slide show. 5 Y ou can stop the slideshow at any time by pressing the left (Stop) soft k ey. 6 After you have st opped the slid eshow or it has ended, press t he right (Exit) soft k ey to save the settings and exit the Slideshow menu.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 30 Using Review Mode Using Review Mode Acces sing t he Rev iew Mo de T o access the Review mode: Figur e 14: Image L CD Screen in Review Mode 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. The Review mode scree n is displayed on the image L CD (see Figure 14). The image L CD displays the im ag e s t h at ar e s a ve d o n t h e m em o ry ca rd . Th e i ma g es a pp ea r as sm a ll t hu mb na i ls a lo n g t he t op of the s creen. The small thumbnai l that has the selection marker under it is the selected image. The selecte d image is also displayed as the lar ge thumbnail on the bottom left of the scr een. Information about the sel ec ted im age (i ncl ud ing th e imag e num ber an d the d ate a nd ti me t he ima ge was c apt ur ed) appears on the bottom right of the scre en. If the selected image is a part of a grou p, the group name is also displayed. If the image was t ransmitted to this came ra fr om another camer a, and the other camer a had a camera name assigned, then the camer a name is displayed (instead of any group name). The icon bar above the image information ar ea shows whether the se lected image is a single image, a c ol l a ps ed T im el a ps e se qu e nc e of i ma ge s , o r a c o ll ap s ed gr ou p of i ma ge s . T h e i c on b ar al s o s h ow s a sound icon if sound is attached to the selected image, as wel l as a category icon if a category has been assigned to the s elected image. Selecting Images The selection mark er beneath the small thumbnail row indic ates which image is selected and is displayed as the large thu mbnail, along with its image information, at the bottom of the scre en. T o select an image, press the righ t or left arrow on the 4- way controlle r to scroll thr ough the th um b na i ls un t il t h e s el e ct i on ma r ker i s u n de r t h e i m ag e t h at y ou w an t to s el ec t . Th e s el e ct e d i m ag e is now displayed as the large thu mbnail, along with its image information, at the bottom of th e screen. Selec tion marke r Image information Thumbnails Selec ted imag e Soft k ey lab els
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 31 Using Review Mode Marking and Unmarking Images Y ou can mark sever al images so that, when you se lect an action from th e Review mode menus , that action will apply to all the mark ed images. For example , you can mark sever al images and delete them all at once, instead of having to delete one image at a time. Figu re 15: A Marked Imag e T o mar k or u nmar k all of the image s on the me mory card , pres s and hold t he le ft (M ark or Un mark ) soft k ey for 3 seconds, and then r elease it. T o mark one or more (but not all) images: 1 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the thumbnails until the selection arrow is under an image you want to mark. 2 P re s s t h e l e f t ( M a r k ) s o f t ke y . A n o t c h a p pe a r s i n t h e l o w e r r i g h t c o r n er o f t h e se l e c t e d t h u m b n a i l image (s ee Figu re 15). 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to mark additional images. T o unmark an image, scroll to the mark ed image, a nd then pres s the left (Unmark ) soft k ey. Expanding and Collap sing Timelapse or Grouped Images When yo u take Time lapse pictu res, the camera takes a seque nce of p ictures an d auto matical ly group s the captur ed im ages, usi ng the fir st captur ed image to repr esent th e seque nce. Y ou can also group individual images using the Gr oup menu option of the Review mode m enus (see âGr ouping Images and Dissolving Image Groupsâ on page 33). This section ex plains how to expand Timelapse or grouped images into the individual images, and how to collaps e them again. Figure 16: An Expanded Group T o expand Timelapse or grouped images: 1 Select the image that repr esents the Timelapse or grouped image sequ ence that you want to expand. 2 Press the right (Expand) soft k ey. Thumbnails of all the im ages in the sequence ar e displayed with links between the m (see Figur e 16). T o collapse Timelapse or grouped images: 1 Select any image in the Timelapse sequence or group you want to collapse. 2 Press the ri ght (C ollap se) s oft key. A no tch indic ates a mar ked imag e
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 32 Using Review Mode Deleting Images Y ou can delete a single image that is currently selected (whe ther it is a One Shot or Continu ous image, an individual image within an expanded Timelapse sequence, or an indivi dual image within an expanded group of images), all m arked im ages, a collapsed Timelapse seque nce of images, or a collapsed group of images fr om the memory card. T o delete images: 1 Select the ima ge o r mark th e image s you want to d elete. Note: T o mark or unmark all of the images on the memory car d, press and hold t he left (Mark or Unmark) soft k ey for 3 seconds, and then release it. If yo u want to delete one or more images (but not all the images) within a Timelapse sequence or a group of images, first follow the instructions in âEx panding and Collapsing Timelapse or Grouped Imagesâ on page 31 to expand th e Timelapse sequence or gr oup of images. Then s el ec t t h e i m a g e o r m a r k t h e i m a ge s yo u w a n t t o d e l e t e f r o m th e e x p a n d e d T i m e l a p se s eq u e n c e or group of images. Note: Protect ed i mages will not be d eleted. Se e âProtecting and Unpr otecting Imagesâ on page 34. 2 If you want to: î Delete only the curr ently selected single image, collapsed Timelapse seque nce of images, or collapse d gr oup of images, pres s the m iddle (Delete) soft k ey in the Review mo de scree n. î Delete all of the mark ed images, pre ss the MENU bu tton on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displayed, with the Delete menu option highlighted. Pr ess the middl e (Del ete) s oft key. 3 Press the left (Delete ) soft k ey again to delete the im age(s).
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 3 3 Using Review Mode Grouping Images an d Dissolving Image Gr oups Note: A g roup becom es a folder on the memory card, in which all the images in t hat group are stored. Y ou can group images to organize t hem in one folder on the mem ory card. T o group images: 1 Mark the images you wish to gr oup. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Gro up menu option. 4 Move to the Gr oup Name menu b y pressing eith er the left (Cr eate) soft k ey if there are no existing groups, or the le ft (Add) soft k ey and then the middle (C reate New) soft k ey if there are existing gr oups. Note: Group names must be eight char acters or less, and cannot contain spaces . Also, th e camera does not acce pt group name s that begin with BR or TL (regardless of language) because th ese lette rs ar e res erved. 5 Name the new group by doing the following. (See the Note on the left for restrictions on group names.) î Press the up or down arrow on the 4- way controller to scr oll to the letter you want to use. î Press the right arr ow on the 4-way control ler t o add a letter to the name , or the left arrow to dele te a l ette r. For e xample , if yo u se lect t he le tter âLâ a nd th en press the r igh t arrow on t he 4-way cont roll er, the l etter ap pears in the center o f the scr e en. Figure 17 : T wo Images in a Group 6 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to exit the Gr oup Name menu, and then press E xit again to exit the Review mode menus. Y ou are returned to the Review m ode scree n. The name of the gro up now appears in the image information for all the images in the group when each image is se lected, and the images in the group have a link icon between them (see the ex ample in Figure 17). T o dissolve (remove) the gr ouping on images: 1 Select any image included in the group you want to dissolve. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Gro up menu option. 4 Press the cent er (Dis solve) soft key to dis solve (remove) the g rouping. Note: Di ssolving a group does not delet e the images in the g roup, only the group name. 5 Pre s s t he ri g ht (E xi t ) s of t key . Y ou are re tu r ne d t o t he Re v ie w m o de sc ree n , a nd t he im ag es a re n o longer groupe d.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 34 Using Review Mode Protec ting and Un protec ting Images Y ou can protec t images so that they wonât b e deleted accidentally. (Whe n an image is protecte d, it cannot be deleted fr om the mem ory card.) T o protect images: Figur e 18: A Protected Im age 1 S elect an image or mark the images you want to protect. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Pro tect menu option. 4 Press the center (Protec t) soft k ey. Y ou are returned to the R eview mode scree n, and a Protect icon a ppears in the i mage i nformatio n for the prote cted im age(s) (see Fi gure 18) . T o remove protection from (unpr otect) images: 1 Select an image or mark the images you want to unprotect. 2 Press the ME NU bu tton . 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Pro tect menu option. 4 Press the left (Unpr otect) soft k ey. Y ou are returned to the R eview mode scr een, and there is no longer a Protect icon in th e image information for the image(s). Protect icon
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 35 Using Review Mode Categorizing Images and Deselect ing Image Categories Y ou can assign a category to your images to mak e them easier to find and organize. Y ou can also play a slideshow of a category of images very easily. Y ou can eith er categ orize one im age at a time, or mark a numbe r of them and apply one catego ry to all of the marked images. T o categorize one or more images: 1 Select or mark the imag e(s) you wish to categ orize. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. Figure 19 : A Categorized Image 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Categorize menu option. 4 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey to move to the Categories sub menu. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4-way controller to scr oll to th e category you want to assign to the image(s). 6 Press the left (Select) soft k ey. A che ckmark appear s n ext to t hat cate gory, and you a re r eturned to th e Re v ie w m o de sc re en . A n ic o n r ep re se nt i ng th e ca te g or y y o u a ss i gn ed t o t h e i ma g e( s ) n ow appears in the image information for the se lected image(s) (see Figur e 19). T o deselect an imageâs category: 1 Selec t the image whose catego ry you want t o desel ect. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Categorize menu option. 4 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey to move to the Categories sub menu. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4- way controlle r to scroll to the category you want to deselect. 6 Press the left (Deselect) soft k ey. Y ou are r eturned to the Re view mode screen, and the cat egory icon is no longer in the image information for the selected image. Categor y icon
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 36 Using Review Mode Searching for Imag es by Date and by Category Figure 2 0: Find By Date Y ou can use the Find me nu in Review mode to sear ch for images by date or by category . For m ore information on categories, see âCategorizing Images and Deselecting Image Cate goriesâ on page 35. T o search for images b y date: 1 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 2 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller to scr oll to the Find menu. 3 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey. Fig ure 21: Res ults of a Find by Date Operation 4 Enter the r ange of dates you want the cam era to u se to searc h for images (see Figure 20 ).: î Press the right arrow of the 4-way contr oller to scrol l to the month, day, and year fiel ds. î Press the up and down arrows to ch ange the month, day, and year. 5 Pre s s t he l ef t ( F in d) s of t key. T he re su lt s of y our s ea rc h app e ar on t he i ma ge LCD ( s ee Fi g ure 2 1) . Not ice th e Fin d ico n at t he bo ttom righ t of the scree n, wh ich indi cate s that the disp layed ima ges are the res ult o f a Fin d ope ration. 6 Press the arro ws on the 4-way con tro ller to scr oll thr ough the images. When you a re done, pr ess the center (Show All) soft key to resume viewing all the images stored on the memory car d. Note: I f th ere are n o ima ges with in th e range o f dates that you sp ecified, the im age L CD displays the message: âNo images m atched search criteria.â In this case, you can ei ther press the middle (Show All) soft k ey to r esume viewing all images stored on the mem ory card, or press the le ft (Find) soft k ey to select a new ran ge o f da t es . Find icon
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 37 Using Review Mode T o search for images b y catego ry: 1 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 2 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller to scr oll to the Find menu. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4- way controller to sc roll to By Category. 4 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4- way controller to sc roll to the category you want to view. 6 Press t he left (Se lect) soft k ey. The results of your sear ch appear on the image L CD. Notice th e Find icon at the bottom right of the screen, which indicates that the display ed images are the result of a Find oper a tion. 7 Press the arr ows on the 4-w ay contr oller to scr oll through the images. When you a re done, pr ess the center (Show All) soft key to resume viewing all the images stored on the memory car d.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 38 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer Chapter 5: Sharing Images Overvie w Y ou can use the images you capt ure with your camer a in many fun and creative ways. Y ou can transf er th em t o your com puter for use i n crea tiv e proje cts, or f or s hari ng wi th fa mily and f rien ds vi a the Internet. If you have a printer that supports the HP JetSend infr ared technology, you can use JetSend for wireless printing of your images. Y ou can even connect the camer a to your television to view a slideshow of your images on the television. This chapter covers t he followin g topics: î âT ransferring Images to Y our Computerâ on page 38 î âUsing a Digital Print Order F ormat (DPOF) Fileâ on page 44 î âJetSending Images to a Printerâ on page 46 î âT ransmitting Images Between T wo Camerasâ on page 48 î âConnecting the Camera to Y our T elevisionâ on p age 50 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer Caution: Be aware that any sound (namely, sound tags and other EXIF tags) you have captured and attached t o images with your camera may not b e supported and may be lost i f y o u u s e i ma ge ed i t i n g s o f t w a r e o t h er th a n th e HP Photo Imaging Software with the images on your comp uter. Y ou can transfe r images to your computer when the camer a is set to PC Co nnect mode. The PC Conn ect Mode subme nu of the P referenc es menu let s you spe cify how the cam era will app ear to yo ur co mp ut e r whe n co nn e ct e d vi a the USB int er fa c e. Y ou can set th e ca me ra to one of the fo l lo w in g settings in the PC Connect M ode submenu depending on the op erating system that is running on your comp uter: PC Co nnect Mod e PC Co nnect Mod e PC Co nnect Mod e PC Connect Mode How Imag es ar e Transferr ed How Im ages are T ransf erred How Im ages are T ransf erred How Images are Transferred Operating Systems Operating System s Operating System s Operating System s Digita TM Devi ce (default) Y ou can use s oftware included with y our compute r or camera to transfer im ages to the co mputer. Windows ® Me, 98 , and 2000 USB Disk Drive The camer a is operat ed as a USB Mass Stor age Device an d appear s as a disk drive con nected t o your comp uter. So you can copy images from your c amera to the compu ter a s yo u woul d from another disk drive. Mac® OS 8. 6 or better, and Wind ows Me, 98, and 2000
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 39 T ransferring Images to Y our Comp uter The one ex ception is Windows N T 4.0, because it does not support the USB interf ace . A Windows NT 4.0 computer mu st have either an HP P1000 /1100 or similar printer, or a memory card re ader conn ecte d to its seri al o r pa rallel int erfa ce. Y ou c an t hen t ransfe r im age s from t he c ameraâ s memo ry card to the compu ter via either the memory car d slot in the HP printer, or the me mory card r eader. The foll owing three subsect ions explain how to tra nsfer ima ges to a comput er dep ending on th e PC Connect Mode setting on the came ra and/or the op erating sys tem that is running on the computer: î T o use the Digita Device setting to trans fer images from your came ra to a Windows Me, 98, or 2000 computer, see t he first subsection be low. î T o use the USB Disk Drive setting to transfer images fr om your camera to either a Macintosh® computer running Mac OS 8 .6 or better , or a Windows Me, 98, or 2000 compu ter, see the subsection on pa ge 41. î T o trans fer imag es from the mem ory c ard to a Windo ws NT 4.0 co mput er, se e the subs ect ion on page 43. Note: If you have a Windows 98 or 2000 computer, it is assum ed in this subsection that you have already followed the HP 6 18 Digital Camera Quick Start Guide to install the HP Photo Imaging Software on your computer. T ransferring Images Using the Digit a Device Setting If your computer is running Windows Me, 98, or 2000, you can tr a nsfer images from your camera to the computer by us ing the defaul t Digita Device setting in the PC Connect Mode sub menu. If your camera is running: î Windows Me Windows Me Windows Me Wi n d o ws M e, you can then use the Microsoft® Scanner and Camera Wizard that is included on your Windows Me system to transfe r the images from the came ra to your computer. Figu re 2 2: Connec tors on the USB Cable î Windows 98 or 2000 Windows 98 or 2000 Windows 98 or 2000 Windows 98 or 2000, y o u c an th en us e th e H P Ph ot o Im ag in g S o ft wa r e th at c am e wi th yo ur camera to tr ansfer the images from the camer a to your compute r. T o transfer images to your Windows Me, 98, or 2000 computer, do the following: 1 Power off the camer a if it is still on. 2 Power on the computer if y ou havenât already. 3 Connect the rect angular end of the USB cable to the USB port on the front or back exterior of your computer (see F igure 22). To C o m p u t e r To C a m e r a
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 40 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer Figur e 23: Connecti ng the U SB Cabl e to the Camera 4 Open the door to the cameraâs connector compartme nt and connect the square en d of the USB cable to the bottom (USB) connector (see Figure 23). 5 Set the camer a to PC Connect mode . 6 Power on the camera. Within a few se conds, you r compu ter dete cts the camer a on t he US B port. What happens next depends on what ve rsion of Windows your computer is running: Windows Me Windows Me Windows Me Windows Me Your computer runs the Microsoft Scanner and Camera Wizard. Follow the pr ompts in the Wizar d to copy the images to your computer. Windows 9 8 Windows 9 8 Windows 9 8 Windows 9 8 or 2000 or 2000 or 2000 or 2000 The main window of the HP Photo Imaging Software opens. Do the following: 1. C l i c k Unload Camera Unload C amera Unload C amera Unload C amera i n t he m ai n win do w. 2. Click the St a r t Sta rt Sta rt St a r t but ton in th e Unload Images window. The images are copied to your computer.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 41 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer T ransferring Images Using the USB Disk Drive Setting If your computer is running either Macintosh OS 8.6 or better, or Windows Me, 98, or 2000, you can transfe r images from your camer a to the computer by using the USB Disk Drive setting in the PC Connect Mode submenu. In so doing, the camera will oper ate as a USB Mass S torage Device and appear as a disk drive connect ed to your com puter. Y ou can then copy images fr om your camera to the computer as you woul d from another disk drive. The following two sub sections explain how. Setting the USB Disk Drive Mode on the Came ra Note: If you have a Macintosh computer and have already followed the instru ctions in the HP 618 Di gital Came ra Quick Start Guide t o set the USB Disk Drive mode on your camera, s kip these instructions and go on to âUsing Y our Camera as a USB Mass Storage Device to T ransfer Imagesâ on page 42. Y ou must fir st set your camera to USB Disk Dr ive mode as follows: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Capture mode menus are displayed on the imag e LCD. 4 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller thr ee times to move to the Pr eferences m enu. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4- way controlle r three time s to move to the PC Connect Mode menu option. 6 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey. The PC Connect Mode submenu is displayed, and the USB Disk Drive option is highlighted. 7 Press the left (Select) soft k ey. The checkmark mo ves to the USB Disk Drive option, and you retur n to the Prefer ences menu of Capture mode. Th e camera is now set to USB Disk Drive mode. 8 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to exit the menu. 9 Power off the cam era by using the camer aâs power switch. The USB Disk Drive mode will remain set on your camera only if you power off the camera b y using the power swi tch. By poweri ng off the c amera correct ly, you w ill not have to r epeat t he pre v io u s pro ce d ur es wh en tran s fe rr i ng im ag es to you r co m pu te r via the US B Di s k Dr iv e mod e in the future .
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 42 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer Using Y our Camera as a USB M ass Storage Device to T ransfer Images Note: S oftware for Macintosh computers was included with your c amer a. If you wish, you can use this software to tr ansfer images to your Macintosh, instead of the pr ocedures her e. This software also provides tools for editing images and using them in creative pr ojects. Once your cam era is set to USB Disk Drive mode, y ou can tr ansfer images to either your Macintosh OS 8.6 or better computer, or your Windows Me, 98, or 20 00 computer, by doing the following: 1 Power on the computer if you havenât already. 2 Connect the rect angular end of the USB cable to the USB port on either your Macintosh computerâs k eyboard, or to the fr ont or back exterior of y our Windows compu ter (see Figur e 24). Figure 24 : Connectors on the USB Cable 3 Open the door to the cameraâs connector compartme nt and connect the square en d of the USB cable to the bottom (USB) connector (see Figure 25). 4 Set the camer a mode dial to PC Connect mode . 5 Power on the camer a. If you have a: î Macintosh computer, an icon labeled âUntitledâ appears on your com puterâs desktop. The camera is now view ed by your Macintosh as a new disk drive. î A Windows computer, the camer a appears as a r emovable disk drive connected to y our computer under th e My Computer folder in Windows Explorer. If you have a Windows 98 or 2000 computer and have installed the HP Photo Imaging Software on your computer (by following the instructions in the HP 61 8 Dig ital Camer a Quick Start Guide ), th en the ma i n wi nd o w of th e HP Pho t o Im a gi n g So ft w are al so op en s . Y o u can either follow step 6 below t o copy the image files fr om the camer a to the computer in Windows Explorer, or you can use the HP Photo Imaging Software to transfer the images. Fig ur e 25: Connecting the USB Cable to the Camer a 6 Cop y th e imag e fi les f rom the disk driv e (th e cam era) to t he har d dri ve of y our compu ter as you would from a floppy disk. To M a c i n t o s h Ke y b o a r d To C a m e r a or W in dows Comput er
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 43 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer T ransferring Images from a Memory Car d to a Windows NT 4.0 Computer Note: It is assumed in this subsection that you have already followed the HP 6 18 Digital Camera Quick Start Guide to install the HP Photo Imaging Software on your computer. T o transfer images to your Windows NT 4.0 comp uter, you must have either an HP printer (such as the HP P1000/1100 ) that has a slot for reading a me mory card, or a memory car d reade r connected to the computerâs serial or para llel interfac e. (This is because Windows NT 4.0 does not support the USB interface.) Y ou can then transfer images from the camer aâs memory card to your computer via either the HP printe râs memory card sl ot, or the memory c ard re ader. If you are us ing an HP pr inter that has a memory car d slot If you are us ing an HP pr inter that has a memory car d slot If you are us ing an HP pr inter that has a memory car d slot If you are us ing an HP pr inter that has a memory car d slot, r ef er t o the pr int erâ s d oc um en t at ion to tr ansfer images from th e memory card to your W indows NT 4.0 computer via the printe râs memory card sl ot. If you are us ing a memory car d reader If you are us ing a memory car d reader If you are us ing a memory car d reader If you are us ing a memory car d reader , tr ans f e r ima ges fr om th e m emo ry c ar d t o y our W in dow s NT 4.0 computer as foll ows: 1 Power off the camer a if it is still on. 2 Remove the memory car d from the came ra. T o do this, open the memory card door and pr ess th e m e mor y ca rd re le as e bu tt o n t o e j ec t t he ca rd . Gra sp th e ca rd by it s s i de e dg es an d p u ll i t o ut of the slot. 3 Insert the memory car d into the memory car d slot in the memory car d reader. 4 Power on the computer if you havenât alre ady. 5 Double-click the HP Photo Imaging Softwar e icon on th e Windows desktop. T he main window of the HP Photo Imaging Software opens. 6 Click U n l o a d C a m e r a Unload Camera Unload Camera Un l o a d C a me r a in the mai n window. Because no USB camera is found, the software displays a dialog box in which you can select the drive letter for your memory car d reader. 7 Select the drive letter (such as H : H: H: H :) for your memory card reader in the dialog bo x. 8 Click the St a r t Start Start St a r t b utton in the Unload Image s window. Th e images are copied to your computer.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 44 Using a Digi tal Print Order F ormat (DPOF) File Using a Digital Print Order F ormat (DPOF) File A DPOF file is a file you cre ate using your camer a that allows you to pre-sele ct which images you want to print. The file is stor ed on the memory card and contains information about which images ar e s el e ct e d, ho w ma ny of e ac h i m ag e is t o b e p r in te d, a nd a t w ha t si z e t o p r in t e a ch o f t he m . T he f il e is used by s elected HP printers an d other printing devices that can re ad a DPOF file direc tly fr om the memory card. Note: If you delete an image that is reference d in a DPOF file on the memory card, you must erase and t hen re-create the DPOF file before you can print images via the DPOF file. Creating a DPOF File T o create a DPOF file: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Either select one image or mark m ultiple images in the Revie w mode screen that you want to include in the DP OF file. (See â Selecting Imagesâ on page 30 and âMarking and Unmarking Imagesâ on page 31 for more information.) 4 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Review mode menu s are displayed. 5 Press the right arr ow on the 4-way controller once to mo ve to the Print Order F orm menu. Note: For more informati on on the Print Or der Form menu, see page 81. 6 Press the left (Add) soft ke y to select the highlighted Add Images m enu option. The Add to Order submenu is displayed. 7 Use the arrows on the 4-way contr oller to specify the number of Copies you want of t he selected or mark ed images, as well as the Size you want them printed. The Size settings include: î Standard (default ) â One of the standard print s izes. Y ou specify the exact size you want your Standard prints to be at the printer. For exa mple, you can specify that all Standard images be printe d at 4â x 6â. î Index â Thumbnails of the images. 8 Press the left (Add) soft key t o save the settings and return to th e Print Order F orm menu.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 45 Using a Digital Print Order F ormat (DPOF) File Viewing a DPOF File T o vi ew a DPOF file, do the following while in the Print Or der Form m enu: 1 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to highlight the View Or der menu option. 2 Press the left (Select) soft k ey. The Print Order For m screen is displayed, which lists the contents of the DPOF file. Y ou can scroll thr ough this list using the up and down arrows on the 4-way controller. However , you cannot edit this list. Era sing a DPOF File T o erase a DPOF file, do the following while in the Print Or der F orm menu: 1 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to highlight the Erase Orde r menu option. 2 Press the left (Er ase) soft k ey. Y ou will see a confir mation of yo ur c hoice to er ase al l e ntries from the Print Or der Form. 3 Press the middle (Erase) soft k ey to erase all of the entries from the Print Order F orm.
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 46 JetSending Images to a Printer JetSending Images to a Printer HP JetSend allows for easy, wireless printing. If your printer supports the HP JetSend infrared t ec h n o l o g y , y o u c a n t ra n s f e r y o u r i m a g e s d i re c t l y f r o m t h e c am e r a t o t h e p r i n t er wi th o u t co n n e c t i n g any cables. See your printerâs documentation for more information. Note: It will take an average of 20 seconds to JetSend an image from the camer a to a printer. There are two different ways you can JetSend images to a printer. Y ou can use the Send button on the back of the camera to JetSend only the curr ent image in the Capture, Playback, or Review mode to a printer. Or you can use the T ransmit menu in Review mode to JetSend the current image or all mark ed images to a printer. Each of these methods is expl ained in the following subsections. Using the Send Button to JetSen d Only the Current Image T o JetSend only the curr ent image to a JetSend-capable printer: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to either Capture , Playback , or Review mode. 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 If you are in: î Capture m ode, you will automatically be JetSending the last image you capt ured. Y ou do not need to do anything to select the image. î Playback or Review mode , press the right or left arr ow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll through your images in the Playback or Review mode scr een until the image you w ant to transfer is displayed or se lected. 4 Set your printer to receive images to print. See your printerâs docum entation for details. F igu re 26: Infrared Window on the Ca mer a 5 Aim the cameraâs infr ared window (see Figure 26) at the printerâs infr ared sensor, and place the camera about 10 inches away fr om the printer. 6 Press the Send button on t he back of th e camer a. The camer a immediately st arts a JetSend session, searches for a com patible printer, and s ends the curre nt image to the printer. (If the current ima ge is actually a collapsed Timelapse sequence or group of images, only the first image of the sequenc e or group is sent.) During the tr ansfer, the image L CD reads: âSending 1 image.. .â and shows a pr ogress bar. Y ou can cancel the transfer at any time by pressing the cente r (Stop) soft ke y on the camera. A confirmation screen will display to show that the Send was successful. 7 Press the right (Done) soft k ey when you have finished tr ansmitting images to the printer.
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 47 JetSending Images to a Printer Using the T ransmit Menu to JetSen d the Current or All Mark ed Images T o JetSend the current image or all mark ed images to a JetSend-capable printer: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Either select one image or mark m ultiple images in the Revie w mode screen that you want to JetS end. (See âSel ecti ng I mages â on page 30 an d âMa rkin g and Unmar kin g Ima gesâ on pag e 3 1 for more information.) 4 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Review mode menu s are displayed. 5 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller two times to move to the T ransmit menu. 6 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to highlight the C amera-Pr inter menu option. 7 Set your printer to receive images to print. See your printerâs documentation for details. 8 Aim t he came raâs infrared window (see Figure 26 on page 46) at the printerâs infr ared sensor, and place the came ra about 10 inches away from the p rinter. 9 Press the left (Se nd) soft k e y on the cam era. The camer a i mmediately starts a JetSend session, searches for a comp atible printer, and sends the cur rent or all m arked images to the printer. During the tr ansfer, the image L CD reads: âSending X image(s).. .â and shows a progress bar. Y ou can cancel the transfer at any time by pressing the middle (Stop) soft k ey on the camera. A confirmation screen will display to show that the Send was successful. 10 Press the right (Done) soft k ey when you have finished tr ansmitting images to the p rinter.
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 48 T ransmitting Images Between T wo Ca meras T ransmitti ng Images Between T wo Camer as Y ou can use the Camer a-Camera option in the T ransmit menu of Review mode to send images fr om your camer a to another camer a, or to receive images fr om another camera. The other camer a must use the standard Digita tr ansmit protocol. See the other camer aâs documentation for details. Sending Images to Another Ca mera T o send the current image or all marked images to another Digita camera: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Either select one image or mark m ultiple images in the Revie w mode screen that you want to send to the other camera. (See âSelecting Imagesâ on page 30 and âMarking and Unmarking Imagesâ on page 31 for more information.) 4 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Review mode menu s are displayed. 5 Press the right arrow on the 4-way controller tw o times to move to t he T ransmit menu. The Camera-Camera menu option is highlighted. 6 Press t he left (Sen d) soft k e y on your cam era. Y our camer a âs image L CD reads: âReceiving Camera Ready ?â 7 Set the other camera to rec eive images. See the other camer aâs documentation for details. 8 Aim your camer aâs infrared window (see Figure 26 on page 46) at the other camer aâ s infrare d sensor, and set th e camera s about 10 inches apart . 9 Press the left (Continue) soft k ey on your camera. Y our camer a immediately searches for another compatible camera and begins to transmit images to the other camera. During the tr ansfer, the image L CD reads: âSending X image(s).. .â and shows a progress bar. Y ou can cancel the transfer at any time by pressing the middle (Stop) soft k ey on your camer a. A confirmation screen will display to show that the transfer was successful. 10 Press the ri ght (D one) s oft key wh en you have finish ed transmit ting i mages to t he othe r ca mera.
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 49 T ransmitting Ima ges Between T wo Cameras Receiving Images fr om Another Camer a T o receive images from another Digita camera: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Review mode menu s are displayed. 4 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller two times to move to the T ransm it menu. The Camera-Camera menu option is highlighted. 5 Press the middle (Receive) soft k ey on your came ra. 6 Set the other camer a to send images. See the other camer aâs documentation for details. 7 Aim your cameraâs infrared window (see Figure 26 on page 46) at the other camer aâ s infrared sensor, and set th e camera s about 10 inches apart . 8 Send the images fr om the other camer a. See the other camer aâs documentation for details. 9 Press the right (Done) soft k ey when your camer a has received all of the images.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 50 Connecting the Camera to Y ou r T elevision Connecting the Camer a to Y our T elevisi on Note: Y our camera comes with a 6 ft. audio/ video cable, which you can use to connect the camera to a television. When the camer a i s connected to a television, the television functions the same as the camer aâs image L CD. Y ou can use your television to view a slideshow, making it easy to shar e your images with family and friends. Selecting the Cameraâs Video Output F ormat Before you connect the camera to the television, you need to select t he cameraâs video ou tput format. The format that you choose (NTSC or PAL) depends on your televisionâs video input format: î NTSC is the video connection standard used in the United States and Japan. î P AL is the video connection standard used in Europ e. Note: R efer to y our t elev isionâ s or VCRâs documentation for mor e information about the video input format. T o select the video output format for the camer a: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Playback mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the b ack of the camer a. 4 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to Video. 5 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey. 6 Press t he right or le ft arrows on the 4-way contr o ller to sele ct NTSC or P AL in the Video Preferen ces subme nu. Making the Con nection T o connect the camera to t he television: 1 Connect the video input end of the audio/video cable into your television: î If you are using an NTSC connection, plug the video input (yellow) end of the a udio/video cable into your tele visionâs video input connector (on most televisions, th is is also yellow). Note: S ee your t elevisionâs documentation for specific instructions on how to locate the video input connector, and how to set the video input. î If you are using a P A L connection, plug the video input (yellow) end of the audio video cable into your televis ionâs video input connector. On older television sets, plug the video cable into a SC ART adapter (pu rchased se parate ly), then plug the adapter into y our televisionâs video input connector.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 51 Connecting the Camera to Y ou r T elevision Note: T o conserve battery power, you may want to use an HP-appro ved AC power adapter to power the camer a while you have it connected to a television. 2 Connect the audio input (red) end of the audio/video cable into the televisionâs audio input connector. This will allow you to hear sound that you rec orded and attached to your images. 3 Plug the other end of the video cab le into the camer a (see Figure 27). Figure 27: Connecting the Video Cable to the Came ra 4 On the television, set the video input to be t he video input connector where you connected the camer a. Viewing Images on the T elevision When the camer a i s connected to a television, you can play or r eview your images on the te levision screen just as you would on the camer aâs imag e L CD. Y ou can also mark, protect, categorize, group , or delet e image s, or creat e a slides how. T o vi ew images on a television: 1 T urn on the television and select the video input. See y our televisionâs documentation for specific instructions on how to select the video input. 2 Set the camer a mode dial to either Playback mode o r Review mode . Note: When the camera is connected t o a televis ion, the im age L CD turns off. 3 View your images on the tele vision using either Playback or Review m ode. The television functions the same as the came raâs image L CD. Y ou can use the buttons on the 4-way controller to scroll th rough your images, or p ress the MENU button on the back of th e camera to use th e camera men us on y our t elevis ionâs s creen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 52 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Chapter 6: Menu and S oft K ey Reference Overvie w Note: Up dates for your cameraâs firmware are posted from time -to-time on the HP web site at: www.hp.co m/photosmart www.hp.co m/photosmart www.hp.com/ photosmart ww w .h p . c om / p ho t o sm a r t . Y ou can i nstall these updates on your camer a so that you can always have the m ost current functionality running on it. This chapter contains a refer e nce to all of the menus and soft k eys you can use to mak e or adjust settings on your c amera. This chapter is divided into t hree main sections, which correlate to the thre e camera modes that have menus and soft k eys: î âCapture Mode Menus and Soft K eysâ on page 52 î âPlayback Mode Menu and Soft K eysâ on page 74 î âReview Mode Menu s and Soft K eysâ on page 78 Note: The PC Connect mode does not h ave any menus or soft k e ys; thus, that mode is not included in this chapter . Capture Mode Menus and Soft K eys T o a ccess the Cap ture mode men us and related soft k eys, turn the camera mode dial to Captur e mode and press the MENU but ton on the back of the camera. Y ou can choose options and settings from four Captur e mode menus: î âCapture Settings Menuâ on page 52 î âPhoto Assist Menuâ on page 55 î âImage Stamp Menuâ on page 62 î âPrefer ences M enuâ on page 66 Capture Settings Menu Figu re 28: Capture Settings Menu Use the Capture Settings me nu to specify character istics of how to capture each image. Ta b l e 7 : C apture Settings Soft Keys Soft K ey Function Edit Opens submenu associated with se lected menu opt ion. Exit Exits this me nu and returns the came ra t o Captur e mode.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 53 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys File Setti ngs Subm enu Note: All options you set ar e active fr om shot- to-shot; they also re main set when you cycle the power on the came ra. Use the File Sett ings submen u to set how your pictur es will be captur ed for all image types (One Shot, Continuous, and Timelapse). Figure 29: File Settings Submenu - JPEG Ta b l e 8 : File Setti ngs S ubmenu Fig ur e 30: File Settings Subme nu - TIFF Note: TIFF is an uncompressed file type used w h e n y o u n e e d t h e a b s o l u t e b e s t i m a g e q u a l i t y . Becaus e TIFF file siz e is v ery l arge, it may take up to 50 seconds to save the image. Setting Defaul t Options File T ype JPEG JPEG, TIFF Quality Level (Speci fies JP EG compression level and does not apply to TIFF images.) Bette r Good - Produ ces quality images and u ses less me mory than the B etter setting (us es the h ighest com pression rate). U se this s etting for i mages you plan to use on a comp uter, or t o print pho tos of up to 4â x 6â. Better - Produce s h igh-q uali ty im ages and uses les s memo ry t han the Best s etting ( uses a m edium compressio n rate). Use this s etting fo r images you plan to print photos of up to 5â x 7 â. Best - Produce s the highe st-qua lity im ages a nd uses the mos t memo ry (uses the lowest c ompression rat e). Use this sett ing for images you plan to enla rge and print pho tos of up to 8â x 10â. Resolution Full Size Full Size (1600 x 1200 pixels) 1/4 ( 800 x 600 pixe ls) Color Full Full, B& W, Sepia
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 54 C apture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Note: âStora ge Capacities of Memory Cardsâ on page 109 lists the numbe r of images an 8 MB, 16 MB, and 32 MB memory card can stor e, depending on the JPEG quality level or TIFF setting at which the came ra is set. Ta b l e 9 : File Settings Soft K eys Timelaps e Setting s Submen u Note: All options you set ar e active fr om shot- to-shot; they also re main set when you cycle the power on the came ra. Use the Timelapse Sett ings submenu to s pecify the number and inter val of images in a timelaps e sequence. Figur e 31: Timelapse Setting s Submenu Ta b l e 1 0 : Timel apse Settin gs Submenu Note: If you select more # Images than t here is space on the memory card, you will see the error mess age âNot enough memoryâ on the overlay bar. Ta b l e 1 1 : Timela pse Sett ings Soft K eys Soft K ey Func tion Default Returns all settings on screen to their defaults . Exit Saves th e setti ngs, exi ts this s ub m e n u, a n d re tu r n s t he c a m e ra t o the C aptu re S ettin gs me nu. Setting Default Options # Image s 2 2-1,000 Interval 15 seconds Seconds - 15 sec, 30 sec Minu tes - 1 min, 2 min, 3 min , 4 mi n, 5 m in, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 50 min Hours - 1 hr, 2 hr, 3 hr, 4 hr, 8 hr, 12 hr, 24 hr Soft K ey Function Default Returns all settings on screen to their defa ults. Exit Saves the settings, exi ts this su bm en u, a nd ret ur ns th e c ame ra to the Captu re Settin gs me nu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 55 C apture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Photo Assist Menu Use the Ph oto Assist menu to manipulate the se more advance d camera operations: Fig ur e 3 2: Photo Assist Menu î Exposur e î EV Compensation î White Balance î Foc us î AE Metering î ISO Speed Ta b l e 1 2 : Photo Assist Soft K e ys Soft K ey Function Edit Ope ns submenu associa ted with highl ight ed men u o ption. Exit Exits this menu and returns th e camera to Capture mode.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 56 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Exposure Mode Submenu Use th e Exp osure Mo de su bmenu to sel ect h ow the c amera ca lcul ates ex pos ure. Y o u can s elect from these setting opti ons: Figur e 33 : Exposur e Mode Submenu î Auto Auto Au to Auto (D e fa ul t ) â All exposure settings are at their def aults and cannot be changed. î Landsc ape P rogram Landsc ape P rogram Landsc ape P rogram Landsc ape P rogram â Automatically optimizes the came ra set tings for taking pictures of distant subject s, such as landsc ape scenes . î Portra it Pr ogram Portra it Pr ogram Portra it Pr ogram Portra it Pr ogram â Automatically optimizes the camera set tings for portrait ph otography. î Actio n Program Actio n Program Action P rogram Actio n Program â Automatically optimizes the camer a settings for taking pictures of subjects in action, such as people playing sports. î Apertur e Priority (Av) Apertur e Priority (Av) Apertur e Priority (Av) Apertur e Priority (Av) â Lets you select an aperture, and th e camera automatically sele cts the shutter sp eed. î Shutter Priority (Tv) Shutter Priority (Tv) Shutter Priority (Tv) Shutter Priority (Tv) â Lets you sele ct a shutter spee d, and the camer a automatically sele cts the ape rture settin g. If you select Landscape Progr a m, Portrait Pr og ram, Action Progr am, or Shutter Priority exposur e modes, then the ISO Speed submenu options will be gr ayed-out as soon as you exit the Exposure Mode submenu. Lik ewise, i f you change the exposur e mode from Landscape Progra m, Portr ait Progr am, Action Progr am, or Shutter Priority to either Auto or Apertur e Priority (Av) exposure m ode, then the ISO Speed options will become available as soon as you exit the Exposure Mode submenu. After you set the ex posure m ode to Apert ure Priority (Av) or Shutt er Priority (T v) and exit the submenu, the live vie w of Capture mode will turn on automatically. Y ou can then use the 4-way co nt ro ll e r t o ad ju s t t h e a pe rt u re va l ue (i f in A v mo d e) o r s hu tt e r s p ee d (i f i n Tv mo d e) by p re ss in g th e up a nd do w n a rr o ws (s e e b el o w) . If t he c am era c an n ot pr op er l y e x po se b ec a us e t h e p i ct ur e s u bj ec t is o u t o f ra n g e , a s i n v e r y b r i g h t o r v e r y d ar k s c en e s , t h e t e x t s t r i n g ( s u c h a s A v F 5 . 6 1 / 1 5 0 0 ) w i l l t u r n re d in the top overl ay bar of liv e vie w. If you tur n the i mage L CD of f, the ex posu re mode will not ch ange , but you will be u nable to adjust the ape rture value or shutter spe ed with the 4-way contr oller. When you set the exposur e mode to Aperture Priority (Av) and live view is on, press ing the up and down arrows on the 4-way cont roller will p erform these speci fic functions: î Up a rrow â stops down the aperture (toward higher f-num bers) î Down arrow â stops up the apertur e (toward lower f-numbe rs) When you set the exposur e mode to Shutter Priority (T v) and live view is on, pressing the up and down arrows on the 4-way cont roller will p erform these speci fic functions: î Up a rrow â decreases toward sh orter shutte r speeds î Down arrow â increases toward f aster shutt er speeds
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 57 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Ta b l e 1 3 : Exposure M ode Soft K eys EV Compen sation Submenu Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Use the EV (Expos ure V alue) Compensation subme nu to manually adjust the exposur e in 0.5 EV increments ( - values for dark er images, values for lighter images). Y ou can select from these optio ns: Figure 34 : EV Compe nsat ion Sub menu î -2.0 î -1.5 î -1.0 î -0.5 î 0 (Def ault) î 0.5 î 1.0 î 1.5 î 2.0 Ta b l e 1 4 : EV Compe nsatio n Soft K eys Soft Ke y Function Select Plac es a checkm ark b y the highlighted setting, then returns to the Photo Assist menu. Exit Return s to the P hoto A ssist me nu without changing the set ting. Soft Ke y Function Default Sets th e exposure compensa tion to the d efault va lue. Exit Saves the settin g and ret urns to the Photo Assist menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 58 Capture Mode Menus a nd Soft K eys White B alance Submen u Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Use the Wh ite Balance submenu to corr ect the color applied to a captured image unde r different lighting conditions in order to mak e white areas in the image appear white without any color cast. Y ou can select from these settin g options: Figu re 3 5: White Balance Submenu î Auto Auto Au to Auto (D e fa ul t ) â Use when you want the camer a to automatically sense the lighting conditions and adjust the white balance appr opriately for optim um color repr oduction in the image. î Daylight Daylight Daylight Daylight â Use when you are taking a picture in daylight without artificial lighting. î Tun gs te n Tun gs te n Tun gs te n Tun gs te n â Use when you are taking a pictur e under normal incandesce nt lighting, such as the light from tungsten filame nt light bulbs in household l amps. î Fluorescent Fluorescent Fluorescent Fluorescent â Use when you are tak ing a picture under fluore scent lighting. Ta b l e 1 5 : White Balance Soft K eys Soft Key Function Select Places a check mark by the selected setting, t hen returns to the Photo Assist menu. Exit Retur ns to the Photo Assist menu without changing the setting.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 59 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Focus Mode Sub menu Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Use the F ocus Mode submenu to control how your camer a focuses. Y ou can select from these setting options: î Auto Focus (Defau lt) î Manual Focus Figur e 36: Foc u s Mode Subm enu After you set the focus m ode to Manual Focus and exit the submenu, the live view of C apture mode will turn on automatically, and the focus distance will appear in the far le ft side of the top overlay bar. Y ou can then adjust the focus distance by pressing the left and right arrows on the 4-way controller (see b elow). If you turn off the image L CD, Manual Focus will still be on, b ut you will no longer be able to adjust the focus distance with the 4- way controller. When you set the focus mode to Manual F ocus and live view is on, pres sing the right and left arr ows on the 4-way controll er will perform these sp ecific functions: î Right arr ow â increases focus distance î Left arrow â decreases focus distance Note: S etting the came ra to Manual focus mode cancels any selected auto focus range (Ma cro or Infinity) a nd turns off the corr espo nding ico n on the st atus L CD. Ta b l e 1 6 : Fo cu s M od e So ft Keys Soft K ey Functio n Sele ct Places a chec kmark by the highlighted setting, then returns to the Photo Assist menu. Exit Returns t o the Photo Assist menu without changing th e setting .
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 60 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. AE Met ering Submen u Use the AE (Autom atic Exposure) Met ering submenu to sele ct the area of the scene that the c amera will use to set the exposure wh en you tak e a pictur e. Figu re 37: AE M etering Su bmenu Ta b l e 1 7 : AE Metering Submenu Ta b l e 1 8 : AE Met ering Soft Keys Setting Function Average (default) The camera us es the entire frame t o calculat e exposure . Center-weigh ted The camera us es the cent er half of the total pixel s to calculate exp osure. Spot The ca mera calc ulates exposur e based only on a small region in the center o f the scene. Soft K ey Function Select Places a checkmark by the highlighted set ting, then returns to the Photo Assist men u. Exit Returns t o the Photo Assist menu without changing th e setting .
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 61 Cap ture Mode Menus and Soft Keys ISO Speed Submenu Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Use the ISO Speed submenu to set the ISO spe ed. Similar to film, slower ISO speeds require longer exposures, but produce higher quality i mages. In contrast, faster ISO speeds all ow for shorter exposure s, but produce noisier images . Y ou can select from these setting options: Figur e 38 : ISO Speed Submenu î Auto (Defa ult) â The camera a utomat ically d etermine s the best I SO spee d for the sce ne. î 100 î 200 The ISO Speed submenu is onl y a vailable for Auto and Aperture Priority exposure modes. When the exposure mode is set to Landscape Pr ogram, Por trait Pr ogram, Action Progr am, or Shutter Priority, the ISO Speed submenu is gr ayed-out and the ISO Speed is set to Auto. Ta b l e 1 9 : ISO Speed Soft K eys Soft Key Function Select Places a checkmark b y the highlighted setting, th en returns to the Pho to Assist menu. Exit Returns to Photo Assist men u without changin g the setting .
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 62 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Image Stamp Menu Note: An image stamp becomes perman ently embedded in the image and o verwrites data in the imag e. Y ou cannot remove it l ater. Use the Image Stamp menu to place waterm arks on your images as you capture them. The Image Stamp menu ha s these options: Figure 39: Image Stamp Menu î Date & Time î Te x t î Logo Ta b l e 2 0 : Image Stamp Soft Keys Date/Ti me St amp Su bmenu Figu re 4 0: Da te/Time Sta mp Submenu Use the Date/Tim e Stamp subm enu to stamp an image with the curr ent date, time, both date and time, or ne ither. Y ou can set the following pr operties of the date/time stamp: î Ty p e î Placem ent î T ransparency î Te x t c o l o r î Background Soft K ey Function Edit Opens submenu associated with the selec ted menu optio n. Exit Exits this menu and returns to the live view in Capture mode.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 63 Capture Mode Men us and Soft Keys Ta b l e 2 1 : Setti ngs for Dat e/Time, T ext, and Logo Stamp Su bmenus Note: If you have set the Color in the File Settings subm enu to either B&W (black and white) or Sepia, the Image Stamp will also be B&W or Sepia, regar dless of the color you set for the T ext and Background Color s in the Image Stamp menu. T able 22: Date/Time S tamp Soft Keys Setting Options Ty p e None (defau lt), Bo th, Date, Time Placement T op right quadr ant of imag e Cente r of imag e Bottom l eft quadr ant of image Bottom r ight quad rant of imag e T op left quadr ant of im age T ransparency Opaque - The re will be a background box around the text. Semi - There will be a translucent bac kground box. Clear - There will be no back ground behind the tex t. Te x t C o l o r White, red, green, blue, cyan, ma genta, y ellow, bla ck Backgr ound Black , whi te, red, green, blue, cy an, ma genta , yell ow Soft K ey Function Default Returns all sett ings on screen to their def aults Exit Saves t he set tings, exit s this submenu, and returns to the Image Stamp m enu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 6 4 Capture M ode Menus and Soft Keys Te x t S t a m p S u b m e n u Figu re 41: T ext Stamp Submenu Use the T ext Stamp submenu to stamp an image with text that you enter using the text entry dialog. T ext Stamp is either On or Off, and the default is Off. When it is On, you can set the following proper ties of the t ext stamp: î Placem ent î T ransparency î Te x t c o l o r î Background Note: T ext strings can be a maximum of 31 characters. Ta b l e 2 3 : T ext Stamp Soft K eys Soft Key Function Edit O p e n s t e x t e n t r y s c r e e n t o e n t e r the te xt stam p that w ill appear on the ima ges. ( Avai lable only when the first line is set to On.) Default Returns all sett ings on screen to their de faults. Exit Exits this subme nu and retu rns to t he Ima ge St amp menu .
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 65 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Logo Stamp Subm enu Figure 42: Logo Stamp Submenu Logo Stamp is either On or Off, and the d efault is Off. When it is On, you can: î Stamp the image with a logo file î Choose o ne lo go from a list î Choose the pl acemen t of th e logo î Choose the co lor î Choose t he transparenc y level Ta b l e 2 4 : Logo Sta mp Soft K eys Logo Files D ialog Note: By de fault, no logo files are included with your came ra. T o le arn h ow to get logo fil es, s ee the HP website at: ww w . hp . co m /p h o to s ma r t www.hp.com/ photosmar t www.hp.com/ photosmar t www.hp.com/ photosmar t. W h en y ou p re s s th e Ed i t s of t ke y in th e Lo g o St a m p su b m e n u , th e Lo g o Fi l e s di a l o g is di s p l a y e d . Us e th e u p a nd do wn ar ro ws on th e 4 -w ay co n tro l le r to sel e ct th e f il e you wa nt to us e a s the Lo go St am p from the list of available files. Ta b l e 2 5 : Logo Files Soft K eys Soft Key Function Edit Opens the Logo Files dialog. (Avail able onl y when Lo go Stamp is on.) Default Returns all settings on sc reen to their defaul ts. Exit Exits this submenu and returns to the Image Stamp men u. Soft K ey Function Select Places a checkmark nex t to the logo file, returns to th e Logo Stamp subm enu, and disp lays the select ed file name in the seco nd line of the su bmenu. Exit Exits this d ialog and r eturns to Logo Stamp s ubmenu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 66 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Note: All options you set in the Pre ferences menu are active fr om shot-to-shot; they also remain set when y ou cycle the power on the camer a. Preferenc es Menu Use the Pre fer ences menu t o ch ange a varie ty o f yo ur cameraâs genera l set tings. Y ou c an select from these optio ns: Fig ur e 43: Preferences Menu î Display î Sound î For ma t C ard î PC Connect Mode î Date & Time î Image Counter î Camera N ame î Language î Reset Sett ings Note: For more information on using the Preferen ces menu to se t up your came ra, see â Appendix A: Using the Prefere nces Menuâ starting on page 94. Ta b l e 2 6 : Pref erence s So ft Keys Soft K ey F unction Edit Opens s ubmenu assoc iated with the highlighted menu option. Forma t Available only when Forma t Car d is highlighted. Reset Available only when Reset Settings is highlighted. Exit Exits this submenu and returns camer a to Captur e mode.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 67 Capture Mode Menus and Soft K eys Displa y Su bmenu Figu re 44: Display Submenu Use the Disp lay submenu to control the disp lay on the ca meraâs image L C D. Ta b l e 2 7 : Display Sub menu Note: The Instant Review setting deter mines the amount of time an Instant Review of an image you just capture d is displayed on the image L CD. See âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25 for more information. The Live View setting determines wh ether the live view of Capture mode will automatically display on the image L CD or not when you power on the camer a a nd set the camer a to Capture mode. The Sleep Timeout set ting det ermines how quickly the camer a goes into sleep mode and turns off the image LCD when y ou are not usin g the camer a. Ta b l e 2 8 : Displ ay Soft Keys Setti ng Def ault O pti ons Brightness Level 4 1 (dimmest) - 7 (brightest) Instant Review (see Note) 3 sec 1-10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 se c 30 sec Off Live View (see Note) Off On / Of f Sleep Time out (see Note) 2 min 30 s ec 1 min 2 min 5 min Soft K ey Function Default Returns al l settings to their de faults. Exit Saves the settings, exi ts this submenu, and return s to the Preferences menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 68 Capture Mode Menus a nd Soft K ey s Sound Su bmenu Figu re 4 5: Sound Submenu Use the Sound submenu to control the sounds used on your camer a . Ta b l e 2 9 : Sound Submenu Note: The System Sounds setting determines whether or not you will hear t he camer aâs system sounds , such as shutter cl icks, beeps, and so forth. Ta b l e 3 0 : Sound Soft K eys Format Car d Option Figur e 46 : For mat Card Confirmation Screen Use the Format Car d option to reformat the memory card. Reformatting will er ase all of the files on the card, including all im ages, protecte d files, folders, scripts , and so forth. Y ou will see a confirmation of your choice to format the me mory card (see Figur e 46). Ta b l e 3 1 : For ma t Ca rd Sof t Keys Setting Default Options Vo l u m e L e v e l 7 1 (lowes t) - 7 (hi ghest) System Sou nds (see Note) On On / Off Soft Key Function Default Retur ns all settings to th eir defau lts. Exit Saves t he setti ngs, ex its thi s submenu , and re turns t o the Preferences menu. Soft Ke y Function Forma t Reformats the memory c ard. Cancel E xits the confirmati on screen a nd retu rns t o th e Pre feren ces m enu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 69 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys PC Connect Mode S ubmenu Figur e 47 : PC Connect Mode Submenu Use the PC Connect Mode submenu to specify ho w the camer a will ap pear to your computer when connected via the USB interface in PC Connect mode. Y ou can then transfer images from your camera to the computer via the USB interface. Ta b l e 3 2 : PC Con nect Mode Submenu Note: For more information on using the PC Connect Mode settings, see âT ransferring Images to Y our Computerâ on page 38. Ta b l e 3 3 : PC Connect Mode Soft Keys Setting Function USB Di sk Driv e The came ra is oper ated a s a U SB Mass S tor age Dev ice and appears as a disk drive connected to t he comput er. Y ou can cop y images from you r camera to the com puter as you would fr om another disk drive. Use this s etting to conne ct the c amer a to a Mac O S 8.6 or better compute r, or to a Windows Me, 98, or 2000 com puter. Digita D evice (defaul t) Y ou can use software incl uded with your computer or camer a to tr ansf er images to the compu ter. Use this setting to connect the camer a to a Windows Me , 98, or 2000 comp uter. Soft Key Function Select Places a checkmark next t o the selected item and returns to t he Pref er ence s men u. Default Resets the se ttings to their default s. Exit Exits this submenu without c hanging the sett ings and retur ns to the Pref er ence s men u.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 70 Capture Mode Menus a nd Soft K eys Set Date & Time S ubmenu Figure 4 8: Set Date & Time Submenu Use the Set Date & Time submenu to set the camer aâs date and time. Press the up and down arrows on the 4-way contr oller to scr oll throu gh the list of numbers. Press the left and right arrows to move between th e date/time fie lds. Ta b l e 3 4 : Set Da te & Tim e Soft K eys Format Dialog Fig ur e 49: Form at Dialog When you press the F ormat soft key in the Set Date & Time submenu, you see the F ormat dialog, which allows you to sele ct from a list of six, pre defined date and time formats. Ta b l e 3 5 : Fo r m at S o f t Key s Soft K ey Function Format Opens the F ormat List dialog where you can se lect the format. Exit Saves the date and time settings, exits this submenu, and return s to the Preferences m enu. Soft K ey F unct ion Sele ct Places a checkmark next to the selected format and retu rns to the Set Date & Time subme nu. Exit Exits this dialog and retu rns to the Set Date & Time subme nu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 71 Capture Mode Men us and Soft K eys Image Co unter Sub menu Figur e 50: Image Counter Submen u Use th e Image Count er subm enu to se t how the im age counter works. Ta b l e 3 6 : Ima ge Count er Submenu Note: Once you have changed the Image Counter se tting, yo u must power the camera off and then on again for the new setting to tak e effect. Ta b l e 3 7 : Image Counter Soft K eys Setting Function Reset When Empty E ach time you delet e all o f the ima ges on your cam er a, the cou nter rest arts t he first image capt ured at nu mber 1. Continuous Counter (default) The imag es are count ed accordi ng to the hi story of the camer aâs u se. F or example: image # 400 is the 400th image to be captured with this ca mera. Soft Ke y Function Select Places a ch eckmark next to the selected setting and returns to the Preferences menu. Exit Return s to th e Pre ferenc es m enu without changing the set ting.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 72 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Camera Name Su bmenu Figure 5 1: Camera Name Subm enu Use the Camer a Name submenu to enter a unique name for your camer a. Press the left (Character Set Icon) soft k ey to toggle through the four character sets (capital letters, lowercase letter s, number s, and symbol s) until you see the char acter set you want to use displayed in the left soft k ey label area on the overlay bar. Then p ress the: î Up or down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll thr ough the list of char acters. î Right arrow on the 4- way controller to e nter the selec ted char a cter and advance the insertion point in the center of the scre en. î Left arrow on the 4-way controller to back up and delete a char acter. î Middle (Space) soft key to create a space between wor ds in the camera name. Note: Words wr ap to the nex t line when they get to o long. Ta b l e 3 8 : Cam era Name Soft K eys Soft K ey Function Chara cter Set Icon T oggles throu gh four char acter sets: ca pital le tters, l owercase lett ers, numbe rs, and symb ols. Space Adds a sp ace, instead of a letter, and advances the insertion point. (The Space k ey does not appear if a space is not a valid char acter.) Exit Saves the text entered and retu rns t o th e Pre feren ces m enu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 73 Capture Mode Menus a nd Soft K eys Langua ge Subm enu Figure 52: Language Submenu English is set as the default language that is used on the camera. Use the Language submenu to select a language from the list of installed languages. Ta b l e 3 9 : Language Soft Keys Reset Settin gs Option Fig ure 53: R eset Settings Confi rmation Screen Use the Reset Settings op tion to reset all of t he came ra settings (e xcept for the Languag e, F orm at for the Set Dat e & Time, PC Connec t Mode, and Video Preferen ces sett ings) to their defau lts in one st ep. Y ou will see a confirmation of your choice to r eset the camera settings (see Figure 53). Ta b l e 4 0 : Re set Settings Soft K eys Soft K ey F unction Sele ct Places a ch eckma rk nex t to th e highlighted language and r eturns to the Preferences menu. The s elected language is now used. Exit R etu rns to th e P referen ces menu without changing the set ting. Soft Key Functio n Reset Resets all camera settings to their default s and r eturns to the Pref er ence s men u. Cancel R eturn s to the P referen ces m enu without changing the set tings.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 74 Playback Mode Men u and Soft Keys Playback M ode Menu and Soft K eys T o access the Playback mode menu and re lated soft k eys, turn the came ra mode dial t o Playback mode and press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. Once you have captured images, you can choose options and setting s for the images within th e one menu (Play Set tings) of Playback mode. Play Settings Menu Figure 54: Play Settings Menu There are th ree options in this menu: î Slideshow î Playback Rate î Video Ta b l e 4 1 : Play Settin gs Soft K eys Soft K ey Function Edit D isplays submenu for th e highlighted option. Exit Exits this menu and r eturns to the Playback mode scre en.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 75 Pl ayback Mode Men u and Soft Keys Slidesho w Subm enu Figure 55: Slideshow Submenu Use the Slides how submenu to select the criteria for a slideshow to be viewed âon the fly.â Ta b l e 4 2 : Slidesh ow Submenu Ta b l e 4 3 : Slidesho w Soft K eys Setting Default Options Cont ent All All, Category Durati on 2 sec 1-10 se c Sound On On, Off Loop On On, O ff Soft K ey Func tion Start Exits this submenu and displays the slideshow. Canc el Exits this s ubmenu without changing th e settings and returns to the Pl ay Settings m enu. Exit Sets all the settings, exits this subm enu, and returns t o the Play Settings menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 76 Playb ack Mode Menu a nd Soft K eys Playback Rate Submenu Figur e 5 6: Playback Rate Submenu Use the Playback Rate sub menu to e stablish a def ault playback r ate for each image typ e. T able 44: Play back Rate Su bmenu Ta b l e 4 5 : Pl ayback R ate Soft Keys Setting Default Opti ons Timelap se 3 se c 1-10 sec rate Group 3 sec 1-10 sec rate Soft K ey Func tion Default Returns all settings to their d efaults. Canc el Exits this submenu without changing the settings and returns to the Play Settings m enu. Exit Sets all the settings, then exits t his submenu, and returns t o the Play Settings menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 7 7 Playback Mode Menu a nd Soft Keys Video Prefere nces Submenu Figur e 57: Video Prefe rences Submenu Use the Video Prefer ences submen u to specify the video format: NTSC or P AL. The form at that you choose (NTSC or PAL) depends on your televisionâs video input format: î NTSC is the video connection standard used in the United States and Japan. î P AL is the video connection standard used in Europ e. Ta b l e 4 6 : Video Preferences Submenu Ta b l e 4 7 : Video Preferences Soft K eys Setti ng Defaul t Op tions Video Out NTSC NTSC, PAL Soft K ey Function Cancel Exits this subm enu without c h an g i n g t h e s e t ti n g s a n d r e t ur n s to the Play Se ttings menu. Exit Saves th e setting , exits this submenu, a nd returns to the Play Settings menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 78 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Review Mode Menus and Soft K eys T o acc ess the Re view mode menu s and relat ed sof t keys, turn t he ca mera mod e dia l to Revie w mode and press the MENU button on the camer a . Once you have captu red images, you can change specifications for the images within the four Review mode m enus: î âEdit Menuâ on page 78 î âPrint Order F orm Menuâ on page 81 î âT ransmit Menuâ on page 84 î âFind Menuâ on page 86 Edit Menu Figur e 58: Edit Menu Use the Edit menu to perform the following actions on selected images: î Delete î Group î Protect î Categor ize Delete Option Figur e 59: Delete Confirmation Screen Use the Delete option to delete the current image, a group of images, or all of the marked images from the mem ory card . Note that prote cted images within a group m arked for del etion will not be deleted until you unprot ect them. Y ou will see a confirmation of your choice to delete the images (see Figure 59). Ta b l e 4 8 : Delete Soft Keys Soft K ey Func tion Delete D eletes the sele cted image(s) and then returns to the Review m ode scre en. Canc el Exits a nd retu rns to the Rev iew mode screen wi thout del eting im age(s).
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 79 Review Mode Menus a nd Soft Keys Note: A g roup becom es a folder on the memory card, in which all the images in t hat group are stored. Group Name Su bmenu Use the Grou p Name submenu to gr oup all of the images that y ou have mark ed. Y ou can start a group, add images to an existing group, or move images fr om one group to a new group. Note that you ca n use the D issol ve sof t key to disso lve groups. Figur e 6 0: Group Name Submenu Ta b l e 4 9 : Group Name Soft Keys Protect Optio n Figur e 61: Prote ct Option Use t he Protect option to pr otect or unprotect marked images. When an image is p rotected, you canât delete it. If ther e are no mark ed images, then the Protect command pr otects the currently selected image. If the mark ed or select ed single image is unprotected, o nly the Pr otect s oft k ey appears. If the image is protected, only t he Unprotect s oft key app ears. If multiple images, both protec ted and unprotecte d, are mark ed, then both the Protect and Unpr otect soft k eys appear. Once you have prot ected an image, the following restrictions appl y to the image file: î Y ou cannot delete the image nor an attached sou nd. î Y ou cannot attach or re-r ecord a sou nd. î Y ou cannot attach, change, or r emove a category. î Deleting a group will dele te only the un protected images within th at group. î Y ou cannot change the fil e name. î Y ou can move the image file int o and out of groups. î The image file will be marke d âRead Onlyâ in Windows when tr ansferred to a PC. Soft Key Functio n Add (If current image is not group ed, but at le ast one group exis ts.) Create (If cur rent image is n ot grou ped a nd no groups exist.) Displ ays a d ialog that a llows yo u to cre ate a new group or add to an existing grou p. (Images are mo ved int o grou ps, not r eplic ated.) Dissolve Remove s an y gro uping pr evio usly appli ed. Exit Ex its and retu rns t o th e Rev iew mode scre en.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 80 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Ta b l e 5 0 : Protect Soft Keys Note: A ca tegory is an image tag which is useful for finding images or playing a slideshow of a category of images. Categori es Sub menu Use the Categor ies submenu to assign images to a category. The camera has predefined categories, such a s vacati on, work , pets , fa mily, a nd fri ends Figure 62: Categori es Su bmenu Choose the category you want using the 4-way controller, then use the Selec t soft key to attach the category to the image. Y ou can assign categories to one image at a time, or you can categorize all mark ed images at once. Ta b l e 5 1 : Catego ries Soft K eys Soft K ey Funct ion Protect Appear s if selec te d images are unprote cte d. Allows you to p rotect the curre nt image. Unprotect If multi ple im ages are ma rked, this soft key appears al ong with the Pr otect soft k ey. Allows yo u to unpr otect im ages. Exit Cancels the protect ope ration a nd returns to the R eview mo de scree n. Soft Ke y Function Select Ass igns a category to an im age or mark e d images. Places a checkma rk next to the assigned c ategory. Exit Upda tes the image files with the new categories and re turns to the Rev iew mode sc reen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 81 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Print Order Form Menu Figure 6 3: Print Order For m Menu Use the Print Ord er Form me nu to create a Digital Print Order F o rmat (DPOF) file. Ta b l e 5 2 : Print Order Form Menu Note: S ee âUsing a Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Fileâ on page 44 for more information. Ta b l e 5 3 : Print Order F orm Soft K eys Option Fun ction Add Images Allows you to add current image or mark ed im a g es t o t h e D P O F fi l e . O p e n s a s e c o nd a r y sc ree n t o s pe ci fy nu mb er o f co pi es an d s i ze of photos. View O rder Displays a scro lling list of the c ontents of the DPOF file. Erase Order Erases the contents of your DPOF file . Soft Key Function Add/Select Open s approp riate submenu. Era se Asks for conf irmation to delete al l entries of the D POF f ile. Exit Exits and returns to t he Review mod e screen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 82 Review Mode Menus and Soft K eys Add to Order Submenu Figure 64: Add to Order Submenu Use the Add to Order submenu to add curren t or marked images to the DPOF file and to set up the print sett ings for those images. If you have any mark ed images, they ar e added to the order. If no images ar e mark ed, the image currently selected in the Review mode is added to the order. Ta b l e 5 4 : Add to Order Submenu Note: S tandard means one of the standard print sizes. Y ou specify the exact size you want your Standar d prints to be at the printer . For example, you can specify that all Standard images be p rinted at 4 â x 6â. T able 55: Add to Order Soft Keys Setting Options Copies 1-999 (1=default) Size Index - Thumbnails Standard (default) - One of the sta ndard prin t si zes (see Note) Soft K ey Fun cti on Add Adds image s to t he DP OF file . Canc el Exits without adding images.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 83 Review Mode Menus and Soft K eys View O rder O ption Fig ur e 65: Print Order F orm Screen of the View Or der Opti on Use the View Orde r option to view a list of order ed images in the DPOF file. Y ou can scroll thr ough this list using the up and down arrows on th e 4-way control ler. However, you cannot edit this list. Ta b l e 5 6 : View Order Option Soft K ey Erase Order Option Figure 6 6: Erase Order Confirmation Scre en Use th e Erase Order option to er ase all of the entries fr om the DPOF file. Y ou will see a confir mation of your choice to er ase all entries (see Figure 66). Ta b l e 5 7 : Eras e Order S oft Keys Soft K ey Fun cti on Exit Returns to the P rint Or der F orm menu. Soft Key Function Era se Eras es the content s of th e DPOF file. Exit R et ur ns to t he Pr in t O rd er F orm m enu without clearing the DPOF file.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 84 Review M ode Menus and Soft K eys Tr a n s m i t M e n u Fig ur e 67: T ransmit Menu Use the T ransmit menu t o transfer im ages in one of two ways: î Camera-C amera î Camera-Pr inter Camera-Camera Option Use the C amer a-Cam era o ption to s end curr ent or mark ed images to, or rece ive images from, another Digit a camera. Note: For more information, see âT ransmitting Images Between T wo Camerasâ on page 48. Ta b l e 5 8 : Camera-Ca mer a Soft K eys Soft K ey Functi on Send Sets the camera into sender mode. Displa ys a screen t o confi rm se nding images to anothe r camer a and then returns to the Review mode scree n. Receive Sets the camera to receive r mode. Brings up a scr een to confirm receiving images from another camer a and retur ns t o the Re view mode scre en. Stop Stops transmitting and returns to the Tra n s m i t m e n u . Exit Exits this screen and r eturns to the Review mod e screen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 85 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Camer a-Printe r Option Use the C amer a-Printer o ption to se nd curr ent or mark ed images to a p rinter via the HP JetSend in frar ed technol ogy. Note: For more information, s ee âJetSending Images to a Printerâ on page 46. Ta b l e 5 9 : Camer a-Pr inter Sof t K eys Soft K ey Function Send Sets the camer a to sender mode. Displays a screen t o confi rm send ing imag es and then retur ns to t he Re view mode scr een. Exit Exits this screen and ret urns to the Review m ode screen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 86 Review Mode Men us and Soft Keys Find Menu Figure 68: Find Menu Use the Find menu to sear ch for specific images, either by c a tegory or by date (but not bot h at the same time). When you return t o the Review mode to view the results of th e find oper ation, the Find icon will appear in the lower, right corner. All find r esults will be c hronologically displayed . If no images match your sear ch criteria, then you will see an err o r message. Ta b l e 6 0 : Find By Dat e and Find By Categor y Soft Keys Soft K ey Functio n Edit Display s speci fic fi nd opti ons (Fin d By Date, or Find By C ategory). Sele ct Selects the category to find. Exit Exits the Find screen and returns to the Review mod e screen. Mark After the Find ope ration, mark s a selected image. Show All After the Find o peration, returns the thumbnail row to t he origi nal, chronological list of images and turns off the Find icon.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 87 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Find B y Dat e Subme nu Figure 69: Find By Date Submenu Use the Find By Date submenu to enter the r ange of dates using the 4-way controller. Ta b l e 6 1 : Find By Date Soft Keys Find B y Categ ory Sub menu Fig ure 70: F ind By Category Submenu Use the Find By Category submenu to scro ll through the list of categories and enter the âfindâ category with the 4-way controlle r. Y ou can then use the Select soft k ey to select the category with which you want to do the sear ch. Ta b l e 6 2 : Find By Cate gory Soft K eys Soft K ey Function Find Executes the Fi nd cri teria and retu rns to the Review mode sc reen to display re sults. Exit Exits this screen and r eturns to the Find menu withou t executi ng th e Fin d com mand. Soft Key Function Select Selects th e check marked c ategor y from the F ind B y Category list and execut es the Find com mand. Exit Exits this scre en and returns t o the Find me nu without executing the Find command.
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 88 T roubleshooting Common Probl ems Chapter 7: T roubleshooting Overvie w This chapter explains how to troubleshoot some common problems you may encounter while using your camera. If you still cannot re medy the pro blem, contact HP for help. See âContacting HP Customer Care â on page 93. T roubleshooting Common Problems Note: For in formation abo ut pr eservin g batte ry life and about HP accessories you can use t o power the camer a (such as the HP AC p ower adapter, and the HP rechargeable batteries and battery rechar ger), see Appendix B start ing on page 103. Problem Solution The camera will not power on î If you ar e using batterie s: î Check the type of batteries t hat you have inst alled in the came ra. They may not be t he approp riate type for a digital camer a. Use only high quality AA phot o lithium, hi gh dr ain alkal ine, or NiMH b atteries. î Check t o make sure the batter ies are ins erted c orrectly. The positi ve an d negati ve pole s may be r eversed. î The batteriesâ charge m ay be low or com pletely dr ained. T ry installing new batteries or r echar ged batteries, î If you ar e usin g the HP AC power adap ter inste ad of ba tteries : î Is the A C power adapter plug ged in? î Is ther e power at the ou tlet? î Is the A C power adap ter dead? î Also see the ne xt pr oblem an d soluti on, bel ow. The cam era is not responding at all â it wonât po wer on or off Open the battery compartment door, re move the batteries and/or unplug the HP AC power adapter, and let the camer a sit for abou t 20 minute s with the bat tery door open to allow the camer a to dis charge full y. Then eit her re- install the batte ries or plug in the A C power adapter, close the batte ry door, and try powering on the camer a again. The came ra i s power ed on, but th ereâ s no dis play on the ima ge LCD î Press the DISPLA Y button again. î Power t he came ra off a nd the n on ag ain. î The ba tteries m ay be ne arly drained . (If s o, you s hould see an em pty bat tery status ic on on t he status L CD.) Leave the i mage L CD turned off, or insert charged batte ries.
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 89 T roubleshooting Common Problems The came ra i s power ed on, but when I pr ess a button, the cam era does not respond î T ry powering the camera o ff and then on again. î Remove the bat teries o r unpl ug the HP AC power adap ter. Th en r einstal l the batter ies or pl ug in th e AC power adapter, and pow er on the c amer a again. I always have t o re-set the date and time af ter I change the batte ries in the c amera or unplug th e HP A C power ad apter from t he camer a This will happen i f eithe r you r emove the ba tteries fr om the camer a, or you remo ve the b atterie s and u nplug the HP AC power adapter , fo r more t han 5 m inutes. (Not e that even if the b atterie s are dra ined, the date and time will remain set as l ong as you leave the drained batteries in t he camer a.) When cha nging b atterie s, try to put the new batterie s in w ithin 5 m inutes of whe n you rem ove the old ba tteries . Sim ilarly , if you are u sing th e HP AC po wer ada pter, either l eave bat teries in the ca mera (even if the bat teries a re drained) whe n you unplug the adapt er, or unpl ug the adapt er fo r les s than 5 min utes a t a t ime. The rec hargeable HP NiMH ba tteries Iâm us ing donât seem to power the camer a for very long Y ou must re charge all 4 HP N iMH batter ies afte r fully dr aining them four t imes for the ba tteries to re ach the ir opt imum cap acity an d performan ce. F or mo re information, see âUsing the HP NiM H Batteries and Rechar gerâ on page 108. The incor rect language is set o n the camera 1. Set the camer a mode dial to Captur e mode . 2. Power on th e camer a if you ha venât already . 3. Pre ss th e MENU butto n to di splay the Capt ure m ode men us on the i mage L CD. 4. P ress the righ t ar row o n th e 4 -way cont roll er three times to move to th e Preferences menu. 5. Press the down arr ow on the 4-way contr oller seven time s to mo ve to th e Language menu o ption. 6. Press t he left (Edit ) soft k ey. The Language submenu is disp layed. 7. Pre ss the down or up arr ow on the 4- way cont roll er to hig hlight t he lang uage you want. 8. Press t he left (Select) soft key to select t he highli ghted l anguage and to ex it this screen. Y ou retu rn to the Prefer ences m enu of Capture mode, and the camera is now using the language you set. 9. Pre ss the right (Exit) soft key to ex it the menu. Problem Solution
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 90 T roubleshooting Common Pr oblems The camer a is displaying an error m essage There are 3 different t ypes of error m essages y ou may see on the camera: î Memory car d is not fo rmatted - âErrâ is displayed on the status L CD and the message âCar d requir es formattingâ is displayed on the image L CD. This means the me mory car d needs to b e formatted. Eit her see âFormat ting the Memory Car dâ on page 98 for information o n how to format the car d, or replac e the curr ent memory c ard with anot her, format ted one. î Fl a s h c a n no t c h a rg e - â E r râ a nd t h e l i g ht n i n g b ol t i c o n b l in k s o n t h e st at u s LC D for 3 seconds, then the camera powers off. âErrâ and the l ightning bolt will remain display ed on the status L CD until t he batte ries are dra ined. This problem requires repair of t he camer a. See âContacting HP Customer Care â on page 93 to ca ll HP for he lp. î Oth e r er ro rs - Th e ca m era l oc ks up an d bl in ks a 3- di gi t erro r cod e o n th e s ta tu s L CD. T ry powering the camer a off and the n on again. Y ou may also need to remove the batteries and install them again. If the pr oblem per sists, see âContacting HP C ustomer Car eâ on page 93 to call HP for hel p. Be sur e to tell the HP repr esentative the err or code t hat you se e displaye d on the status L CD. The cam eraâs stat us LCD is flashing 000 There is no memory card installed in t he camer a, or th e memory card is full. If the re isnât one ins talled, power off the c amera, inst all a m emory c ard in it , and the n power on the camer a again. If the memory card is full, tr ansfer the ima ges you want to kee p to your comp uter (see âT ransferri ng Images to Y our Computerâ on p age 38), and then delete images from the memor y card to free-up s pace. The image counter on the cam era âs status LCD wonât reset when the m emory card is empty The defaul t setting for the image counter is co ntinuous cou nting of images. If y ou want to have i t reset to zero wh e n the memory card is empty, you can change t he setting in t he Image Count er subme nu (under the P references m enu in Ca pture mode). See âImage Counter Su bmenuâ on page 71. Once you have changed the image counter setting, you mus t power the camer a off and then on again. Also ensure that the camer aâs mem ory card is comple tely empt y. The camera w ill not fo cus î Ensure that the camer a mode dial is set t o Captur e mode . î Y ou may be too close to th e subject. T ry using the Mac ro auto focus r ange. î T ry using Focus Lock . See âUs ing Focus Lockâ on page 18. Digital zoom is no t working For digit al zoom to work correc tly, the came raâs image L CD must be turned on. Ensure that the camer a mode dia l is set to Captur e mode . Then pres s the DISPLA Y button. Problem Solution
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 91 T roubleshooting Common Problems The HP Remot e Control is not working î The HP Remote Control does no t work wh ile the flash is charging. T ry pressing the Remote Contr olâs trigger again once the flash has charged. î The HP Remote C ontrol may not work if the camer a is sitting under bright lights or in full sun. In this case, use the 1 0-Second Ti mer mode, inst ead. (See âSetting the Timer Modeâ on page 11.) î The battery in the HP Re mote Control may be dead. If so, re place the batt ery. The cap tured images are over- or u nder-expose d Change the exp osure com pensation set ting in the EV C ompensation sub menu of the Phot o Assi st menu . See âEV Compen sation Submen uâ on pag e 57. The comp uter does not recognize th e camera when co nnected v ia the USB cable On both Windows and M acintosh comp uters: î Is the camer a powered on? î Is the camer a mode dial set to PC Connec t mode ? î Is the USB cable firmly attache d to both the camer a and computer? î Is the USB port en abled on the compute r? î Are you using a USB hub? If so , you may need to reset the hub. (It may have become disab led due to a n electrical dis turbance suc h as that gen erate d by static elect ricity.) T o reset the USB hub, leave the camera connected to the hub, disco nnect the hub fro m the co mputer , and rem ove po wer from the hu b. Then reco nnect the powe r to the U SB hu b an d re conn ect t he hu b to the compu ter. î T ry powering the camera o ff and then on again. On Windows Me, 98, and 2000 computers: î If you are using the Microso ft Scanner and Camer a Wizard (for Windows Me) or the HP Photo Imaging Software (for Windows 98 and 2 000) to tr ansfer images, is th e PC Conn ect Mode subm enu setti ng (und er the Pre ferences menu o f Capture mo de) in the came ra se t to Digita D evice? î If you ar e using the PC Connect Mode s ubmenu settin g of USB Disk Drive in the cam era i nstead, doe s the came ra app ear as a disk drive in Windows Explor er? Note: Computer s running Windows NT 4. 0 cannot connect to the camera via the USB cable, becaus e Windows NT 4.0 does not support the USB interface. Y ou must use either an HP P1000/11 00 or similar printer, or a memory card reader to transfer the images to your Windows NT 4.0 computer, i nstead. On Macint osh comp uters: î Is the PC Connect Mode submenu setting (unde r the Prefer e nces menu of Capture mode) in the camera set to USB Disk Drive? Problem Solution
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 92 T roubleshooting Common Pr oblems A TW AIN error oc curs when a s oftware pro gram tries to acquire an image from t he camer a î V erify that the sof twar e progr am can see th e camer a through its own TW AIN select source. Whil e sof tware pro grams v ary on how to se lect a TWAIN so urce, generally the easiest w ay to d etermine w hether a p rogram supports TWAIN is to see if ther e is an Acquir e sele ction in the F ile me nu. If not , then chec k for a TWAIN c ommand locate d under the Imp ort select ion of the File me nu. If neither exits, and you have a scanner, che ck the manual f or the software prog ram t o see if you can use T W AIN to sc an image s, inste ad. î For m ore detailed inf ormation about this p roblem, c onsult the T echnical Support section for this camera that i s located on the HP website at: www.hp.com/photosm art www.hp.com/photosm art www.hp.com/photosm art www.hp.com/photosm art. I am trying to name a group of image s, but t he camera is not responding î T ry using a different group n ame. Note that the camera does not accept group names th at begi n with BR or TL ( regar dless of language ). î Group names must be eight characters or less, and cannot cont ain spaces. I am s earchi ng t hrough images by date, and have select ed the f ind dates, but the camera is not responding Mak e sur e that the Fr om date is prior or equal t o the T o date. I canât get images to display on m y television when I connec t my camera to it Mak e sur e th at the video output format ( NTSC or P AL) that you set in the Vide o Prefer ences subme nu of Playback mode is cor rect for t he video input format of your tel evision. (See â Video Preference s Submen uâ on page 77.) Iâm having troub le JetSending an image to my pr inter î Be awar e that i t will t ake an aver age of 20 seco nds t o tr ansfer an image from the camer a to a printer via JetSe nd. î Make sure that your printer is Je tSend-capabl e. î Make su re that th e cameraâ s infr ared window is lined-up with the printerâs infrare d sensor, and that the c amer a and printer ar e about 10 inches apart. Iâm having troub le sending images to another camer a î Make sure th at the other camer a is a Digita camera. î Ma k e s u r e t h a t t he c a m er a âs i n f ra r ed w i n d ow i s l i ne d - u p wi t h t he o t h e r c a m e ra âs infrar ed sensor, and that the c amer as are abou t 10 inches apa rt. Problem Solution
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 93 Contacting HP Customer Care Contacting HP Custom er Care HP Customer Care Online Click your way to a great solution! The HP we bsite, w w w . hp . c om / p ho t o s ma r t www.hp .com/p hotosm art www.hp .com/p hotosm art www.hp.com/pho tosmart, is a g re at p lac e to start for answers to ques tions about your HP produ cts. Y ouâll get instant access to help ful tips and tricks, downloadable drivers, and the latest product and software updates â 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. HP Customer Care by Ph one If you encou nter a prob lem wi th yo ur cam era that is not cove red in t his c hapt er, co ntac t HP for hel p. HP has Customer Support Ce nters worldwide, some of which are listed below. Note: Fo r a complet e list of HP âs Customer Support Centers worldwide, go to the HP we bsi te, ww w.hp.com/ph otosmart, www.hp.com/ph otosmart, www.hp.com/ph otosmart, www.hp.com/ph otosmart, an d c lic k th e Assistance Assistance Assistance A ss i s ta n c e button on the navigation bar. HPâs Custo mer Support Centers Replace a with your international teleph one access code. North America Canada: 905- 206-4663 Mexico - M exico City: 52 58 9922 Mexico - Outside Mexico C ity: 0 1 800 472 6684 United Sta tes: 2 08-376-368 6 Europe Belgium - Dutch : 32 ( 0)2 626 8806 Belgium - Frenc h: 32 (0)2 626 8807 Denmark: 45 39 29 4099 Finland: 358 (0)203 47 288 France: 33 (0)1 43 62 34 34 Germany (24PF / min): 49 (0)180 52 58 143 Italy: 39 0 2 264 1 0350 Neth erland s: 31 (0)20 606 8 751 Norway: 47 22 11 6299 Spain: 34 902 321 123 Sweden : 46 (0)8 619 217 0 United Kingdo m: 44 ( 0)207 5 12 52 02 English language support from other Eu ropean count ries: 44 (0)171 512 52 02 Asia/Pacific Austr alia: 61 3 8877 8000 Korea: 82 (2 ) 327 0 0700 Singa pore: 65 2 72 53 00 T aiwan: 886 (2 ) 2717 0055
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 94 Accessing the Preferences Menu Appendix A: Using the Prefer ences Menu Overvie w Note: For reference i nform ation regarding the options and soft k eys in the Prefer ences menu, see âPre ferences Menu â starting on page 66. Use the Pr efere nces menu in Capture m ode to change a variety of your came raâs gene ral se ttings. For ex ample, with the Pr eference s menu options you can change the br ightness of the camer aâs image L CD or the volum e of the camer aâs sounds, reformat the memory card in the c amera, change the date and time on the camer a , or set the m ode for connecting the camer a to a computer. This appendix covers the following topics: î â Accessing the Preferences Menuâ on page 94 î âSetting the Displayâ on page 95 î âControlling Camera Soundsâ on page 97 î âForma tting the Memory Car dâ on page 98 î âSelecting the PC Connect Modeâ on page 98 î âSetting the Date and Timeâ on page 99 î âSetting the Image Counterâ on page 100 î âNaming Y our Cameraâ on page 101 î âSelecting a Languageâ on page 102 î âResettin g Camer a Setting sâ on page 102 Figur e 71: Preference s Menu Accessing t he Preferences Menu T o access the Prefer ences menu: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Capture mode menus are displayed on the imag e LCD. 4 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller three times to move to the Pr eferences m enu (see Figure 71). Note: All of the settings you make in the Preferen ces me nu are active from shot- to-s hot; they also remai n set when you cycle t he power on the camer a. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move the highlight to the menu option you want to select. 6 Press the left (Edit, Form at, or Reset) soft k ey to select the highlighted menu op tion.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 95 Setting the Display Setting the D isplay Figure 72: Display Submenu Use the Display subme nu to control the display on the cameraâs image L CD. Brightness Level Use the Brightne ss Level setting to control the b rightness of the display on the c amer aâs image L CD. Y ou can set the Brightness Le vel from 1 (dimme st) to 7 (brightest). T he defaul t value is 4. T o change the Br ightness Level: 1 Press the down or up arr ow on the 4-way controller, if needed, to highlight the B rightness Level option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the values until you see the value you want. 3 Press the ri ght (Ex it) s oft key to save the se tting, exit t he D isplay submen u, and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu. Instant Review The cameraâs Inst ant Review featur e allows you to see displayed on the image L CD either the One Shot image, the final image of a Continuous image sequence, or the first image of a Timelapse sequence you just captured. (Se e âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25 for more information.) The default setting is that Inst ant Review is on for 3 seconds, and the maximum set ting is that it is on for 30 seconds, after you captur e either a One Shot image or the final image in a C ontinuous or Timelapse sequence. T o change the durati on of the Instant R eview period, or to turn Instant R eview Off: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way contr oller to highlight the Instant Review option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the values until you see the value you want. 3 Press the ri ght (Ex it) s oft key to save the se tting, exit t he D isplay submen u, and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 96 Setting the Display Live View Note: The image L C D uses a l ot of battery power. If you ar e runn ing your camer a on batteries r ather than with the HP-approved AC power adapter, you may want to limit y our use of the image L CD. In turn, you may want to leave the Live View setting at its default Off value to p reser ve battery pow er. The Live View setting determines wh ether the live view of C apture Mode will automatically display on the image L CD or not when you power on the camer a and set the camer a to Capture mode. The default valu e for Live View is Off. T o change the setting so Live View is On (that it will always display on the image L C D when you power on the camer a and set the camer a to Capture m ode): 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way contro ller to highlight the Live View option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to change the value t o On. 3 Press the ri ght (Ex it) s oft key to save the se tting, exit t he D isplay submen u, and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu. Sleep Timeout Note: For c on ve n ie nc e as y ou le a rn t o u se y ou r cameraâs featu res and menu options, you may want to set the Sle ep Timeout to the longes t interval (5 minutes). This will give you time to consider a feature or m enu option before the camera goes into sle ep mode and the image L CD turns off. Prior to the camer a completely powering itself off due to inactivity, the camer a goes to âsleepâ by turning off the image LCD and either turning off or slowing down other functions to conserve power. Pressing any bu tton on the camer a (except the power switch) âwak esâ the cam era fr om sleep mode. After the camer a goes to sleep, it will power off afte r an additional 5 minutes of inactivity. Once the camera completely powe rs itself off, you must u se the power swit ch to power it on again. The Sleep Timeout se tting determines how quickly the cam era goes into sleep mode when you ar e not usi ng the camera. The default value is 2 m inutes . T o change the Sl eep Timeo ut: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way control ler to highlig ht the Sleep Tim eout option . 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the values until you see the value you want. 3 Press the ri ght (Ex it) s oft key to save the se tting, exit t he D isplay submen u, and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Men u 97 Controlling Cam era Sounds Controlling Camer a Sounds Figu re 7 3: Sound Submenu Use the Sound submenu to control the sounds used on your camer a V olume Level The V olume Level setting allows you to determine the vol ume level of the sounds on your camer a. Th is i n cl ud es b o th th e sy s te m so un ds ( s ee t he ne x t s u bs e ct io n ) a nd t he s ou nd s y ou at t ac h t o im a ge s via the Sound Record button (see âRecording Soundâ on page 26). Y ou can set the Volum e Level from 1 (lowest/softe st) to 7 (highest/loudest). The default value is 4. T o chang e the Volume Lev el: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way control ler, if needed, to highlight the V olume Level option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the values until you see the value you want. 3 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to save the setting, exit the Sound subm enu, an d retur n to the Preferen ces me nu. System Sounds The Systems S ounds setting det ermines whethe r or not you will hear the camera âs system sou nds, su ch a s sh ut t er c l ic ks , be e ps , an d so f or th . Th e d ef au lt v al u e i s On ( th a t y o u wi ll h ea r sy s te m so un d s) . T o chang e the setting so that System Sounds are turned Off: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way controller to highlight the System Sounds option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to change the value t o Off. 3 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to save the setting, exit the Sound subm enu, an d retur n to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 98 Formatting the Memory Card Figure 7 4: Format Card Confirmation Screen Formatting the Memory Car d Us e t h e Fo r ma t C a rd op ti on t o r ef or m at t he me m or y c a rd in yo ur c am era . R ef or m at ti n g w il l era s e a ll of the files (images) on the mem ory car d, including protect ed files, folders, scripts, and so forth. When you select the F ormat Card option b y pressing the le ft (Format ) soft ke y, you will see a confirmation of your choice to format the me mory card (see Figur e 74). Y ou can either press the middle (F ormat) soft ke y to reforma t the memory car d, or press the right (Cancel) soft key to exit the confirmation screen without r eformatting the memory card and return to the Prefer ences menu. Selecting the PC Connect Mode Figure 75: PC Connect Mode Submenu Use the PC Connect Mode submenu to specify how the camera will appe ar to your computer when connected via the USB interface in PC Connect mode. Y ou can then transfer images from your camera to the computer via the USB interface. T able 63 explains the PC Connect Mode settings and their functions. The curre ntly selected mode is indicated by the checkmark t o the left of it. The default mode is Digita Device. Ta b l e 6 3 : PC Connect Mode Submenu Note: The USB Disk Drive mode will remain set on your camer a only if you power off the camera by using the power switch. By powering off the camer a correctl y, you will not have to repeat the se procedur es when transferring images to your compu ter in the futur e. T o chang e the PC Connect Mode: 1 Press the down or up arr ow on the 4-way controller, if needed, to highlight the P C Connect Mode you want. 2 Press the left (Select) s oft key. T he checkmark move s to the highlighted mode, and you return to the Prefe rences m enu. The camer a is now set to the mode you just selec ted. Setting Function USB Disk Drive The camera is o perate d as a US B Mass S torage De vice and app ears as a disk dr ive conn ected t o the c omputer. Y ou can co py imag es fro m your c amera to the compu ter a s you would from anoth er dis k dri ve. Use this setti ng to conne ct the camer a to a Mac OS 8.6 or bet ter computer , or to a Windows Me, 98, or 20 00 computer. Digita Device (default) Y ou can use software included with your com puter or ca mera t o transf er im ages to the com puter. U se th is setti ng to connec t the camera to a Windows Me, 98, or 2000 computer.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 99 Setting the Da te and Time Figure 76 : Set Date & Time Sub menu Setting the D ate and Time Use the Set Date & Time submenu to set the camer aâs date and time. If you wish to change the format that is used for the date and tim e, see the next subsection, âF ormat Dialog.â Press the up or down arrow on the 4- way controller to scr oll through the list of numbers on the left side of the scree n until you r each the number you want. The number in the curre ntly highlighted field in the center of the scr een (such as the Month field, as shown in the e xample in Figur e 76) changes accordingly. Wh en you have selected the number for the cur rently h ighlighted field, pr ess the r ight arrow on the 4-w ay c ontrol ler to move to the n ext f ield. When yo u have fini shed sett ing th e date and time , press th e right (Exit ) soft ke y to save th e date and tim e settings and return to the Preferen ces me nu. Note: Press the up or down arrow on the 4-way contro ller t o scr oll t hrou gh the num bers on the left side of the scr een. Pre ss the right or left arrow to move bet ween t he date/ time f ields i n the center of the scre en. For exa mp l e, to s et th e da te to Sep t em be r 18, 20 00 an d th e tim e t o 2: 51 pm , as sh ow n i n th e exa mp le in Figure 76: 1 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 9 9 9 9, which sets the Month field in the cen ter of the scr een to 9 (for the month of September). 2 Press the right arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move to th e Day field. 3 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 1 8 18 18 18. 4 Press the right arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move to th e Y ear field. 5 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 00 00 00 00. 6 Press the right arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move to th e Hour field. 7 Press the up or down arrow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 02 02 02 02. 8 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller to move to the Minutes field. 9 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 51 51 51 51. Since the am/pm setting is set to pm by default, simply leave the am/pm field as it is. 10 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to save the date and time settings and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 100 Setting the Image C ounter Figure 7 7: Format Dialog For m a t D ia l o g When you press th e left (Format) soft k ey i n the Set Date & Time submenu, you see the F ormat dialog, which allows you to select fr o m a list of six, pre defined date and time formats. There are thr ee formats which use the 24-hour clock form at, and three form ats which use the 12-hour clock format. The default format for the date and time is MM/DD/YY 12 hr, which means the date is in the Month/ Day/Y ear format, and the time is in the 12-hou r clock format. For ex ample, to set your camera to t he MM/DD/YY 24 hour forma t (so that the date will be in the Month/Day/Y ear format, and the time will be in the 24- hour clock format), follow these steps: 1 Press t he left (F ormat) soft key in the Set Date & Time submenu to move to the F ormat dialog. 2 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way control ler to highlight the MM/DD/YY 24 hours format in th e Format dial og. 3 Press the l eft (Sel ect) sof tkey, The checkm ark moves to the highl ighted d ate and time format, and you return to the Set Date & Time submenu. The camer a is now set to the date and time format you just sel ected. Setting th e Image Counter Figur e 78: Image Counter Submenu Use the Image Counter submenu to set how the image counter works. Y ou can set the camera either to restart num bering at 1 (one) each time you de lete all the images fr om your camer a, or to k eep a continuous count of images from th e beginning of the cameraâs us e. T able 64 explains the Image Counter set tings and their functions. The curr ently se lected setting is indicated by the checkmark to the left of it. The defaul t setting is C ontinuous C ounter. Ta b l e 6 4 : Image Cou nter Submenu Setting Function Reset When Empty Each ti me yo u d el ete a ll of th e i mag e s on yo u r c ame ra , t he counter r estarts t he first image captur ed at num ber 1. Continuous Counter (default) The image s are c ounte d accor ding to the hi story o f the camer aâs use . F or exa mple: im age # 4 00 is t he 400t h image to be ca ptured with this cam era.
Appendix A: Usin g the Preferences Menu 101 Naming Y our Camera T o change the Image Counter setting: Note: Once you have changed the Image Counter se tting, yo u must power the camera off and then on again for the new setting to tak e effect. 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way control ler, if needed, to highlight the Image Counter setting you wa nt. 2 Press t he left (Se lect) soft k ey. The checkmark mo ves to the highlighted setting, and you retur n to the Prefe rences menu . 3 Power the camer a off and then on again for the new setting to ta k e effect. Fig ur e 79: Came ra Name Submenu Naming Y our Camer a Use the Camer a Name submenu to ente r a unique name for your camer a. The camera name is used to identify images in the Review mode when you have transmitte d images from one camer a to another. (See âT ransmitting Images Between T wo Camerasâ on page 48 for more information.) The default camera name is Digita Camera. For example, if you transmit images from camera B to camer a A, camera Bâs name appears in the image information area of the Review m ode screen on cam era A when any images fr om camer a B are viewed on camera A. The camera name does not appear in the image information ar ea when you view images in Review mode on the camer a you used to capture them . Note: If a group name is applied to an image, then the group name, rathe r than the camer a na me , ap pe a rs in th e im a ge in f or ma ti o n a re a o f the Review Mode scree n. T o name your camera: 1 Press the left arro w on the 4-way contr oller to delete the lette rs of the def ault camer a name. 2 Press the left (Character Set Icon) soft k ey to toggle through the four char acter sets (capital letters, lowerc ase letter s, numbe rs, or symb ols) until you s ee the char acter set you want to use displayed in the left soft k ey label area on the overlay bar. 3 Press the: î Up or down a rrow on the 4 -way con trolle r to s croll through the li st of charac ters o n the l eft side of the scree n. î Right arrow on the 4- way controller to e nter the sel ected char a cter and advance the insertion point in the center of the scre en. î Left arrow on the 4-way c ontroller to back up and delete a char acter. î Middle (Space) soft key to create a space between wor ds in the camera name. Note: Words wr ap to the nex t line when they get to o long. 4 Press the right (Exi t) soft k ey to save the camer a name you set and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 102 Selecting a Langua ge Selecting a Language Figur e 80 : Language Subme nu English is set as the default language that is used on the camera. Use the Language submenu to select a language from the list of installed languages. T o select a langu age: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way control ler to highlight the language setting you want . 2 Press t he left (Sele ct) soft k ey. The checkmark mo ves to the highlighted language, and you return to the Pref erences menu . The s elected l anguage is now us ed on th e camera. Resetting Ca mera Settings Figure 8 1: Re s et S et t in g s C o nf ir m at i on S cre e n Us e the Re se t Set ti n gs op ti o n to res e t al l of the cam e ra set ti n gs (e xc ep t for th e La n gu a ge , t he Format for the Set Date & Time, the PC Connect Mode, and the Video Preferences settings) to their defaults in one step. When you select the Reset Se ttings option by pr essing the le ft (Reset) soft k ey, you will see a confirmation of your choice to res et the cam era settings (se e Figure 81 ). Y ou can either pre ss the middle (Reset) soft k ey to reset the set tings, or press the right (Cancel) soft k ey to exit the confirmation screen without r esetting the settings, and return to the Pre ferences men u.
Appendix B: Camera and Acc essories Informa tion 103 Camera Specifica tions Appendix B: Camer a and Accessories Information Overvie w This appendix covers the following topics: î âCamer a Specificationsâ on page 103 î âBattery Lifeâ on page 106 î âHP Accessories for Powering the Cameraâ on page 10 7 î âUsing the HP A C Power Adapterâ on page 108 î âUsing the HP NiMH Batteries and Rech argerâ on page 108 î âStorage Capacities of Memory Car dsâ on page 109 Camer a Spe cifications The following table lists the specifications for the HP 618 digital camer a. Camera Dimensions 127.5m m (L) x 56.5m m (W) x 71. 5mm (H ) (5.0 in. x 2.8 in. x 2.2 i n.) We i gh t 300 g (10.6 oz.) withou t batteries and m emory car d Zoom î 3x optical, 2x digital zoom î 5.2-16. 5mm î 34-10 8mm (35mm equiv ale nt) î Digital zoom: shoot ing 1.2/1.5/ 2x, playba ck 2x Sens or 2.11 meg apix el, 1/2 .7â C CD Color Depth 30-bi t (10 bit s x 3 co lors) Color Control Full color, B&W (blac k and white), and Sepia Resoluti on î Full Size: 1 600 x 12 00 pixels î 1/4: 800 x 600 pixels
Appendix B: Camera and Acc essories Informa tion 104 Camera Specif ications HP Imaging Te c h n o l o g y î Custom ASIC for higher-perfor mance image processing î Image processing at 220,000,000 ope rations per image in <1/2 second î Excellent en largements at 8â x 10â Lens î PENT AX TM power zoom (9 ele ments in 8 group s; 2 aspheric al elem ents) î f/2.4-f /4.0 î TTL ( through the l ens) au to focu s Image Type Setti ngs î One Shot î Continuous î Timelapse Exposure Compe nsat ion /-2.0 EV ( Exposure V a lue) i n .5 st eps Shutter Spe ed 1/1000 to 4 sec onds Sensit ivity Auto, Fixed (100 or 200 ISO speed) AE M eter ing TTL AE (auto expos ur e) met ering with choi ce of Aver age, Center-W eighted, or Spot Viewfi nder î Separate zooming optic al viewfinder with diopter adjustment î Diopter adjustment from -3m -1 to 1 m -1 î Field of view : 85% (at 3m or 9.8 ft .) Foc us î TTL cont rast-detectio n auto foc us î Normal: 0.5m (1 .64 ft.) to in finity î Macro: 0.1m (0.3 3 ft.) to 0.6m ( 1.97 f t.) î Infinity î Manual focus: 0.1m (0.33 ft.) to infinity Flash î Built-in flash î Flash modes: Auto, Auto wit h Red-Eye Reduction, Forced On, Forced On with R ed-Eye R eductio n, Force d Off, Night, and Night with Red-Eye Reduction î Effective r ange: 0.3m (0.98 ft.) - 5.4m (18 ft.) at 5.2mm 0.3m (0 .98 f t.) - 3.7m ( 12 ft .) at 16.5 m
Appendix B: Camera and Acc essories Informa tion 105 Cam era Specification s Exposure Settings Auto, Landscape Program , Portrait Pr ogram, Action Progr am, Aperture Priority, and Shutter Priority Memory Card CompactFlash TM card (T ype I or T ype II, Power level 0) shipped with camera Timer î 10-secon d delay î 3-second delay with HP Remote Contr ol (included) Sound Capture and play b ack sound with 45 seconds of recor ding per image White Balance Auto, Daylight , T ungsten, and Fluo rescen t Interfaces î USB connection to computers î HP JetSend and Digita infrar ed protoc ols î NTSC/PAL TV connections î Orientation sensor for automatic image ro tation on TV , computers, and camer as Ca mera Op era ti ng System Flashpoint Digita Image L CD î 2â low te mper ature poly-s ilicon T FT color LC D with 130,338 p ixels î Adjustable brightnes s control î Displays thumbnails or full scr een images Image Control Functi ons î Create slides hows of images î Send images via HP JetSend infrared techn ology to JetSend-c apable pr inters î Delete, protec t, group, and categorize images î Waterm ark images with Date and Time, T ext, or Logo stamps Status L C D Displays bat tery status, flash mode, timer mode , auto focus m ode, and pictur es re mainin g Powe r î 4 AA non-rechar geable batterie s (included) î Optional: A C power adapt er, or re chargeabl e NiMH batter ies and recha rger
Appendix B : Camera and Accesso ries Information 106 Battery Life Battery L ife Caution: Use onl y AA ph oto l ithium, high dr ain alkaline, or NiMH batter ies in the HP 618 digital camera. Do no t mix batterie s of different types . Replace all 4 batteries at the same time; do not repl ace the batterie s individually. Always follow all of the manufactu rerâs instructions on the battery package whe n handling, recharg ing, or disposing of batteries. The life of the batteries y ou use in your HP 618 camera dep ends on how you use t he camer a and on the type of batte ries you use. The following table pro vides estimates of battery life in a variety of usage scenarios, including: î Light use in Capture mode (image L CD off, no flash) î Moder ate use in Capture m ode (some use of image L CD and flash) î Leaving the camera in the idle state (image L CD off) î Using the camer a in Review mode î Using the camer a in live view of Capture mode (image L CD on) T o preserve batte ry life: î Limit the use of the image L CD, or turn it off. î Limit the use of the flash , or turn it off. î Set the camer a to take lower resolution and/or lower quality images. (See âFile Settings Sub- menuâ on page 53.) Higher resolution and higher quality images take the camer a longer to process and com press. î Limit operating the came ra in cold tem per ature conditions. Oper ating the camera at colder temper atur es re sults in short er battery l ife. î Always repl ace all 4 ba tteries at the same t ime. One low-char g ed b attery will re duce b attery l ife for all batteri es in th e camer a. This is tr ue of both non -rech argea ble and re chargea ble batte ries. Note: An AC powe r adapter provides power to the camer a â it does not rechar ge the batte ries. î Use the HP-appr oved A C power adapter with your camera instead of batter ies, or use rechar ge- a b le b at t e r i e s . T h e f o l l o w i n g s ec t i o n l i s t s t h e H P - a p p ro v e d a c c e s s o ri es y o u c a n u s e f o r p o w e r i n g the camer a. Usage Scenario Photo Lithium NiMH High Drain Alkaline Light Capture Mode (Shots) 81 0 450 230 Mode rate Ca pture Mode (S hots) 500 280 15 0 Idle State (Minutes) 600 300 300 Review M ode (M inutes) 220 120 90 Live View Captur e Mode (Minutes) 120 85 45
Appendix B: Camer a and Accessories Information 10 7 HP Accessories for Powering the Camera HP Accessories for Powering the Camer a Caution: Using a non-HP AC power adapte r will void your camer aâs warranty. Y ou can purchase any of the following accessories for power ing the camera, as well as ot her camera accessories, fr om the HP Shopping Village website at: w ww . h ps h o p pi n g .c o m . www.hp shoppi ng.com. www.hp shoppi ng.com. www.hp shoppi ng.com. (C l ic k t h e Digital Photogr aphy Digital Photogr aphy Digital Photogr aphy Digital Phot ography li n k on t he ma i n we b pa g e . T h e n cli ck t h e Digital Photography A ccessor ies Digital Pho tography A ccessories Digital Pho tography A ccessories Digital Pho tography A ccessories link on the second web pag e.) This table of power accessories was cur rent at the time this manual was publishe d. For t he most up-to-date accessories list, refe r to the HP Shopping Village website. HP Model Number Accessory Specifications A610 HP A C Power Adapt er (S e e th e n ex t se c t io n , âU s i ng the HP AC Power Adapterâ) Input: 100-240 V olts A C Output : 9 V olts DC, 1. 33 A mps, 12 W atts AA30 HP NiMH Battery Rech arger and 4 NiMH Batteries (See âU sing the HP NiMH Batteries and Rechargerâ on page 1 08) HP NiMH Ba ttery Rechar ger: Recharging time is appro ximately 3.5 hours Input: 9 V olts D C Output (charg ing volt age): 8.4 V olts DC HP NiMH Ba ttery: 1.2 V olts DC (e ach)
Appendix B: Camer a and Accessories Information 10 8 HP Accessories for Powering the Camer a Using the HP AC Power Adapt er Figur e 8 2: Connecting t he HP AC Power Adapterâs Cable to the C amer a T o connect the HP AC Power Adapter t o the camera : 1 Plug the A C power adapter into a power sour ce, such as a wall outlet or power strip. 2 Open the door to the connector comp artment on the camer a. The connector compartm ent is located on the far right side of the camera when y ou are looking at the fr ont of the camer a. 3 Connect the round end of th e AC power adapterâs cable to the middle (power adapter) connector in the camer a (see Figur e 82). Note: Use the HP-approved A C power adapter as the power source for the camer a during power-intensive operations, like when you are using the camer aâs image L CD for an extended period of time. Using the HP NiMH Batteries and R echarger If you purchase the HP NiMH Battery Rec harger, which inclu des 4 rech argeable NiMH batt eries, please no te the follow ing: î Before you install the batteries in the HP 618 camer a, you must charge all 4 NiMH batteries in the HP NiMH Battery Re charger per the in structi ons that came with the Batt ery Recha rger. î Y ou must r echarg e all 4 NiMH batteries afte r fully dr ai ning them four t imes for the batte ries to reach the ir optimum capaci ty and perfor mance. î Alway s recharge all 4 NiMH ba tteri es at th e same ti me. One low -charged batter y will red uce the battery life for all 4 batter ies in the camer a . î Do not store the b atteries in the HP NiMH Battery Rec harger for an extended period of time if it is not necessary. î Do not over-charge th e batteries. Disconnecting and reconnecting the HP NiMH Batte ry Recharger to A C power frequently, without dischar ging the batteries, may cause o ver-char ging. î Do not expose the NiMH batte ries to heat. Permane nt damage will r esult if the batter ies are exposed to tempe ratu res above 110° F or 43° C. Always store the batteries in a cool location. î After long-term stor age, recharge all 4 NiMH batteries be fore use. This is because the battery cells discharge ove r time. (At room te mper ature, NiMH batter ies gener ally discharge at about 1% per day.)
Appendix B: Camera and Acc essories Information 109 Storage Capaciti es of Memor y Cards Storage Capacities of Memory Car ds The following table lists the number of images an 8 MB, 16 MB, and 32 MB CompactF lash memory card can store, dep ending on the JPEG quality level or TIFF se tting at which the camer a is set. Note: T o make the most memory available on a memory card, r eformat the car d either on the camera (using the F ormat Card option in the Preferen ces me nu â see page 68), or thr ough the computer (using USB Disk Drive mode, reformat the card as you would a disk drive â see page 69). The number of images noted in this tab le are aver ages. In particular, the number of images per memory card can vary bas ed on the JPEG compre ssed file size of each image. Resolu tion JPEG-Good Quality Level JPEG-Better Quality Level JPEG-Best Quality Level TIFF 8 MB Card Full Size 27 14 7 1 1/4 82 50 28 5 16 MB Ca rd Full Size 56 29 15 2 1/4 165 101 57 10 32 MB Card Full Si ze 113 60 30 5 1/4 332 204 115 21
Appendix C: Product Warranties 110 Limited Pro duct Warranty Appendix C: Product W arranties Limited Pr oduct W arr anty A. Extent of Limited Warr anty 1 Hewlett-Packar d ( HP) warrants to th e end-user customer that th e HP products spe cified above will be free fr om defects in material and workmanship for t he duration spec ified above, which durat ion begins on the date of pur chase by the cu stomer. 2 For softwar e products, HPâs limite d warranty applies onl y to a failure to e xecute pr ogram ming instructions. HP does not warr ant that the oper ation of any product will be uninterrupted or error free. 3 HPâs limited warr anty covers only th ose defects which arise as a result of normal us e of the product, and does not cover any other problems, including those which arise as a result of: a. Improper maintenance or modification; b. Softwar e, media, parts, or s upplies not provided or supported b y HP; or c. Operation out side the productâs s pecification. 4 If HP receives, during the applicable warr anty period, notice of a defect in any product which is covered by HP âs warranty, HP shall either repair or re place the defective produc t, at HPâs option. HP Product Dur a tion of Limited War ranty HP 618 digital camera 1 year Comp actFlash mem ory car d 1 year HP Photo Imaging Softwar e 90 Days
Appendix C: Product W arranties 111 Limited Product W arranty 5 If HP is unable to r epair or replace , as applicable, a defective pr oduct which is covered by HPâs warranty, HP sh all, within a reasonable time after be ing notified of the defect, refund th e purchase pr ice for the pr oduct. 6 HP sha ll ha ve no obli gatio n to repair , repla ce, or refu nd unti l the c usto mer retur ns the defec tive product to HP . 7 Any replacement product may be either new or lik e-new, pro vided that it has functionality at least equal to that of the product b eing replaced. 8 HP product s may contain remanufa ctured parts, comp onents, or materials equivalen t to new in performance. 9 HPâs lim ite d wa rranty is vali d i n a ny co unt ry w here t he co vered HP p roduc t i s di str ibut ed b y HP. Contracts for additional warr anty services, such as on-site service, are available from any authorized HP service f acility in countries where the product is distribu ted by HP or by an authorized importer. B. Limitations of Warr anty 1 TO THE EXTENT ALL OWED BY L OCAL LA W , NEITHER HP NOR ITS THIRD P A RTY SUPPLIERS MAKE ANY O THER WARRANTY OR C ONDITION OF ANY KIND, W HETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT T O THE HP PRODUCTS, AND SPECIFIC ALL Y DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY , S A TISFA CTORY QUALITY , AND FITN ESS FOR A PARTICUL AR PURP OSE. C. Limitations of Liabi lity 1 T o the extent allowed by local law, the remedies provided in this Wa rranty Stateme nt are the customerâs sole and exclusive r emedies. 2 TO THE EXTENT ALLO WED BY L OCAL LAW , EXCEPT FOR THE OBLIGA TIONS SPECIFICALL Y SET FORTH IN THIS W ARR ANTY ST A TEMENT , IN NO EVENT SHALL HP OR ITS THIRD P ARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT , INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT A L, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA GES, WHETHER BASE D ON C ONTRACT , T ORT, OR ANY O THER LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER ADVISED OF THE POS SIBILITY OF SUCH D AMAGES.
Appendix C: Product Wa rranties 112 Hewlett-Packard Y ear 2000 Warr anty D. Local Law 1 This Warr anty Statement gives the customer specific legal rights. The customer may also have other rights which vary from state to state in the United States, from province to province in Canada, and from country to country elsewhere in the wor ld. 2 T o th e ex t en t tha t th is Warr an ty St at e me n t i s i nc on si s te n t w it h loc a l l aw , t hi s Warra n ty St at e me nt shall be deemed modified to be consistent with such local law. Under such local law, certain disclaimers and limitations of this Warr an ty Statement may not apply to the customer. Fo r examp le, some states i n the Un ited Stat es, as well as some g overnme nts outsid e the U nited States (inclu ding provinces in Canada), may: a. Precl ude the disclaimers and limita tions in this W arranty Statement from limiting the sta tutory rights of a consumer (e.g. the United Kingdom); b. Otherwise r estrict the ability of a man ufactur er to enfor ce such discla imers or limi tations; or c. Grant the customer additional warranty rights, specify the duration of implied warr a nties which the manufactur er cannot disclaim, or not allow limitations on the durat ion of implied warranties. 3 FOR CONSUMER TRANSAC TIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND, THE T ERMS IN THIS W ARRANTY ST A T EMENT , EXCEPT T O THE EXTENT LA WFULL Y PERMITTED, DO NO T EXCLUDE, RESTRICT , OR MODIFY , AND ARE IN ADDITION TO, THE MANDA TORY ST A TUT ORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE T O THE SALE OF THE HP PRODU CTS T O SUCH CUSTOMERS . Hewlett- Pack ard Y ear 2000 W arr anty For Consu mer Products Distributed Through Authorized Resellers Subject to all of the terms and limitations of the HP Limited Warr anty Statement pro vided with this HP Product, HP warr ants that this HP Product will be able to accur ately pr ocess date data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing and sequencing) fr om, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000, including leap year calculat ions, when used in accordance with the Pr oduct documentation pro vided by HP (including any instructions for installing patches or upgr ades), provided th at all other produc ts (e.g. hardwar e, software, firmwar e) used in combination with such HP Pr oducts(s) prope rly exchange date data with it. The dur ation of the Y ear 2000 warranty ex tends through Januar y 31, 2001.
Appendix D: P roduct Safety and Regulator y Information 113 Safety Information Appendix D: Product Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Information Using Batteries The HP 618 digital camer a comes with four non-r echargeable batter ies. Do not attempt to r echarg e these batter ies. D o not mix old and new batteries or b atteries of different t ypes. Fol low the battery manufact urerâs saf ety inst ructions . Disposing or Recycling of Batteries Follow the battery manuf acturerâs disposal and r ecycling instructions or the guidel ines that are recomme nded for y our a rea. Do not inciner ate or p uncture batteri es. Using an A C Power Adapter Use only the HP-app roved A C power adapter. Failure to do so could cause damage or destr oy the camera and cause a fir e. Use of a non-HP A C power adapter will also void your came raâs warr anty. Mercury Disclosur e Statement The image L CD of the HP 618 digital camera contains me rcury. Disposal of this m aterial may be regulated due to environm ental considerations. F or disposal or recycling information, please contact your local autho rities or EIA: w ww . e ia e . o r g www.ei ae.org www.ei ae.org www.ei ae.org.
Appendix D: Product Safety and Regul atory Information 114 Regulatory Notices Regulatory Notices U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of th e FC C rules. Oper ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this devi ce may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interfe rence th at may cause undesired operation. Canada This digital apparatus does not e xceed the Class B limits for radio noise e missions from digital apparatu s as set out in the interfer ence-causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatu s, ICES-003 of the De partment of Comm unications. Cet appareil numé rique res pecte les limites de bruits r adioélectriques ap plicables aux appar eils numériques de Classe B pr escrites dans la no rme sur les maté riels br ouilleurs: Appareils Numériques, NMB-003 édicté e par le ministre de la Communicat ion.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 115 Glossary Glossary 4-way controller A button on the back of the c amera that has four directional arr ows (up, down, right, and left) th at you can press to naviga te the menu s and imag es displa yed in th e image L CD. AC power adapter Alternating Current powe r adapter. A power tr a nsformer that provide s power to the digital camer a and preserve s batter y life. (Note that t he A C power adap ter does not re charg e the ba tteries.) Action Program exposure mode The exposur e mode setting in the Photo Ass ist menu that automatically optimizes the camera settings for taking pictures of subjects in ac tion, such as people playing sports. See also âexposur e modesâ on page 116. AE Metering Automatic Exposure Metering. A setting in the Ph oto Assist menu that deter mines the area of the scene used to set the e xposure for a capturing an image. aperture The variable diameter open ing in a camera lens that l ets you control th e intensity of light reaching the fi l m o r CCD . A c a me ra' s a pe rt u re a n d s h ut t er sp e ed d et er m in e a p h ot o âs ex p os ur e. A pe rt u re di am e te rs a re expr essed in f- number s â the large r the f-nu mber, the small er the lens openin g. Dividing the foc al lengt h of a lens by a specific f-numbe r gives its apertur e diameter. See also âC CDâ on page 116,âf-numberâ on page 117, and âfocal lengthâ on page 117. Aperture Prior ity (Av) exposure mode The exposur e mode setting in the Ph oto Assist menu that le ts you select an aper ture, and the c amera automatical ly selects the shutte r speed. See also âape rture â on page 115, âexposur e modesâ on page 116, âshutterâ on page 121, and âShutter Priority (T v) exposure modeâ on page 121. Auto exposure mode The expo sure mode se tting in t he Phot o Assist menu where al l setti ngs are at th eir defau lts and c annot be changed. See also âexposure modesâ on page 116. Auto Focus mode The defaul t focus mode of the ca mer a that automati cally focuses the c a mera lens on a pictur e subject. Y ou can change the focus mode t o Manual Focus in the Photo Assist menu. S ee also âManual Focus m odeâ on page 119. auto focus range This focus range is set b y pressing a status L CD button on top of the camera and determines whether the focus is set for infinity (pictur e of a distant subject), for macro (a clos e-up picture of a sub ject), or for normal focus range. auto focus range button A status L CD button on the top of the camer a that you pr ess to set the aut o focus range. auto focus range icon An icon that appears in the status L CD and shows the cameraâs curr ent auto focus r ange. automatic exposure (AE) The camera fea ture that calculate s the necessary shutter spee d, aperture, and ISO speed to get the best possible ex posure. automatic shutof f A featur e that automati cally shuts off the c a mer a after a certa in per iod in ord er to p reserve batte ry power . Av See â Aperture Priority (Av) exposure modeâ on page 115. battery status The amount of power that r emains in the batter y.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 116 Glossary battery status icon An icon that appears in the status L CD that indicates the amount of power left in the batteries. camera mode dial The dial on the top of the camer a that allows you to choose one of four operational modes (Captur e, Review, Playback, or PC Connect mode) for the camer a. Captur e mode An operational mode you use to tak e pictures (or âcaptur e imagesâ) with the camera. See also âcamer a mode dialâ on page 116. CCD Charge Coupled Device. An integrated micr o -electronic, light-sensing de vice built into a digital camera. The CCD image s ensor is a silicon chip containing hundreds-of-thousands to a fe w million light-sensitive cells that conve rt light to electricity. A C C D sensor, comb ined with the di gital image processin g capabil ity, is the functional equivalent of film in a digital camer a. CCD element A single photosensitive area within a C CD array that is able to record a unique image detail. Also known as a photosite. See also âCCDâ on page 116. Continuo us image ty pe Th e i m ag e t yp e s e tt i ng on th e c am e ra t ha t ca pt u res a s e ri es of i ma ge s i n rap i d s uc ce ss i o n. Th is im a ge ty pe is recommended for capturing action shots. See also âimage typeâ on page 118. default A setting tha t the camer a automatically uses until y ou change it. Delete A command associated with a soft k ey that is used to erase mark ed images or the current image fr om the memory card. digital zoom Refers to digital cropping of the image, giving the appearance of greate r zoom. After the optical zoom is at its ma ximum set ting, you c an digital ly zoom in three s teps (1.2 x, 1.5x , and 2.0x). The image LCD must be on in order for the digital zoom to operate . Note that, in digital z oom mode, enlargement is accomplished without changes in lens configuration. Since the lens is not involved in digital zoom, the changes appear only in the image LCD; they are not evident though the viewfinder. See also âoptical zoomâ on page 120. diopter cont rol A small dial next to the viewfinder that you can turn to adjust the focus of t he picture su bject in the view- finder. Note that th e diopter contr ol has no effect on the image y ou capture , however. DISPLAY button A button on the back of the cam era th at turns the image L CD on and off in Capture mode, and turns the overlay bars on and off in Playback mode. This button is inactive in Review and PC Connect modes. See also âimage LCDâ on page 118. exposure mo des The modes that you can sel ect in the Ph oto Assist menu to set the camer a exposur e to prope rly capture images, including: Auto, Landscape Program, Portr ait Program, Action Progr am, Aperture Priority (Av), and Shutter Prior ity (T v). See also â Action Program e xposure mode â on page 115, â Aperture Priority (Av) exposure modeâ on page 115, â Auto exposure mode â on page 115, âLandscape Progr am exposure modeâ on page 119, âPortrait Program exposure mode â on page 120 , and âShutter Priority (T v) exposure modeâ on page 121. file name A set of letters, num bers, and symbols assigned to a file to distinguish it fro m other files on the computer or in the camer a.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 11 7 Glossary file size The number of bytes in a file. The file size for images saved on a digital camer a is determined by the resolution of the camera's CCD and the amount of image data compr ession. Y ou can usually select the amount of compress ion on the camera and again in the compu ter software that p rocesses the images. Note that if you compr ess an image on the camer a and in the software, the compression is cumu lative. file typ e The digital format in which a file is saved. Computer progr ams can insert or impor t files th at wer e saved in a file type that the pr ogram su pports. Comm on file types for images include JPEG (Joint Ph oto Expert Group form at) and TIFF (T agged Image File F ormat). See also âJPEGâ on page 118 and âTIFFâ on page 122. firmwar e The low-level softwar e that runs in a digital camer a and controls the functionality and us er interface on the camer a. firmware update The process of updating to a new firmwar e version on the digital camer a. flash A brief, intense burst of l ight from an elect ronic flash unit on a camer a. Use flash when the lighting in a scene is inadequate for taking pictures. flash mode This mode is set by pr essing a status L CD button on top of the camera and determ ines how the flash will operate. flash mode button A status L CD button on the top of the camer a that you pr ess to set th e flash mode. flash mo de icon(s) An icon or set of icons in the status L CD that shows the current flash mode. f-number The f-number (also call ed the f-stop) is r elated to the diameter of the lens apertur e â dividing the focal length of t he lens by th e f-nu mber s pecifi es the aper ture di ameter. The f -number is us ed in conjun ction with the shutter s peed to set th e exposure . A standard set of f- numbers is comm only used in camer a lenses. A lower f-numbe r, such as f/2.8, indicates a larger apertu re, which lets in mor e light. A higher f-numb er, such as f/16, indicates a smaller aperture, which lets in less light. See also âapertureâ on page 115 and âfocal lengthâ on page 117. focal length The distance between the ce nter of the lens (mor e precise ly, its rear nodal point) and the C CD sensor in digital cameras wh en the lens is focuse d on infinity. The focal length is specified in millimeter s. focus Refers to adjusting the le ns in a digital camera in order to pla ce a clear image on the plane of the CCD sensor. focus mo de See â Auto Focus modeâ on page 115 and âManual Focus modeâ on page 119. focus range See âauto focus rangeâ on page 115. four-way cont roll er See â4-way cont roller â on page 115. f-stop See âf-numberâ on page 117. gro uped i mages A number of image s that ar e bundled togeth er. Y ou can gr oup images in the Edit menu of R eview mo de. Grouped images appe ar in a folder on the memory card whe n the camer a is connected to a computer.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 118 Glossary HP Im aging T echnol ogy State-of-the-art image pr ocessing technology develope d by HP that captures sharp , colorful images with exceptional levels of detail, individually optimizes every image, and produces great detail in highlights and shadows. icon A picture on an L CD, computer screen, or printed on a device th at represe nts a specific setting. Icons on a digital camera âs L CD communicate t he camer a's status, such as particular settings that have been made for taking a pictur e. See also âL CDâ on page 119. imag e The electronic version of a photogr aph as it is stored in a digital camera, computer, or other electro nic medium. Digital camera s capture and store an image when you tak e a picture. See also âpictur eâ on page 120 and âphotoâ on page 120. image L CD The Liquid Crystal Display on t he back of the camera. The image LCD and its accompanying buttons and soft k eys let you view and work with images on the camera . See also âDISPLA Y buttonâ on page 116, âMENU buttonâ on page 119, and âsoft k eysâ on page 122. image size See âsizeâ on page 122. image type The type of image the camera will capture . There are thre e image types: One Shot, Continuous, and Timelapse. Y ou can change the image type by pressing the left soft k ey while in Capture mode. Se e also âContinuous image typeâ on page 116, âOne Shot image typeâ on p age 119, and âTimelapse image typ eâ on page 123. image type icon An icon that appears on the left side of the bottom overlay bar in the image L CD and shows the image type set ting in Capture mode. image type soft key The left soft k ey on the back of the camera that y ou press to se t the image type in C apture mode. infrared A type of connection that allows images to be tr ansmitted between the camer a and another device (such as a p rint er) w itho ut co nnect ing w ires wh en th e infra red wind ow on the ca mera is l ine d-up with an inf rared sensor on the other device. See also âJetSendâ on page 118. infrar ed window The window on the front of the camera that uses the HP JetSend infr ared technology. See also âJetSendâ on page 118. interval The time betwee n images being captur ed for the Timel apse image type. ISO num ber The International Organization f or Standardizati on r ati ng for film or CCD sens itivity. A hi gher ISO number means less light is needed to tak e a picture. C C Ds in digital camer as are rated in terms of ISO numbers. ISO is not an acronym; it is derived from the Gre ek âisosâ, meaning equal. See also âCCDâ on page 116. JetSend A protocol devel oped by HP for sending image data from one device to another without using any connecting cables b etween the de vices. JetSen d uses infr ared tech nology to tr ansmit images from the camer a to a printe r for printing . JPEG A compressed image file format developed by the Joint Photo Exper t Group. Its str engths are very small file sizes a nd fast display r ates. (It is 7 to 1 0 times f aster tha n some oth er imag e file form ats.) See also âfile typeâ on page 117 and âTIFFâ on page 122.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 119 Glossary Landscape Progr am exposure mode The exposur e mode setting in the Photo Ass ist menu that automatically optimizes the camera settings for taking pictures of distant subjects, such as landscape scenes. See also âexposure modesâ on page 116. LC D Liquid Crystal Display. A display technology that is used on digital c ameras. An L CD displays numeric characters and/or icons to communicate the camer a's status, such as the particular settings that you have made for taking a picture. See also âimage L CDâ on page 118 and âstatus LCDâ on page 122. LED Light Emitting Diode. An indicator on the camer a that shows the status of som e feature or p rocess by either lighting solid or blinking on and off. lens One or mor e pieces of opt ical glass or similar material designed to collect and focus r a ys of light to form a sharp image on the film (for tr aditional film cameras) or the C CD (for digital camer as). Lenses are r ated accordin g to their maximum a pertur e (smallest possible f- number) an d their foca l length (us ually specified in millimeters). See also âapertur eâ on page 115, âCCDâ on page 116, and âf-numberâ on page 117. live view Using t he imag e LCD on the back of th e camera to vi ew th e picture subject before taking t he pict ure. Manual F ocus mode The focus mode th at you set in the Photo Assist me nu that lets y ou control the focus dist ance of the lens when capturing images. See also â Auto Focus mode â on page 115. marking Specifying an image or several images to which you will then apply a single action. memory car d A small remov able, non-volatile stor age medium for digital information that acts as the film in a digital camera . The memory c ard store s the images so you can pr ocess or view them at a later time. Mak e sur e th e ca me ra i s p o we re d off any time you re move the memory car d from the camera. memory car d access LED The LED that blinks to indicate the memory card is in use. See also âLEDâ on page 119. memory car d door The door on the side of the camer a that you open to acc ess the memory c ard in the camer a. MENU button A bu tton on t he bac k of the came ra that let s yo u vie w me nus o n th e imag e LCD in the C aptu re, R eview , or Playback mode. See also âmodesâ on page 119. menus These appear on the image L CD when you press the MENU button in the C apture , Review, or Playback mode and are used to choose and se t camera settings. micropho ne The audio device on the front of the cam era us ed to recor d sound that is then attached to an image. mode dial See âcamer a mode dialâ on page 116. modes These set the way the camer a functions. There are four operational modes: Capture, Review, P layback, and PC Connect. NTSC c onne ction National T elevision Standards Committee connection. The video (TV) connection standard used in the United Sta tes and Jap an. One Sh ot image type The image type setting on the camera th at captures one image at a time. See also âimage typeâ on page 118.
HP 618 Digital Camera Userâs Guide 120 Glossary optical re solution The true resolution of an imaging device, and the r esolution at which the device capture s images. Se e also âresolutionâ on page 121. optical zo om The process of changing the field of view and magnification of the lens by moving different len s groups within the lens to change its overall focal length. See also âdigital zoomâ on page 116. orientation senso r An electro-m echanical device in the camer a that determ ines whether the camer a i s being held horizontally or vertically, and which side is u p. The camera use s t he data from this sensor to make sure the image is displayed right side up in t he image L CD, regardless of the camer a position when the image was captured. overlay bars Opaque or translucent information b ars that appear on the image L CD. PA L c o n n e c t i o n Phase Alternating Li ne connection. The vi deo (TV) connection used in Europe. PC Connect mo de An operational mode y ou use to contro l the camer a via a computer (PC or Macintosh) t hat you have connected to the camera. Y ou use this mode to downl oad images from the camer a to the computer. See also âcamera mode dialâ on page 116. PCMCIA adapter Personal Computer Manufacturers Common Interface Agreement adapter. A small, electronic card that fits in a PCMCIA slot and controls or communicates with an exte rnal device. For digital cameras, this is usually an adapter into which you can plug the memory car d from the c amera for t ransferr ing images to your comp uter. PCMCIA slot The slot in a computer that holds a PC MCIA card. A PCMC IA slot is usually found in laptop comp uters. photo The printed version of an image. See also âimageâ on page 118 and âpictureâ on page 120. photo type See âimage typeâ on page 118. photosite See âCCD el ementâ on page 11 6. pictur e Picture refers to the original composition when capturing an image with a digital cam era. See also âimageâ on page 118. pictures remaini ng indicato r A numeric indicator in the status L CD that shows how many more images you can captu re and store on the memory card. pixel Picture e lement. The small est elem ent that can be assigned an inde pendent c olor and intensit y and d is pl a ye d on a co m pu te r mo n it o r s c ree n or o n an LCD . A p ix el i s a do t wi th e it h er a sq u ar e o r re ct a ng ul a r shape. Digital images displayed on a monitor screen or L CD are composed of thousands of pixels. Playback mode An operational mode y ou can use to view the capture d images on the camer aâs image L CD. Y ou can view images as full-sized stills, play back timelapse and gr ouped photo sequences, and cre ate slideshows of the images. See als o âcamer a mode dialâ on page 116 andâslideshowâ on page 122. Portrait Progr am exposure mode The exposur e mode setting in the Photo Ass ist menu that automatically optimizes the camera settings for portrait photogr aphy. See als o âexposur e modesâ on page 116.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 121 Glossar y power switch The switch on the camer a that turns it on or off. preview See âlive viewâ on page 119. protect Marking an image so that no one can delete it. record button Se e â so u nd rec o rd bu tt onâ o n p ag e 12 2. red -e ye Refers to a humanâs or animalâs eye s that appear red in captu red images, which is cause d by using the flash on a camera. red-eye reduction A flash mode you can use to minimize red-eye in capture d images of humans or animals. The came ra does this by flashing twice. See also âflash modeâ on page 11 7. ref or ma t Reformatting completely er ases the memory car d, including all images (protected and unprotect ed) and all o ther f iles. re mote contr ol A d ev ic e us ed to tr i gg e r t he sh ut t er fr om a l oc at i o n t ha t i s re m ot e f ro m t he ca m era , s u ch a s wh en yo u w a nt to tak e a self portr ait or want to b e in a grou p pictur e. When you pr ess the HP R emote Controlâs trigger, the image capture is delayed by a length of time specified by the timer mode. See also âtimer modeâ on page 123. res ol ut ion The measure of how many pixels ar e displayed or printed. The r esolution of a CCD is determined by multiplyin g the X pi xels by t he Y pix els. The greate r the r esolution, t he gre ater the amount of detai l visible, and the lar ger the file size. The final ou tput device (computer monitor or p rinter) on which an image is displayed or printed determines the actual resolution you w ill see. F or example, if you c apture an image at 1600 x 1200 pix els, and your printer is capable of printing at only 300 dpi (dots per inch), the printed image will be no more than 300 dpi. rev ie w The process of u sing the image L CD to view the images stored on the memo ry card. Review mode An operational mode you can use to sort and edit the captured images on the camer a. See also âcamer a mode dialâ on page 116. self-timer See âtimerâ on page 123. Send but ton A button on the back of the cam era you can use to send images fr om the camer a to a printer via the HP JetSend infrared t echnology. The Send button is active in the Capture, Review, and Playback modes. See also âJetS endâ on page 11 8. shutter A set of surfaces th at block light from the film or C CD in a camera. W hen the sh utter is rele ased, the surfaces op en for a pr edefined time , admitting a measur ed amount of light. See also âC CDâ on page 116. Shutter Prior ity (T v) exposure mode An exposure m ode setting in the Photo Assist m enu that lets yo u select a shutte r speed, and the camera automatically selects the apertur e setting. See also âaperture â on page 115, âA perture P riority (Av) exposure modeâ on page 115, âshutterâ on page 121, and âshut ter speedâ on page 122.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 122 Glossary shutter rel ease button A two-stage button on the top of the camer a that is enabled in Captur e mode. Pr essing this button halfway down allows the camer a to mak e various settings, such as Auto F ocus Lock. Pressing this button all the way down in one motion allows the camer a to mak e various settings and to capture one or more images, depending on the image type selected. Th e camera mak es a shutter sound as each image is captured. shutter speed The amoun t of time the shu tter stay s open when y ou pres s the shu tter rele ase button . size The actual height and width of an image when you have saved the image. Y ou wil l not see the image size change in the imag e L CD after you save it. sleep mode A fea ture that conserves bat tery power by au tomatically shutting off the image L CD after a period of time (default 2 minutes) t hat the camer a hasnât been used. slide sho w The sequential viewing of images stor ed on the camer a's memory card in Playb ack mode. soft k eys Three but tons that are locate d just below the image L CD on the back of the camer a. The soft k e ys let you work with images and menu s on the image L CD. See also âimage L CDâ on page 118. sound record button A button on the back of the cam era th at allows you to recor d sound that is then attached to an image. speak er The audio device on the back of the camera th at allows you to hear the cam eraâs sy stem sounds (shutte r clicks, beeps, and so forth). It a lso allows you to hear sound that was previous ly recor ded and attached to an image via the cameraâs sound r ecord button. status L CD The Liquid Crystal Display on the top of th e camera that u ses a combination of numeric char acters and icons to communicate the cam era's statu s, such as particular camer a settings. status L CD buttons The three buttons beneath the status L CD that you can press to set the fla sh mode, timer mode, and auto focus range . See also âauto focus range buttonâ on page 115, âflash mode buttonâ on page 117, and âtimer mode buttonâ on page 123. strobe See âflashâ on page 117. subje ct The main object, person, or sce ne that you want to captu re with your camer a. telephoto A lens that has a longer focal length and narrower field of view (includes less subject ar e a) than a normal lens. A telephoto le ns make s a subject appear lar ger and/or closer than does a normal lens at t he same camera-to-subject distance. See also âwide angleâ on page 124. thumbnail A miniature of the original image that is lar ge enough to allow you t o identify the image, but is small enough to allow you to see multiple images in a single software window. Thumbnails are use d to display on-scre en images of the contents of a di gital cameraâs mem ory card. TIFF T agged Image File Format. A bitmappe d file format for images. TIFF does not compr ess the image. TIFF files are supported by many pr o grams and can also be used on many types of computers. See also âfile typeâ on page 117 and âJPEGâ on page 118.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 123 Glossary Timelapse image type The image typ e setting on the camer a that captu res a s low proces s with a series of images. See als o âimage typeâ on page 118. timer A device that lets you tak e a self portrait or be in a grou p picture. Wh en you pre ss the shutter release button or the HP Re mote Controlâs t rigger, the image captur e is delayed by a length of time specified by the t imer del ay. See also â timer delay. â timer delay The amount of time the came ra waits to tak e the pictu re when using th e timer. timer LED The Light Emitting Diode on the front of the c amera th at flashes to indicate the countdown of the timer delay when you h ave set the timer an d then pre ssed the shu tter re lease butt on or the HP Remote Controlâs t rigger. timer mode This mode is set by pr essing a status L CD button on top of the camera and dete rmines how the shutte r rele ase butto n will be tri ggere d. timer mode butt on The status L CD button on the top of the camer a that you press to set the time r mode. timer mode icon (s) An icon or set of icons that appears in the status L CD and shows the current time r mode. Tv See âShutter Priority (T v) exposure modeâ on page 121. TV (video) con nection The connector into which you plug th e video cable t o connect the came ra to a television (TV). See al so âNTSC connectionâ on page 119 and âP AL connectionâ on page 120. unload The process of cop ying images from the memor y card dire ctly to the computer. unmark The proces s of d eselec ting imag es in t he camera th at have p revious ly bee n marked. unprotect The proces s of removi ng the protectio n on images in th e camera so t hat the y can be delet ed. USB Universal Serial Bus . An interface for connecting periphe rals, such as digital camer as, to a computer. USB Mass Storage Device Class A Microsoft Windows device class that lets the operating syste m display the files in a camera as though they are stor ed on a separate, additional compu ter device similar to a disk drive. video cable The wire that can be use d to connect the camer a to a television. video input con nector The conn ector on a t elevisi on into w hich you plug t he vi deo cab le. viewf inder The window on the back of the camer a through which you look to fra me the subject th at will be recor ded when you captur e an image. wak e up The process of bringing the cam era out of sleep mode.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 124 Glossary White Balanc e A setting in the Photo Assist menu th at is used to corr ect the color applied to a capt ured image under different lighting conditions in order to make the white areas in the image appear white without any color cast. wide angle A l en s th at h as a s h or te r fo ca l le ng t h a nd a wi de r f i el d of vi e w ( in c lu di n g m o re s ub j ec t a re a) t ha n a n or ma l lens. A wide angle lens mak es a subject appear smaller t han does a normal lens at the same camera-to- subject dist ance. See also ât elephotoâ on page 122. zoom T o enlarge the subject by changing the field of view and magnification of the lens by using the zoom lever. Once the cam era lens is at maxim um optical zoom, you can switch into digital zoom mode, if the image L CD is on. See also âoptical zoomâ on page 120 and âdigital zoom â on page 116. zoom leve r A lever on the back of the camer a that moves the lens continuously betwe en telephoto and wide angle focal lengths. The zoom lever also controls the digital zoom. See also âdigital zoomâ on page 116, âfocal lengthâ on page 117, âtelephotoâ on page 122, and âwide angleâ on page 124.
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 125 Index Index Numerics 4-way controller, usin g 15 A AC power adapter purchasing from HP 107 safety information 113 usin g 108 Accessories for powering the camera 107 Add to Order submenu 82 AE Meterin g submenu 60 Aperture indicator 12 Auto focus range Macro and Infinity indicators 13 setting 11 B Batteries purchasing from HP 107 safety information 113 using rechar geable 108 Battery life 106 Buttons 4-way controller 15 auto focus range 11 flash mode 10 timer mode 11 C Camera AC power adapter 107 accessories 107 batte ry l ife 106 connecting television t o 50 firmware updates 7 HP Year 2000 warranty 112 limited product warrant y 110 NiMH batteries and recharger 107 Prefer ence s menu 94 Reset Setti ngs menu option 73, 102 specifications 103 Status screen , viewing 14 transf erring im ages to com puter 38 using Focus Lock 18 Camera Name subm enu 72, 101 Camera-Cam era me nu option 84 Camera-P rinter m enu opti on 85 Capture mode menus accessing 52 Capture Se ttings 52 Image Stamp 62 Photo Assist 55 Preference s 66, 94 using 15 Capture m ode, settin g the camera to 8 Capture Settings me nu 52 Categories submenu 80 Categorizing i mages 35 Collapsing Time lapse or grouped images 31 Connecting camera to television 50 Continuous images, shooting 20 Customer Supp ort Centers, HP 93 D Date and time, setting 70, 99 Date/Time Stamp submenu 62 Delete menu option 78 Deleting imag es 32 Dialogs Format for Set Date & Time 70, 100 Logo Files 65 Digital Print Order Form (DPOF) 81 Digital zoom indicator on image LCD 13 Digital zoom, us ing 22 Diopter contr ol, using 22 Display submenu 67, 95 Disposing of batterie s 113 Dissolving image groups 33 DPOF (Digital Print Order Form) 81
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 126 Index E Edit menu 78 Erase Order menu opt ion 83 EV Compensation submenu 57 Expanding Timelapse or grouped images 31 Exposure mode indicator 12 Exposure Mode sub menu 56 F File Setti ngs subm enu 53 Find By Category submenu 87 Find By Date submenu 87 Find menu 86 Firmware upda tes 7 Flash mode, setting 10 Focu s Lo ck, usin g 18 Focus Mode subme nu 59 Focus range , au to 11 Focu s, M anua l 12 Format Card menu option 68, 98 Format dialog, Set Date & Time submenu 70, 100 G Group Name submenu 79 Grouped images expanding or collapsing 31 viewing 28 Grouping images 33, 79 H HP Customer C are 93 HP JetSend 46 HP Shopping Vill age website 107 HP Year 2000 warranty 112 I Image Cou nter submenu 71, 100 Image LCD, using 12 Image S tamp menu 62 Image typ es Continuous images 20 One Shot ima ges 19 setting 13 soft key 13 Timelapse images 21 viewing Timelaps e in Play back mode 28 Images categorizing 35 collapsing Timelap se or grouped 31 Continuous 20 creating slideshows 29 deleting 32 dissolving groups 33 expanding Ti melapse or group ed 31 grouping 33, 79 JetSending to printer 46 marking 31 One Shot 19 protecti ng 34 searching for 36 selecting in Review mode 30 sharing 38 Timelapse 21 transferr ing to compute r 38 unmarki ng 31 unprotecti ng 34 viewing full screen 28 viewing on tel evision 51 viewing Timelaps e and grouped 28 Infinity auto focus range indicator 13 Instant Review, using 25 ISO Speed submenu 61 J Jetsendin g image s to printer 46 L Language submenu 73, 102 LCDs image LCD 12 status LCD 9 LEDs memory card access LED 24 timer LED 24 understandin g 23 viewfinder LED 23 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 23
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 127 Index Limited product warranty 110 Logo Files dialog 65 Logo Stamp submenu 65 M Macro auto focus range indicator 13 Manual focus 12 Marking images 31 Memory card access LED 24 Memory card, Format Card me nu option 68, 98 Menus Capture mode 15, 52 Capture Se ttings 52 Edit 78 Find 86 Image Stamp 62 Photo Assist 55 Play Settings 74 Playback mode 74 Pref erence s 66, 94 Print Or der Form 81 Review mode 78 Transmit 84 Mercury disclosure statement 113 Modes Capture 8, 52 Flash 10 Playback 27, 74 Revie w 27, 30, 78 Timer 11 N NiMH batteries and recharger purchasing from HP 107 usin g 108 O One Shot images , shooting 19 Output format, video 50 Overlay bars , using 12, 14 Overlay soft key 12 Overlay soft k ey, usi ng 14 Overview camera introduction 5 camera troubl eshooting 88 menu and soft ke y reference 52 preparing to take pictu res 8 reviewin g images 27 shar ing ima ges 38 taking pi ctures 16 P PC Connect Mode submenu 38, 69, 98 Photo Assist menu 55 Pictures advanced picture taking 17 point-and-shoot picture taking 16 Play Setti ngs menu 74 Playback mode accessing 27 creating a slideshow 29 viewing full screen image s 28 viewing Timelapse and grouped images 28 zooming in on images 28 Playback mode menu accessing 74 Play Settings 74 Playba ck Rate submen u 76 Point-and-shoot pictures 16 Preference s menu 66, 94 Print Or der Form men u 81 Printer, JetSen ding images to 46 Problems, troublesh ooting 88 Product safety information 113 Product warr anty, limi ted 110 Protect menu option 79 Protecting images 34 R Recharg ers, ba ttery purchasing from HP 107 using 108 Recording sound 26 Recycling batte ries 113 Regula tory not ices (USA & Canad a) 114
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 128 Index Removing grouping on images 33 Reset Setti ngs menu option 73, 102 Review mode accessing 27, 30 categorizin g images 35 collapsing Timel apse or grouped images 31 deleting images 32 diss olv ing image groups 33 expanding Ti melapse or group ed images 31 grouping im ages 33 marking images 31 protecting images 34 searching for images 36 selecting images 30 unmarking images 31 unprot ecting image s 34 Review mode menus accessing 78 Edit 78 Find 86 Print Or der Form 81 Transmit 84 Review ing images 27 S Safety AC power adapter 113 batte ries 113 mercury disclosur e statement 113 Searching for images 36 Selecting images in Revie w mode 30 Set Date & Tim e submenu 70, 99 Setting the format for date and time 70, 100 Sharing images 38 Shutter Speed i ndicato r 12 Slideshow submenu 75 Slideshows, creating 29 Soft keys Add to Order submenu 82 AE Meterin g submenu 60 Camera Na me submen u 72 Camera-Camera option 84 Camera-P rinter o ption 85 Capture Settings me nu 52 Categories submenu 80 Date/Time Stamp submenu 63 Delete op tion 78 Display submen u 67 Erase Order option 83 EV Compensation submenu 57 Exposure submenu 57 File Settings subm enu 54 Find By Category submenu 87 Find By Date submenu 87 Find menu 86 Focus subm enu 59 Format Card option 68 Format List dialog 70 Group Name submenu 79 Image Counter subm enu 71 Image Stamp menu 62 image types 13 ISO Speed submenu 61 label s 12 Language submenu 73 Logo Files dialog 65 Logo Stamp submenu 65 Overlay 12, 14 PC Connect mode subme nu 69 Photo Assist men u 55 Play Setti ngs menu 74 Playba ck Rate submen u 76 Preference s menu 66 Print Or der Form men u 81 Protect option 80 Reset Setti ngs option 73 Set Date & Time submenu 70 Slideshow submenu 75 Sound submenu 68 Status 14 Text Stamp submenu 64 Timelaps e Settings submenu 54 using 12
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 129 Index Video Preferences submen u 77 View Or der op tion 83 White B alance s ubmenu 58 Sound submenu 68, 97 Sound, recording 26 Specifications, camera 103 Status LCD auto focus range 11 flash mode 10 timer mode 11 using the button s 9 Status screen , viewing 14 Status soft key 14 Subme nus Add to Order 82 AE Meterin g 60 Camera Name 72, 101 Categories 80 Date/Time Stamp 62 Display 67, 95 EV Compensation 57 Exposure Mode 56 File Settin gs 53 Find B y Catego ry 87 Find B y Dat e 87 Focus Mode 59 Group Name 79 Image Counter 71, 100 ISO Speed 61 Language 73, 102 Logo Stamp 65 PC Connect Mode 38, 69, 98 Playback Rate 76 Set Date & T ime 70, 99 Slideshow 75 Sound 68, 97 Text Stamp 64 Timelapse Settings 54 Video Preferences 77 White Balance 58 Support, HP customer 93 T Technical support, HP 93 Television, connecting to camera 50 Text message area, understanding 12 Text Stamp submenu 64 Time and date, setting 70, 99 Timelapse images expanding or collapsing 31 shooting 21 viewing 28 Timelaps e Settings submenu 54 Timer LED 24 Timer mode, setting 11 Transferring images to a computer 38 Transmit menu 84 Troubleshooting common probl ems 88 U Unmarking images 31 Unprotectin g images 34 Updates to firmware 7 Userâs Guide how to use it 7 related in formation 7 whatâs in it 6 V Video output format, selecting 50 Video Preferences submen u 77 View Or der m enu opti on 83 Viewfind er LE D 23 Viewing images on television 51 W Warranty HP Year 2000 112 limited camera 110 Websites HP Customer Care 93 HP Shopping Village 107 White Balance submen u 58 Z Zoom lever, using 22
HP 618 Digital Camera Userâs Guide 2 Legal Notices Legal Notices  Copyright 20 00 Hewlett -Packa rd Comp any. ALL RIGHT S RESERVED. The information contained in this document is subject to ch ange without notice. Hewlett-P acka rd Co mpany shal l not be li able for err ors con tained h erein or for consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of th is material. No pa rt of this document ma y be photocopied, r eproduced, or tr anslated to another language without the prior written conse nt of Hewlett-Pack ard Com pany. HP , the HP logo, JetSend, the JetSend logo, PhotoSmart, and the PhotoSmart logo are proper ty of Hewlett-Pa ckar d Company. PENT AX is a trademark of Asahi Optical Co., Ltd. The Digit a camera operating system is  copyright 2000 FlashPoint T echnol ogy, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RES ERVED. Digita and the D igita logo are trademarks of FlashPoint T echnology, Inc. SanDisk and CompactFlash are trademarks of SanDisk Corpor ation. Adobe and Acrobat are re gistered tra demarks of Adobe Systems Incorporat ed. Microsoft and Windows are r egistered tr ademarks of Micr osoft Corporat ion. Apple, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
HP 618 Digital Camera Userâs Guide 3 T able of Contents Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapter 1: Introduction ............................. ................................. ................................ ......... ........................ .............................. 5 Product Overview ...................... ................................. ................................ ....................... ..................... ................... 5 Whatâs in this Guide ................................................... ................................ ....................... ..................... ................... 6 How to Use this Guide ........................ ................................. ........................................... ..... ............................ .........7 Related Information ...... ............................................ ................................ ......................... ........ ............................... 7 Chapter 2: Preparing to Take Pictures .......................................... ................................ ............... .................. ................... 8 Accessing the Capture Mode and Powering on the Camera ................................. .............................. 8 Using the Status LCD ... ............................................ ................................ ........................... ................. ................... 9 Using the Image LCD ............................................... ................................ ............................ ................ .................. 12 Chapter 3: Taking Pictures ...................... ................................. ................................ ............. .................... ............................ 16 Taking Simple Point-and-Shoot Pictures .................................................. ...................................... ............ 16 Taking More Adv anced Pictures .............. ................................. ................................ .................. ............... ....... 17 Using the Zoom Lever .. ................................. ................................. ................................ ...... ................................. 22 Using the Diopter Control .... ................................. ................................ ................................ . ............................ 22 Understanding the LEDs on the Camera ........ ................................ ................................. ................. ........... 23 Using Instant Review ..... ................................. ................................. ................................ ....................................... 25 Recording Sound ....................... ................................. ................................ ....................... .......... ........................... 26 Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewin g Images .......... ................................. ................................ ................................. ...... 27 Using Playback Mod e .. ................................. ........................................... ............................. .... ............................ 27 Using Review Mode .................. ................................. ........................................... ............... .................. ................ 30 Chapter 5: Sharing Images ................................ ............................................ ......................... ............................. ................. 38 Transferring Images to Your Computer .......... ................................ ............................................ ................. 38 Using a Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) File ..... ................................ ................................. .......... ...... 44 JetSending Images to a Printer ..... ................................. ................................ .......................... .................. ..... 46 Transmitting Images Between Two Cameras ...................... ................................ ................................. ..... 48 Connecting the Camera to Your Television ........................ ................................ .............................. ........ 50 Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference . ................................. ................................ ...................... ........... ................. 52 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys ............... ........................................... ................................. ... .............. 52 Playback Mode Menu and Sof t Keys .......................... ................................ ................................. ... .............. 74 Review Mode Men us and Soft Keys ............................. ................................ ................................. . ................ 7 8
HP 618 Digital Camera Userâs Guide 4 T able of Contents Chapter 7: Troubleshooting ................... ................................. ................................ ................ ............................ ................ 88 Troubleshooting Common Problems .................................... ................................ ........................... ...... ..... 88 Contacting HP Customer Care ...... ................................. ................................ ............................ ..... .................93 Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu . ................................. ................................ ...................... ...................... ..... 94 Accessing the Preferences Menu ........................ ................................ ................................. ....... .................... 94 Setting the Display ................... ................................. ................................ ....................... ..................................... 95 Controlling Camera Sounds .......... ................................. ................................ .......................... .................. ......9 7 Formatting the Memory Card ................... ................................. ................................ ................ ...................... 9 8 Selecting the PC Connect Mode ......................... ................................ ................................. ....... ............... ..... 98 Setting the Date and Time ............... ................................. ................................ ..................... ............ ................ 9 9 Setting the Image Counter ......................... ................................. ................................ ........... ...................... ... 100 Naming Your Camera .. ................................. ................................. ................................ ........ ......................... .... 101 Selecting a Language ........................ ................................. ........................................... ...... ................ .............. 102 Resetting Camera Settings ... ................................. ........................................... ...................... ...................... ... 102 Appendix B: Camera and Accessories Information .......................... ........................................... ........... ............... 103 Camera Specifications ....................... ................................. ........................................... ...... ................ ...............103 Battery Life .. ................................. ................................. ................................ .............. ................... ......................... 106 HP Accessories for Powering the Camera ...... ................................ ................................. ................. ..... ....107 Storage Capacities of Memory Cards .............. ................................ ................................. ............. ............ 109 Appendix C: Product Warranties ......... ............................................ ................................ ........... ...................... ............... 110 Limited Product Warranty ................ ................................. ................................ ..................... ....................... .... 110 Hewlett-Packard Year 2000 Warranty ....................... ................................ ................................. .... ............ 112 Appendix D: Product Safety and Regulatory Information ..................... ................................. ................... ........ 113 Safety Information ......................................... ........................................... ........................ ......... ........................... 113 Regulatory Notices ................... ................................. ................................ ........................ .................... ................ 114 Glossary ... ................................. ............................................ ................................. ..... ........................... ................................. ..... 115 Index ........... ................................. ................................. ................................. ........... ..................... ................................. ............... 125
Chapter 1: Introduction 5 Product Overview Chapter 1: Introduction Wel c o m e t o t h e HP 618 Digit al Camera User âs Guide . This guide will help you take high-qu ality pictures quickly and easily with your HP 618 digital camer a. Product Over view The HP 618 is a versatile, point-and-s hoot digital camera. It provides th ese ke y features: î HP Imaging T echnology î 3x optical /2x digital zoom î Three ima ge ty pe set tings â One Shot, Continuous, and Timelapse î T wo focus modes â Auto and Manual î Three auto focus r a nge settings â Normal, Macro, and Infinity î Six ex posur e settings â Auto, Landscape Progra m, Portr ait Program , Action Program , Aperture Priority, and Shutter Priority î Built-in flash with seven flash modes â Auto, Auto with Red-Eye Reduction, For ce d On, Force d On with Red-Eye Redu ction, For ced Off, Night, and Night with Red-Eye Reduction Note: For more detaile d information about t he camera âs features, see âCamer a Specificationsâ on page 103. î Three ti mer m odes â Off, 10-Second Timer, and 3-Second Remote Y our camer a comes equipp ed with four oper ating modes (see T able 1). T o s et the mode, turn the camera mode dial on top of t he camer a to the mode you want to us e. Note: C apture, Play back, and Review modes have menus and related s oft ke ys you can use to change your camer aâs settings and to edit and organize images. (PC Connect mode does not have menus or soft k eys.) Ta b l e 1 : Camera Mod es Mode Use this Mode to... C ap tu r e Capture Capture Capture T ake pict ures (or âcap ture imag esâ) . Playbac k Playback Playback Playback View the capt ured images in a variet y of ways. Y ou c an view images ful l screen, play back t imelapse and grouped image sequences, and create slid eshows of images. R ev ie w Revi ew Revi ew Revi ew Sort and edit t he capt ured i mages i n a v ariety of ways. F or example, you can gr oup, c ategorize, delete, and se arch f or captur ed images. PC Connect PC Connect PC Connect PC Connect T ransf er images fr om the c amera to a comput er.
Chapter 1: Introduction 6 Whatâs in this Guide Whatâs in this Guide This Userâs Guid e provides all the âhow toâ and re ference information you need to use your camera successfully. Part of Manual What is Covered âChapter 2: Preparin g to T ak e Pictur esâ How t o ad just s ettings in t he st atus LCD, imag e LCD, and Capt ure mod e menus t o pr epare your cam era to ta ke pictur es. âChapter 3: T aking Pictur esâ How to tak e simple point- and-shoot pi ctur es, as well as mor e advanc ed picture s. Also how to us e the zoo m, Instant Review, a nd the sound record ing fea tures . âChapter 4: View ing and Revie wing Imagesâ How t o vie w image s full screen, p lay b ack ti melaps e and g rouped image sequences, and create s lideshows of images in Playba ck mode. Also how to edit, organize, d elete, a nd search for images in Review mod e. âChapter 5: Sharing Imagesâ How to share images by tr ansferring them to your computer, JetSen ding them to a p rinter, tr ansmitting them to other came ras a nd printers, and view ing th em on a t elev ision . âChapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Referenceâ What each of your camer aâs m enus a nd re lated s oft k e ys do. âCh apter 7: T roubl eshoo tin gâ Ho w t o f ix co mmo n p ro bl em s w he n us i ng t he ca me ra, an d h ow to co nt ac t HP Customer Car e for help, if need ed. âAppendix A: Usin g the Preferen ces Menuâ How to use the P ref eren ces m enu t o cha nge a vari ety of your camer aâs general settings. â Appendix B: C amer a and Accessories Informationâ Specifica tions for the camer a, as well as informati on about some of the accessories t hat the c amer a supports. â Appendix C: Product W arrantiesâ Limited product warranty and the HP Y ear 2000 warranty for the camera. âAppendix D: Produ ct Safe ty and Regulatory Informationâ Safety information and regulat ory notices regar ding the camera and some o f its access ories. âGlossaryâ Definitions of the terms re lated to you r camer a that ar e used t hroughout this gu ide and in t he ca mera âs Quick Sta rt Guide . âInd exâ Where to find particular topics about yo ur camera throughou t this guide.
Chapter 1: Introduction 7 How to Use this Guide How to Use this Guide Y ou can use this guide online, or you can print it out. The main advantage of using it online is that you can use its built-in sear ching and linking capabilities on your computer t o quickly find the in fo r ma t io n y o u n ee d. Of co u rs e, an ad v an t ag e o f h av i ng a p ri n t- ou t is th at y ou ca n ta ke i t an y wh er e you want to use your camer a. Y ou may also prefer to r ead information about your camer a from a printed version, rather than on a computer screen. Note: If y o u c ho o se t o p r i n t t h is g u i d e , b e a wa r e that printing it in color may tak e a long time. Therefore, you may want to print this guide in black and white, instead. This online guide is provided in Adob e ® Acrobat ® version 4.0 (.pdf) format. T o le arn how to use Acrob atâs sear ching and linking fe atures , see the online H elp for the A croba t softwar e. T o print this guide, s elect P ri n t Print Print Pr i nt from Acrobatâs File m enu. In the Print dialog box, eithe r click the OK OK OK OK button to print the entir e guide, or specify t he P r in t Ra n g e Print Range Print Range Pr i n t R a n ge of pages you want and then click OK OK OK OK. Related Information For a comple te listing and description of your camer aâs features, including diagrams showing the locations of all the buttons, dials, displays, and so on, see the printed HP 618 D igital Camera Quick Start Guide that was include d w ith your camera. Along with helping y ou use your camera for the first ti m e to c ap t ur e a nd vi ew i ma ge s , t he Quick Start Guide als o ex pl ai n s h ow to t ran sf er im a ge s f rom th e camera to your computer. Note: It is assumed that you have already used the HP 618 Di gital Cam era Quic k Star t Guid e to install the batteries and the memory card in your camera. T o learn how to us e the softwar e that came with your camera, se e the softwareâs online Help. All the documentation for the softwar e is provided in the form of online Help within the softwar e itself. Finally, you can get project ideas, troubleshooting assistance, and up-to-date information about yo ur ca m era and th e HP Ph ot o I ma gi n g So f tw a re f ro m th e HP we bs i te at : w w w . h p . c o m / p h o t o s m a r t www.hp.co m/photosmart www.hp.co m/photosmart www.hp.co m/photosmart . Updates for your camer aâs firmware are also posted to this website from t ime-to-time. Y ou can install these updates on your camer a so that you can always have the most c urrent fu nctionality running on it.
Chapter 2: Preparin g to T ake Pictures 8 Accessing the Capture Mode a nd Powerin g on the Camera Chapter 2: Pr eparing to T ak e Pictures Overvie w Y ou can use your camer aâs default settings to tak e pictures in a point-and-shoot fashion, or you can use more advanced features that you set via the cameraâs status LCD and image L C D. This chapter explains how to pre pare your camer a to take pictur es by adjusting various settings on it. This chapter covers t he followin g topics: î â Accessing the Capture Mode and Powering on the Cameraâ on page 8 î âUsing the Status L C Dâ on page 9 î âSetting the Flash Modeâ on page 10 î âSetting the Timer Modeâ on page 11 î âSetting the Auto Fo cus Rangeâ on page 11 î âUsing the Image L CDâ on page 12 î âSetting the Image T ypeâ on pag e 13 î âUnderstanding the T ext Message Ar eaâ on page 12 î âViewing the Camera Statusâ on page 14 î âUsing the Overlay Soft K eyâ on page 14 î âUsing the Captur e Mode Menusâ on page 15 î âUsing the 4-W ay Controllerâ on page 15 Accessing the Capture Mode and Powering on the Camera Figure 1: Sett ing the Cam era to Capture Mod e T o prepare your camera to take pictures, you must first set your camera to Capture mode and p ower on the camer a: 1 T urn the camera mode dial on the top of the camer a to (see Figure 1). 2 Power on the camer a by sliding the ON/OFF power switch on the back of the camer a to the right and releasing it. The statu s L CD on the top of the camer a turns on and displays the statu s of the camer a.
Chapter 2: Preparing to T ake Pictures 9 Using the Status LCD Using the Stat us L CD Figure 2: Statu s LCD Ind ica tors The st atus LCD conveys impo rta nt inf ormat ion about the c ameraâs statu s. Th e stat us LCD show s you the status of the camer aâs batteries, the settings for the flash mode, timer mode, and auto focus range, as well as the number of pictures r emaining on the memory card (see Figur e 2). The status L CD turns on every time you power on the camer a. Y ou can use the status L CD to assess the current statu s of the camer a, and to change the flash mode, timer m ode, and auto focus range settings when p reparing to tak e pictures. The buttons be neath the status L CD â the flash mode bu tton , the timer mode button , and the auto focus r ange button â toggle the associated cam era settings on and off within the status L CD (see Figure 3). T o change one of thes e settings, press th e associated button until y ou see the desired icon or se t of icons displayed in the status L CD for the setting y ou want. Fig ur e 3: Stat us L CD Buttons The next three sub sections explain the possible setting s for the flash mode, timer mode, and auto focus ra nge on the camer a. Note: If you see 000 flashing in the status L CD, this means that either there is no memor y card in the camer a , or the memory car d is full. Flash Batter y status Timer Pictures rem ai ni n g focus ran ge mode mode Auto Auto focus r ange Time r mode Flash mode
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 10 Using the Status LCD Setting the Flash Mode Y o u r c am era h as se v en fl a sh mo d es . Th e d ef au l t f l as h m o de is Au t o ( no i co ns d is pl a ye d ). E ac h m od e is d is p la ye d o n th e s t at us LCD wi t h t he ic o n( s ) s ho wn i n T a bl e 2. T o se t th e fl as h mo de , p re ss t he fl a sh mode button beneath the status LCD to togg le through the icons on the sta tus L CD until you se e the flash mode s etting you want (see T able 2). Note: The flash mode setting r emains se t between shots, bu t will return to Aut o after you cycle the power on the camer a (power it off and then on again). If the batteriesâ charge is low, the camer a will not tak e a picture if the flash mode is set to Force d On or Night, and it will disable the flash if set to Auto. Also note that flash p ictures m ay be over- exposed when using the Macr o a uto focus range (see âSetting the Auto F ocus Rangeâ on page 11). Thus, you may want to turn off the flash (set the flash m ode to For ced Off) when taking pictures with the Macr o auto focus range setting. Ta b l e 2 : Flash Mode S ettings Flash Mode Icon Displayed When to Use Auto (default) No Icon T o allow the camera to determin e the need for flas h based on the lighting conditions. Auto with Red-Eye Reduction T o a llow the camera to deter mine the need for flash based on the lighting conditions. When flash is used, red-eye reduc tion minim izes the occurrence of red- eye in pictures of people or anima ls by flashing twice. For ce d O n T o use the flash, regardle ss of the lighting conditions. Fo r c e d O n w i t h R e d - E y e Reduction T o use the flas h, regard less of the l ighting conditi ons. Red-eye reduc tion minimizes t he occurre nce of red- eye in pictures of people or anima ls by flashing twice. Forced Of f T o take pictur es w ithout fla sh, regardle ss of t he lighting conditions. Night T o use a s low sync m ode of the flash in whi ch the camer a collects t he im age backg roun d with the available light and f lashes to ill uminate the foreground of the imag e. Night with Red -Eye Reduction T o use a s low sync m ode of the flash in whi ch the camer a collects t he im age backg roun d with the available light and f lashes to ill uminate the foreground o f the im age. Red- eye reductio n minimi zes the o ccurrence of red-eye i n pictures of people or animals by flashing twice.
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 11 Using the Status LCD Setting the Timer Mode Note: The 10-Second Timer mode is disabled for the Tim elapse imag e type. (S ee âSett ing the Image T ypeâ on page 13.) Y our camera has t hree timer modes. The default timer mode is Off. Each mode is displayed on the status L CD with the icon shown in T a ble 3. T o set the timer mode, press the timer mode b utton bene ath t he st atus LCD to tog gle t hrou gh th e ico ns on the statu s LCD unti l yo u see t he t ime r sett in g you want (see T able 3). Note: After each timed exposure in 10-Second Timer mode, the camer a will default to the Off timer mode setting. Y ou must rese t the timer to tak e another time d pictur e. In contr ast, the 3-Second Remote timer mode setting remains set shot-to-shot . Ta b l e 3 : Timer Mode Settin gs Note: The auto focus range rem a ins set between shots, bu t returns to Norm al after you cycle the power on the camer a (power it off and then on again). If you change the focus mode fr om Auto to Manual Focus in the Photo Ass ist menu (see âUsing the Capture Mode Me nusâ on page 15), the auto focus range is cancelled. If you set the camer a to the Macro auto focu s range, the image L CD will turn on. This is because you will be u nable to fr ame an image prope rly in th e viewfind er due to par allax err or. Finally, if the camer a cannot focus when set to the Normal auto focus r ange, it will make a âbest gu essâ at the focus and tak e the picture . Howev er , if i t ca nnot foc us wh en set to M acro , it will not take a picture. Setting the Auto Focus Range Y ou can choose from thr ee auto focus r a nges that are available via the status L CD. The default auto focus ra nge is Normal. Each r ange setting is displayed on the status L C D with the icon shown in T able 4. T o set the auto focus range, pres s the auto focus range butt on benea th th e stat us LCD to toggle thr o ugh the ic ons on t he status L CD until you see the se tting you want (se e T able 4). Ta b l e 4 : Auto Focus Range Settin gs Timer Mode Icon Displayed When to Use Off (default) No Icon T o t ake pictures without using t he ti mer. 10-Seco nd Timer T o tak e a pic ture 10 s econd s af ter pressing the s hutter release b utton. 3-Second Remot e T o use the r emote infr ared t rigger on the HP Remote Contr ol (included with the camer a), which has a 3-seco nd delay. Auto Focus Range Icon Displayed When to Use Normal (default) No Icon T o take a pictur e of a subjec t that is within the normal focus range (neit her clos e-up nor in the di stance). The fo cus r ange is s et fr om 0.5 meter s to infini ty. Macro T o t ake a cl ose-up p ict ure of a subj ect, s uch a s a fl ower . The fo cus ra nge i s set f rom 0.1 to 0.6 meter s. Infinity T o t ake a pic ture of a subj ect in th e dis tance, such a s a mountain r ange. The focus r ange is set at infinity.
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 12 Using the Image LCD Using the Ima ge L CD Figure 4: Image LC D Screen in Live View T urn the image LCD on by pr essing the DISPLA Y button on the back of the camera. Y ou now see the live view of Capture mode on the image L CD. Live view lets you preview the pictu res you can tak e with the camer a, as well as view and change some of the camer aâs settings. The image L CD screen in the live view of Capture mode inclu des two opaque overlay b ars and an i m ag e a re a i n t h e c e n t e r f o r v i e w i n g y o u r p i c t u r e s u bj ec t s ( s e e F i g u r e 4 ) . T h e t o p o v e r l a y b a r d i s p l a y s status information about the c amera wh ile you are tak ing pictures. The b ottom overlay b ar contains labels that de scribe the fu nction of the soft k e ys immediatel y below them. For e xampl e, if you pr ess th e r ig h t (S t at us ) sof t key i n Ca p tu re mod e, th e Sta t us sc ree n d is p la ys . T o t ur n t he ov er la y ba rs off or on, pres s th e middl e (Ove rlay) soft key. Y ou can also use the image L CD to access menus to change camer a settings in the Captu re, Playback, and Review modes, and to play back and review captured images in the Playback and Review modes, re spectively. The image L CD is disabled in PC Connect mode. Note: By default, th e image L CD is turned off when you power on the cam era in Ca pture mode. If you want the imag e LCD to always turn on instead, you can change the setting in the Displa y su bmenu of th e Pref erences menu. ( See âDisplay Submenuâ on page 67 and âSetting the Displayâ on page 95.) However, note that the image L CD uses a lot of battery power. If y ou are running your c amer a on batteries r ather than with the HP -approved AC power adapter, you may want to limit you r use of the image L CD. The following subsections pr ovide more information about the overlay bar s and the soft k eys in the live view of Capture mode. Understandi ng the T ext Message Area The text message are a is a one-line text ar ea in the middle of the top o verlay bar. An ex ample text message is: âBattery Low.â The fol lowing indicators will also appear in the text m essage area when y o u c h a n g e c e r t a i n s e t t i n gs i n t he C a pt u r e m o d e m en us . F o r i n f or m at i o n o n u s i n g t h e C a p t ur e m o d e menus to change camer a settings, see âUsing the Captur e Mode Menusâ on page 15. Exposure Mode Indicator When you set the Exposure Mode in the Photo Assist menu to e ither Landscape Progr am, Portrait Progr am, or Action Progr am, the curr ent Exposur e Mode is displayed in the text message are a. Note: For information on setting the Exposur e Mode, see âExposure Mode Submenuâ on page 56. Aperture V alue an d Shutte r Speed I ndicators When you set the Expos ure Mode in the Photo As sist menu to Ap erture Priority (Av) or Sh utter Prior ity ( T v) , the c urrent apertu re val ue and sh utte r spee d are dis play ed in t he tex t mes sage a rea (fo r example: T v 1/125 F5.6). The aperture value and shutte r speed will update automatical ly and change continually as the camer a zooms and measures the exposur e. When the camera cannot se t the correct exposur e becaus e y ou have selected an apertu re or shutter speed that is too big or small, the line in the text mess age area will turn r e d. Manual Focus Distance Note: For information on setting the Focus Mode, see âF ocus Mode Submenuâ on page 59. When y ou se t th e Focus Mode i n th e Phot o As sist menu t o Man ual Focu s, t he fo cus d ista nce appe ars on the left side of the te xt message ar ea. Soft keys To p overlay bar shows status Bottom overlay bar shows soft ke y labels
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 13 Using the Image L CD Macro and Infinity A uto Focus Range Indicators When the auto focus r ange is set to Macro, a Macro icon is displayed on the right side of th e text message area. Wh en the auto focus range is se t to Infinity, INF is displayed. Digital Zoom Indicator When the camera is in digital zoom, the digital zoom icon is displayed on the right side of the text message area. F or information on digital zooming, see âUsing the Zoom Leverâ on page 22. Setting the Image T ype Y our camer a can tak e three types of pictur es (that is, thre e âimage typ esâ): î One Shot î Continuous î Timelapse Note: For the Ti melapse image type, you ca n set t he numb er of imag es tha t wi ll be capt ured and t he int erval bet ween th em in t he Ti melap se Settings submenu of the Capt ure Settings menu. (See âTimelapse Set tings Submenuâ on page 54.) Also note that if the inte rval you set for Timelaps e image c apture i s long, the camera m a y g o i n t o s l e e p m o d e ( s h u tt i n g o f f t h e i m a g e L CD) between taking pictur es to conserve battery powe r. Finally, if you set the Timela pse i nterval to 15 or 30 sec and you have the File T ype set to TIFF , the camer a may skip capturing an image if it is not finished processing the pre vious image i n the Time lapse sequ ence. The image type is displayed at t he left side of the bott om overlay bar in the live view of C apture mode. Ima ge typ e se ttings a re listed in T able 5. The def ault image type is O ne S hot. T o set the i mage type, pr ess the left soft k ey to toggle throu gh the typ es until you see the i mage type setting you want (see T able 5). Ta b l e 5 : Image T ype Settings Image T ype When to Use How to Use One Shot (default) When captu ring a sing le image. Press and release the shutter release button to cap ture a s ingle im age. Continuous When c apturin g a series of images in rap id succession. Recommend ed for action shots. Hold the shutter release button down. Continuous images ar e captured u ntil you releas e the butt on or until th e memory c ard is f ull. Timelap se When captur ing a s low pro cess with a ser ies of imag es. Press and releas e the sh utter releas e button, and the camera cap tures the first image. Then it displays a countdown to the next image c apture on t he top overlay bar. T o cancel, press t he Stop soft key.
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 14 Using the Image LCD Using the Overlay Soft K ey Press the middle (Overlay) soft key to tu rn both overlay b ars off in the live view of Captur e mode. T o turn the overlay bars on again, press any of the thr ee soft k eys. When the ove rlay bars are off, the soft key s are disabled for their normal functions and ar e, instead, enabled only to turn the overlay bars on again. Viewing the Camer a Status Figure 5: Status Scr een Y ou can pr ess the right (Status) soft k ey while in the live view of C apture mode to display the Statu s screen (see Figure 5). This scr een allows you to ch eck the curr ent camer a status, such as the cur rent resolution, quality, and wh ite balance settings. (T o change these settings, use the Captu re mode menus. See t he next subs ection for details.) One or more icons may also appear on the Status screen, in cluding: î means that a memory car d is inserted in the camer a. î means that the cu rrent auto focus range setting is M acro. î shows the batte ry status. The following status information is provided: T o exit the Status sc reen and r eturn to t he live view of Captur e mode, pr ess the right (Exit) soft k ey. Resoluti on Resolu tion setti ng for captu ring imag es (Full Size or 1/4) Quality Quality setting for c apturing images (Good , Better, or Best for the JPEG file type, or T IFF for the T IFF file t ype) White Balance Color corr ection setting to make white areas ap pear white with no color cast EV Comp Exposur e V alue compensat ion setting for expos ure c ontro l ISO Speed ISO Speed setting AE Metering Auto Exposur e Metering s etting Ve r s i o n The ver sion numb er of y our cam eraâs firmw are
Chapter 2: Prepar ing to T ake Pictures 15 Using the Ima ge LCD Using the Capture Mode Menu s Y our camer a has four Captu re mode men us: Note: For more information about all of the Captur e mode menus a nd r elated soft k eys, see âChapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Referenceâ starting on page 52. For m ore information about the Pr e ferences menu, see â Appendix A: Using the Pr eferences Menuâ starting on page 94. î Captur e Settings î Photo Assist î Image Stamp î Preferen ces The Capture Settings, Photo Assist, and Image Stamp menus have settings you can change which affect the images you capture. The P refere nces menu allows you t o change a variety of your camera âs general settings. Figure 6: Parts of a Menu T o access the Capture mode menus: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Capture mode menus are displayed on the image LCD (see Figure 6). 4 Press th e right or left arrow on the 4-way contr oller to m ove acr oss the m enu icon bar t o access a particular menu. (See the next subsection, âUsing the 4-W ay Controller.â) 5 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move t he highlight to the menu option you want to selec t. 6 Press the left soft k ey to select the hi ghligh ted menu opti on. Fig ur e 7 : 4-W ay Controller Using the 4-Way Contro ller The 4-way controlle r is the lar ge button located on the back of your cam era (se e Figure 7). P ress an arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move in the direction of that arr ow (up, down, right, or left) in the image L CD, such as within the me nu structur es of the Capture , Review, or Playback modes. Menu icons Current Menu options menuâ s t itl e Ove rla y bar Soft key s
Chapter 3 : T aking Pictu res 16 T aking Si mple Point- and-Shoot Pi ctures Chapter 3: T aking Pictures Overvie w On ce y ou h av e se t yo ur c am era t o Ca pt u re mo de a nd y ou h av e a b a si c u n de r st an d in g of h ow t o u se your camer aâs status L CD and image LCD (see âChap ter 2: Preparing to T ake Pictur esâ starting on page 8), you are r eady to take pictures. T o optimize your camer aâs capabilities, it is important to understand how to use th e zoom lever, what t he various LEDs mean when the y light solid or blink, how to use Instant Review, and how to use the sound record ing features when taking pictur es. This chapter covers t he followin g topics: î âT aking Simple Point-and-Shoot Picturesâ on page 16 î âT aking More Advanced Picturesâ on page 17 î âUsing Focus Lockâ on page 18 î âShooting a One Shot Imageâ on page 19 î âShooting Continuous Imagesâ on page 20 î âShooting Timelapse Imagesâ on page 21 î âUsing the Zoom Leverâ on page 22 î âUsing the Diopter Controlâ on p age 22 î âUnderstanding the LEDs on the Camer aâ on page 23 î âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25 î âRecording Soundâ on page 26 T aking S imple Po int-a nd-Shoo t Pictu res Note: These instruction s for taking simple point-and-shoot pictur es assume that y our camera is set to the defaul t image type (One Shot), and that Instant Review is on as well. (See âSetting the Image T ypeâ on page 13 and âUsing Instant Rev iewâ on pag e 25 for more information.) Here is the simp lest meth od for taking picture s with your camer a: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to the Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Look through the vie wfinder to select and fr ame a subject for you r picture.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 17 T aking Mo re Advanced Pi ctures 4 Press the shutte r rele ase button. W ait for the shutter sound, indicati ng the cam era ha s capture d the image . Then r eleas e the b utton. The captured image appear s for a 3-second Instant Review period on the im age L CD. If you ar e happy with it, do nothing, and the image will be saved on the me mory card. If not, you can delete the image while it is still dis played in Instant Review by pr essing the middle (Delete ) soft k ey. T aking Mor e Advanced Pictures As explained in Chapter 2: âPr eparing to T ake Pictur es,â yo ur camer a has mor e advanced features that you can set via your camer aâs status L CD and image LCD. Her e is the gener al procedu re for taking more advanced pict ures: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to the Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Set the flash mode, timer mode, and/or the auto focus range via the status LC D buttons on the top of the camera, as desired. (F or information on these settings, see âUsing the Status L CDâ on page 9.) The settings you choose ar e displayed in the status L CD. 4 Press the DISPLA Y button on the back of the camera to turn the image L CD on. 5 Press the left soft k ey to se t the image ty pe (One Sho t, Continuous, or Time lapse). (F or more information, see âSetting the Image T ypeâ on page 13.) The image type you choose is displayed on the left side of the b ottom over lay bar in the image L CD. 6 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a to display the Captur e mode menus on the image L CD, if you wish to change any of the def ault camera se ttings in the menus. 7 S e le c t th e men u opt i on s you wi sh to ch an g e in th e Ca p tu re Se tt in g s , Ph o to As si st , an d/ or Im a ge Stamp menus, and then mak e the changes to the camer a settings within those menus, as desired. (F or information about ch anging settings in these Captur e mode menus , seeâCaptur e Mode Menus and Soft K eysâ on page 52.) For ex ample, if you have set t he camera to th e Timelapse image type, th en you might want to change the default settings in the Timelapse menu option of the Captur e Settings menu. In this case, you could change the num ber of images and/or the interval betwee n them for the time- lapse sequence that you want to shoot.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 18 T akin g More Advan ced Pictures 8 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to exit the Captur e mode me nus. Note: The image L C D uses a l ot of battery power. If you ar e runn ing your camer a on batteries r ather than with the HP-approved AC power adapter, you may want to limit y our use of the image L CD and use the viewfinder instead. T o turn the image LCD off, pr ess the DISPLA Y button on the back of the camer a. 9 Use the i mage L CD or the viewfinder to selec t and fr ame the su bject fo r your pictu re. If nee ded, use the z oom lever (see page 22) to adjust the focal length of the cam era lens to zoom in or out on the picture subject. Y ou can also use the diopte r control (s ee page 22) wh en looking thr ough the viewfinder to adjust the focus of the picture su bject in the viewfinder. Note that the diopter control has no effect on the image you capture, however. If you cannot obtain focus on your pictur e subject, see th e next subsection, âUsing F ocus Lock.â Otherwise, go on to the âWhatâs Next?â su bsection. Using F ocus Lock If you cann ot obt ain f ocu s on yo ur pic ture sub jec t, use Foc us Loc k as f ollow s to g et the p rope r focu s: 1 If the main subject of your pictu re is: î Not within the center of the viewfinder fr ame or image L CD screen, center the main subject of your picture in the center of the viewfinder frame or image L CD screen. Go on to ste p 2. î Ne a r a ve ry b ri gh t or da rk a re a, or i s b eh in d an o th er o bj ec t (s uc h as a s cr ee n o r f e nc e ) w hi c h ov er l ap s t h e s ub j ec t, f oc us t he c am era on a no th er o bj ec t t he sa me d is ta n ce fr om yo u a s th e subject. Go on to step 2. 2 Press the shutte r rele ase button halfway down and continue to hold it halfw ay down . This locks the focus. 3 Without re leasing th e shutter r elease button, r ecompose the pictur e as you orig inally wante d it, and then press th e shutter butt on all the way down to tak e the pictur e. (Also see the foll owing subsections for how to tak e pictures for each image type.) Whatâs Next? What you need to do next to actuall y take a pictu re depends on the image type yo u have selected, and whether or not you have set a timer mode. The following subsections describe how to captur e the image(s), as well as what occur s once you do, for each image type setting.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 19 T aking Mo re Advanced Pi ctures Shooting a One Shot Image If you are using the: î Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter r elease button with no timer mode set, pre ss the shutte r release button. W ait for the shutter soun d, indicat ing the ca mer a has captu red the ima ge. Then relea se the but ton. î 10-Sec ond Timer 10-Sec ond Timer 10-Sec ond Timer 10-Secon d Timer mode mode mode mo d e, pres s an d r eleas e t he shu tter relea se but ton. The timer LED on the front of the cam era (see p age 24) lights solid for 7 seconds. It the n blinks for the fi nal 3 seconds before the camera c aptures t he image. î 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote timer mo de timer mo de timer mode t im e r m o d e, point the HP Re mote Control at t he camer a, and press and release the Remot e Controlâs trigger button. The timer LED on the front of the cam era (se e page 24) blinks faster for 3 sec onds. Then the camer a captures the image. If I ns t an t Re vi e w i s on ( se e âU si n g I n st a nt Re v ie w â o n pa ge 2 5) , yo u ca n d o a ny o f t h e f ol l ow i ng w hi le the image you just cap tured is displayed in Instant R eview on the image LCD: î Record sound that will be attached to this image. F o r information on how to do this, see âRecording Soundâ on page 26. î Delete the image by pr essing the middle (Delete) soft key. î Save the image to the memory card and return to the Captur e mode immediate ly by pr essing the right (Exit) s oft k ey. î Do nothing and, when Instant Review times out (the def ault time-out is 3 seconds), the image is then saved t o the memory ca rd au tomatically.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 20 T aking Mo re Advanced Pi ctures Shoo ting Con tinu ous Ima ges Note: If you set the timer mode to 10-Second Timer or 3-Second Remote for the Continuous image ty pe, you can only tak e one pictur e. Therefore, to capture a Continuou s sequence of images, use the sh utter r elease button wit h no timer mode set (that is, with the time r mode set to its default Off set ting). Press the shut ter re lease bu tton and continue to hold the button down . Then the camera begins to capture the i mages in t he Co ntinuous sequen ce. Continuous images are captur ed until you release the shu tter rele ase button, or the m emory card becomes full, whiche ver comes first. The camera will capture image s as fast as it can. The captur e ra te (that is, the time be tween pictures) will vary depending on the proce ssing requir ed (for such things as the resolut ion and image quality settings) before e ach image is saved to the memory card (see the second Note on the left). The capture r ate als o depends on whether or not the fl ash is being charged between shots. If you wish to increase the captur e rate of Continuous images, you can turn the live view of Cap ture mode off by pressing the DISPLA Y button on the back of the came ra, t urn Instant Re view off thr ough the Display menu option in the Prefere nces menu of Captur e mode (see âDisplay Submenuâ on page 67), and set the flash mode to Forced Off (see âSetting the Flash Modeâ on page 10). Note: If Instant Review is on, each image in a Continu ous se quence except for the final one i s a u to ma t i c a l l y s a v e d t o th e m e m o r y c ar d b e f o re the camer a captures the next ima ge in t he sequence. If Instant Re view is off, each image is automatically saved befor e the nex t one is captured, and then the final one is saved automatical ly, as well. Also not e that , unli ke Timel apse imag es, Continuo us images ar e not grouped toge ther but are individual images. Thus , they are save d as individual images on the memory card. If Instant Review is on (see âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25). at the end of taking a Continuous sequen ce of images , the final ima ge o f t h e s e qu en c e i s di sp l ay ed i n t h e In st a nt R ev i ew on t he i ma ge L CD. Y ou can do any of the following during the Instant Review period: î Record sound that will be attached to the final image of the sequence . For information on how to do this, see âRecording Soundâ on page 26. î Delete t he final image of the sequence by pr essing the middle (De lete) soft ke y. (All of the other images in the sequen ce were alread y save d to the me mory c ard.) î Save t he final image of the sequence to th e memory card and r eturn to the Cap ture mode immediately by pressing the right (Exit) soft k ey. (All of the other images in the sequ ence wer e already saved to the memory card.) î Do nothing and, when Instant Review times out (the def ault time-out is 3 seconds), t he final image of the sequence is the n saved to the mem ory card automatically. Note: If you are unhappy with any othe r images within a Conti nuous sequence (rather than just the final image, which you can only delete during Instant Review), you can delete those images in the Review mode. T o do this, see âDel eting I magesâ o n page 32 .
Chapter 3: T aking Pictu res 21 T aking More Adva nced Pictures Shooting Timelapse Images Note: The 10-Second Timer mode is disabled for the Timelap se image type. If you are using the: î Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter re lease button with no timer mode se t Shutter r elease button with no timer mode set, press and release the shutter release button one time . Then the camera captu res the firs t image of the Timelapse sequence . î 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote 3-Second Remote timer mo de timer mo de timer mode t im e r m o d e, point the HP Re mote Control at t he camer a, and press and release the Remote C ontrolâs trig ger button one time . The timer LED on the fr ont of the camer a (see page 24) b links fast er for 3 seconds. The n the camer a cap tures th e first image of the Timelapse sequence. Note: If the interval you set for Timelapse image capture is long, the camer a may go into sleep mode (shutting off the i mage L CD) between tak ing pictur es to conserve battery powe r. Also, if you set the Timelapse interval to 15 or 30 sec and you have the File T ype set to TIFF , the camer a may skip capturing an image if it is not finished processing the pre vious image i n the Time lapse sequ ence. The settings in the Timelapse menu option of the Capture Settings menu determine the number of pictures that ar e taken and the interval between pictures in th e Timelapse sequence of images th at are captur ed. (T o change the Timelap se settings, see âTimelapse Settings S ubmenuâ on page 54.) The image L CD displays the previously captur ed image while counting down to the next image capture. The only option you have is to stop the Timelapse sequence by pres sing the right (Stop) soft k ey. If Instant Review is on (see âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25). at the end of taking a Timelapse sequen ce of images, the first image in the se quence i s displ ayed in the Ins tant Revi ew on t he imag e L CD. Y ou can do any of the following during the Instant Review period: Note: If you are unhappy with one or mor e images within a Timela pse sequence, you can delete only those images in the Review mode (rather tha n deleting all of the images in th e sequ ence d uri ng In stant Revi ew). T o d o thi s, see âDeleting Imagesâ on page 32. î Record sound that will be attach ed t o th e first image of the sequence. For information on how to do this, see âRecording Soundâ on page 26. î Delete all of the images in the sequ ence by pre ssing the middle (Delete) soft key. î Save all of the images in the sequence to the memor y card and retur n to the Captur e mode immediately by pressing the right (Exit) soft k ey. Note: Al l images in a Timela pse sequence are saved as one group on the mem ory card. î Do nothing and, when Instant Review times out (the def ault time-out is 3 seconds), all of the images in the sequence are then saved to the memor y card automatically. Whatâs Next? The following sections provide m ore information ab out various features of your camera th at you can us e whe n takin g pic tures ( such a s the zo om), or tha t provi de you with i mpo rtant feed back o n the status of your came ra while y ou are taking pictur es (such as the LEDs). Once you have read through the following sections, continue on to Chapter 4 to l earn how to view and review the images you have captured via the came raâs Playback and Review modes.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 22 Using the Z oom Lever Using the Zoom Lever While you are fr aming the subject for a picture , you will lik ely find that you need to zoom in or out on the subject. This section explains the cam eraâs z oom lever, which you can use for th is purpose. Fig ur e 8: Zoom Lev er Rocking the zoom le ver (see Figure 8) left and right moves the lens continuou sly between wide angle and telephoto focal lengths for optical zo oming. The zoom lever also controls digital zooming. Digital zooming refers to digital cropping of the image, g iving the appear ance of gr eater zoom. After the opti cal z oom is at its maxi mum s etting, you can digitally zoom in three ste ps (see below). Note, however, that you must have th e image L CD on for the digital zoom to operate. (T o turn the image LCD on, press t he DISPLA Y button on the back of the camer a.) If the image L CD is turned on and the cameraâs zoom is at the end of the tele photo range, r eleasing and pressing the zoom lever will initiate digital zooming. A digital zoom icon will appear in the text message area of the image L CDâs top overlay bar. Digital zooming occurs in three st eps: Note: In di gital zoom mode, enlar gement is accomplished without changes in the lens configuration. Since the lens is not involved in d igita l zoo m, the c han ges appe ar only in the image L CD; they ar e not evident thr ough the viewfin der. î 1.2x î 1.5x î 2x The camera p auses for 250 milliseconds (1/4 second) betwe en steps. Digital zoom remains se t shot- to-s hot, but tu rns of f when you c ycle the pow er on t he ca mera. It also t urns off an y time you exi t th e live view of Capture mode (for example , you press the MENU button on the camer a to display the Capture m ode menus, or you tu rn the camer a mode dial to set the camer a to another mode). T o exit the digital zoom, you can also press, r elease, and then re-pr ess the zoom lever in the wide angle direction. Fig ur e 9 : Diopter Control Using the Diopter C ontrol The diopter contr ol (see Figure 9) is the small dial on t he left side of the viewfinder that you can turn to adjust the focus of t he p ictur e subj ect i n the viewfinder . Note that the di opter control has n o effec t on the image you captur e , however. Note: The diopter control does not affect the captured im age itself.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 23 Understanding the LEDs on th e Camera Understanding the LEDs on the Cam era Y our camer a has sever al LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) that light solid or blink to indicate that certain actions are occurring within the camera, or partic ular problem s may have occurr ed while you wer e performing a particular task with the camera. This sec tion describes what the se LEDs are and how they behave. Viewfinder LEDs The LEDs on the right side of the viewfinder (see Figure 10) display either a green light, re d light, or both, indicating ei ther the focus status, fl ash status, a memory card problem, or that the camera is processing an image and is not re ady to tak e a picture. Figur e 10 : Viewfind er LEDs Ta b l e 6 : Viewfinder LEDs Green Red LED Function Behavior Green (T op) Indicates focus status Lights solid when the s hutter release button is pressed halfway down to indic ate that the picture is ready t o take. Blin ks w hen t he c amera c anno t foc us on the picture subject. Red (Bottom) Indicates flash status Lights solid when the s hutter release button is pressed halfway down to indic ate that the flash is char ged and rea dy to fire. Blinks when the s hutter release bu tton is pressed halfway down to indi cate that the flash is char ging. Both Indicate a memory card prob lem, or that the camer a is processi ng an image and is not re ady to tak e a pictu re In t h e e ve n t o f a f u l l or m i s si n g m em o r y ca r d , both LE Ds blink when you pr ess the shutter release bu tton halfway down. In this case, 000 will also blink on the status LCD. In t he event of a bad or unformatted mem ory card, or when the came ra is pr ocessing an image and is not ready to take a picture, both LE Ds blink when you pr ess the shutter release bu tton halfway down.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 24 Understa nding the LEDs on the Camera Timer LED Figur e 1 1: Timer LED The red timer LED on the fr ont of the camer a (see Figur e 11) lights solid and/or blinks depe nding on the timer mode you set (see âSetting the Timer Modeâ on page 11). If you set the timer mode to the: î 10-Secon d Timer setting 10-Secon d Timer setting 10-Secon d Timer setting 1 0 - S e c o n d Ti m e r s e t t i ng , when you pres s a nd release t he shutter release button, the ti mer LED lights solid for 7 seconds. It then bl inks for the final 3 seconds befor e the camer a captures the imag e. î 3-Second Remote setting 3-Second Remote setting 3-Second Remote setting 3 -S e c on d R e m o te s e t ti n g , the t imer LED blinks slowly while waiting for you to pre ss the Remote Control âs trigger button. Once you press the t rigger button, the timer LED blinks faster for 3 seconds before the c amer a captures th e image. Memory Card Access LED Figure 1 2: Memory Card Access LED The amber memory car d access LED on the back of th e camera (see Figure 12) blinks whe never the camera is r eading from or writing to the memory card. Caution: Make sure t he came ra is pow ered off any time you remove the memory card fr om the camer a. Removing the me mory card when the memory card acce ss LED is blinking could corrupt the im ages and other files on the memory card.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 25 Using In stant Review Using Instant Review The Instant Review featur e a llows you to see displayed on the image LCD either t he One Shot image, the final image of a Conti nuous image sequence , or the first image of a Timelapse sequence you just capture d. The default se tting is that Instant Review is on for 3 seconds after the One Shot imag e or the final image in a Continuous or Timelapse sequence is captur e d. Y ou can change the dur ation that the image is displayed in Instant Re view or turn Instant Review off throug h the Display menu option in the Prefer ences menu of Captu re mode. (See âDisplay Submenuâ on page 67 and âSetting t he Displayâ on page 95.) Note: When Instant Review is set to Off, the camera immediately r eturns to Captur e mode, and the captured image or sequence of images is automatically saved to the m emory card. While an image is displayed in Instant Review on the image L CD, you can do any of the following: î Record s ound that will be attached either to the One Shot image, to the final image of a Continuous seque nce, or to the first image of a Timelapse sequence (see the next section, âRecording Soundâ). î Delete the captured image(s) by pre ssing the middle (Delete) soft key. Either the One Shot image, the final image of a C ontinuous sequence , or all of t he i ma g es i n a T im e la ps e s eq ue nc e will be del eted . Note: If you are unhappy with any othe r images within a Conti nuous sequence (rather than just the final image, which you can only delete during Instant Review), you can delete those images in the Review mode. T o do this, see âDel eting I magesâ o n page 32 . Similarly, if you are unhappy with one or more images within a Timela pse sequence, you can delete only those images in the Review mode (rather tha n deleting all of the images in th e sequ ence d uri ng In stant Revi ew). T o d o thi s, see âDeleting Imagesâ on page 32. When you pre ss the Dele te soft k ey, you will be pr ompted Delete? in the top overlay bar. Y ou can pre ss either the le ft (Delet e) soft k ey to de lete the imag e(s), or th e right (Cancel ) soft k ey to cancel the delete oper ation. If you recorded sound, then th e option of deleting Sound Only is also provided for the middle soft k ey. î Save the image(s) to the memory card and r eturn to the Capture mode immediately by pr es si n g the r ight (Exit) soft ke y. Ei ther t he One Shot image, the final image of a Continuous se quence, or all of the images in a Timelapse sequ ence will be saved. î Do nothing and, when Instant Review times out (the def ault time-out is 3 seconds), the image(s ) are then saved to the memory card automatically. Ei ther the One S hot image, the final image of a Conti nuous sequ ence, or all of the images in a Timelapse sequence will b e saved.
Chapter 3: T aking Pictures 26 Recording Sound Recording Sound Note: Y ou can record up to 45 seconds of soun d per image or s eque nce of imag es. Y ou can record sou nd to attach to your images when your cam era is in Capture mode and has In st a nt Re vi e w s e t on ( se e t h e p rev i ou s sec t io n ). Du ri n g t he In s ta nt R ev ie w p e ri od , th e c am e ra re co rd s the sound and then attaches it to either the One Shot image, to the final image of a Continuous sequence, or to the first im a ge of a Ti me l a ps e s eq u en ce t ha t yo u ju st c ap t ure d . T h e s ou n d r ec or di ng capability remains active dur ing the entire Instant Revie w period. Note: The microphone is located on the fr ont of the camera. So if you are re cording your own voice, you may get better s ound quality by rotating the camer a around to f ace you. Y ou can also r ecord sound in the P layback or Review modes to attach to images. (See the second Note on the left for mor e information.) On ce y ou h av e ca p tu re d a n im ag e or s e qu en c e o f im ag e s i n Ca p tu re mo de a nd t he I ns t an t Re v ie w is displayed on the image L CD, do the following to record sound that will be attached to the image: Figure 13 : Screen During Sound Recording 1 Press the sound record b utton on the back of the camer a to activate the recor ding. A microphone icon flashes and the le ngth of the recor ding in minutes and seconds (00:00) appears in the top ove rlay bar of the image L CD (see Figure 13). 2 Record your so und (up to 45 seconds). 3 Press the sound recor d bu tton ag ain to stop the re cording . The scr een dis plays Ready i n th e top overl ay ba r, and three soft key labels in th e bott om ove rlay bar: Play , Del ete, and Exi t (f rom left to right). 4 Do any of the following: î Press the left (Play) soft k ey to play back the sound recor ded. Note: Y ou can also record sound to attach to a One Shot im age, any of the imag es in a Continuous sequence, or to the first image in a Timelaps e sequenc e of i mages a fter t he Inst ant Review perio d has finished . T o do so, you must set the c amera to eit her Pl ayback or Rev iew mode. Then select an image or sequence of images in the Playback or Review mode and follow steps 1-4 (to the right on this page) to record sou nd that will be attached to the selected image or se quence of images. î Press the middle (Delete) soft k ey to delete either the image(s) and the sound, or to de lete the sound only. î Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to immediately save the image(s) and the attached sound to the memory card. î Do nothing and allow the Instant Review to time out. In this case , the image(s) and the attached sound are autom atically saved to the m emory card.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Revi ewing Images 27 Using Playback Mode Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images Overvie w This chapter explains how to view capt ured images via the Play back mode and how to review the images via the Review mode. This chapter covers t he followin g topics: î âUsing Playback Modeâ on page 27 î â Accessing the Playback Modeâ on page 27 î âViewing Images Full Scr eenâ on page 28 î âUnderstanding the Overlay Barsâ on page 28 î âT urni ng the Overlay Bars Off and Onâ on page 28 î âZooming in on Imagesâ on page 28 î âPlaying Back Timelapse and Grou ped Imagesâ on page 28 î âCreating and Playing a Slideshowâ on page 29 î âUsing Review Modeâ on page 30 î â Accessing the Review Modeâ on page 30 î âSelecting Imagesâ on page 30 î âMarking and Unmark ing Imagesâ on page 31 î âExpanding and Collapsing Timelapse or Groupe d Imagesâ on page 31 î âDeleting Imagesâ on page 32 î âGrouping Images and Dissolving Image Groupsâ on page 33 î âProtec ting and Unprotecting Imagesâ on page 34 î âCategorizing I mages and Desel ecting Image Ca tegoriesâ on page 35 î âSearching for Images by Date and by Categoryâ on page 36 Using Playback Mode Acces sing the Playba ck Mo de Note: Y ou cannot delete images while in Playback mode. Y ou can delete images in Review mode, however. (See âDeleting Imagesâ on page 32.) T o access the Playback mode: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Playback mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already . The Playback mode scr een is displayed on the image LCD.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Revi ewing Images 28 Using Playback Mode Viewing Images Full Scr een When you first enter Playback m ode, the image L CD displays the last image saved on the memory card. T he im age a ppea rs fu ll sc reen. T o vie w a fu ll sc reen i mage o f the o ther cap tured i mag es on t he memory card, pr ess the right or left arrow on the 4-way c ontroller to scroll thr ough the images. Understanding the Overla y Bars The Playback mode displays two overlay bar s. The top overlay bar c ontains information about the image (including the image number, the date and time the image was capt ured, as well as some of the key ca mera set tings t hat w ere used to ca pture t he imag e, such as th e ima ge type and e xposure mode). The bottom ove rlay bar contains the soft k e y labels. T urning the Overlay Bars Off and On By default, bo th the top and bottom ov erlay bars are displayed in Playback mode. Howe ver, you can t urn o ne or bo th ov erla y bars off so you can se e more o f eac h imag e on t he ima ge LCD. Sim ply press the DISPLA Y button on t he back of the camer a once to tu rn both overlay bars off, a se cond time to turn the botto m one on only, and a third time to turn bot h on again. Zooming in on Images If you want to see a portion of an image in more detail, press the middle (Zoom) soft ke y. When you are zoomed in, you can use the 4-way contr oller to see differ ent parts of the im age. Y ou must then zoom out by pr essing the middle (Zoom Out ) soft k ey before m oving to a different image. Playing Back Timelapse and Grouped Images Note: Y ou can chang e the playback r a te in the Playback Rate submenu of the Play Se ttings menu. F or more information, see â Playback Rate Submenuâ on page 76. Y ou can play back sequences of Timel apse and grouped images at a pr e-defined r ate, much like a slideshow. T o play back image sequences: 1 Use the 4-way contr oller to scr oll to the Timelaps e or grouped images you want to play back. 2 Press the left (Play) s oft ke y. The images, including any sound you have attached t o them, will play back on the image L CD. 3 Press t he left (Stop) soft k ey to stop playing back your images.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Revi ewing Images 29 Using Play back Mode Creating and Playing a Slideshow Y ou can create a slide show to display your images on the image L CD or on a television scr een. Y our slideshow can incl ude all of the images on t he mem ory car d, or you can choose a single category of images to use. For mor e information on: î Categor ies, s ee âCat egorizing Images and Des electin g Image Catego riesâ o n page 35 . î Connecting your camer a to a television so that you can view a slideshow on the t elevision, see âConnecting the Camera to Y our T elevisionâ on p age 50. T o create and play a slideshow: 1 Press the MENU butt on on the back of the camera. The Slideshow option of the Play Settings menu is highlighted. 2 Press the left (Edit) soft key to go to the Slideshow submenu. 3 Change any of the settings in the Slideshow submenu, as desired. For mor e information about these settin gs, see â Slideshow Subme nuâ on page 75. 4 Press the left (Start) soft k ey to begin the slide show. 5 Y ou can stop the slideshow at any time by pressing the left (Stop) soft k ey. 6 After you have st opped the slid eshow or it has ended, press t he right (Exit) soft k ey to save the settings and exit the Slideshow menu.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 30 Using Review Mode Using Review Mode Acces sing t he Rev iew Mo de T o access the Review mode: Figur e 14: Image L CD Screen in Review Mode 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. The Review mode scree n is displayed on the image L CD (see Figure 14). The image L CD displays the im ag e s t h at ar e s a ve d o n t h e m em o ry ca rd . Th e i ma g es a pp ea r as sm a ll t hu mb na i ls a lo n g t he t op of the s creen. The small thumbnai l that has the selection marker under it is the selected image. The selecte d image is also displayed as the lar ge thumbnail on the bottom left of the scr een. Information about the sel ec ted im age (i ncl ud ing th e imag e num ber an d the d ate a nd ti me t he ima ge was c apt ur ed) appears on the bottom right of the scre en. If the selected image is a part of a grou p, the group name is also displayed. If the image was t ransmitted to this came ra fr om another camer a, and the other camer a had a camera name assigned, then the camer a name is displayed (instead of any group name). The icon bar above the image information ar ea shows whether the se lected image is a single image, a c ol l a ps ed T im el a ps e se qu e nc e of i ma ge s , o r a c o ll ap s ed gr ou p of i ma ge s . T h e i c on b ar al s o s h ow s a sound icon if sound is attached to the selected image, as wel l as a category icon if a category has been assigned to the s elected image. Selecting Images The selection mark er beneath the small thumbnail row indic ates which image is selected and is displayed as the large thu mbnail, along with its image information, at the bottom of the scre en. T o select an image, press the righ t or left arrow on the 4- way controlle r to scroll thr ough the th um b na i ls un t il t h e s el e ct i on ma r ker i s u n de r t h e i m ag e t h at y ou w an t to s el ec t . Th e s el e ct e d i m ag e is now displayed as the large thu mbnail, along with its image information, at the bottom of th e screen. Selec tion marke r Image information Thumbnails Selec ted imag e Soft k ey lab els
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 31 Using Review Mode Marking and Unmarking Images Y ou can mark sever al images so that, when you se lect an action from th e Review mode menus , that action will apply to all the mark ed images. For example , you can mark sever al images and delete them all at once, instead of having to delete one image at a time. Figu re 15: A Marked Imag e T o mar k or u nmar k all of the image s on the me mory card , pres s and hold t he le ft (M ark or Un mark ) soft k ey for 3 seconds, and then r elease it. T o mark one or more (but not all) images: 1 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the thumbnails until the selection arrow is under an image you want to mark. 2 P re s s t h e l e f t ( M a r k ) s o f t ke y . A n o t c h a p pe a r s i n t h e l o w e r r i g h t c o r n er o f t h e se l e c t e d t h u m b n a i l image (s ee Figu re 15). 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to mark additional images. T o unmark an image, scroll to the mark ed image, a nd then pres s the left (Unmark ) soft k ey. Expanding and Collap sing Timelapse or Grouped Images When yo u take Time lapse pictu res, the camera takes a seque nce of p ictures an d auto matical ly group s the captur ed im ages, usi ng the fir st captur ed image to repr esent th e seque nce. Y ou can also group individual images using the Gr oup menu option of the Review mode m enus (see âGr ouping Images and Dissolving Image Groupsâ on page 33). This section ex plains how to expand Timelapse or grouped images into the individual images, and how to collaps e them again. Figure 16: An Expanded Group T o expand Timelapse or grouped images: 1 Select the image that repr esents the Timelapse or grouped image sequ ence that you want to expand. 2 Press the right (Expand) soft k ey. Thumbnails of all the im ages in the sequence ar e displayed with links between the m (see Figur e 16). T o collapse Timelapse or grouped images: 1 Select any image in the Timelapse sequence or group you want to collapse. 2 Press the ri ght (C ollap se) s oft key. A no tch indic ates a mar ked imag e
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 32 Using Review Mode Deleting Images Y ou can delete a single image that is currently selected (whe ther it is a One Shot or Continu ous image, an individual image within an expanded Timelapse sequence, or an indivi dual image within an expanded group of images), all m arked im ages, a collapsed Timelapse seque nce of images, or a collapsed group of images fr om the memory card. T o delete images: 1 Select the ima ge o r mark th e image s you want to d elete. Note: T o mark or unmark all of the images on the memory car d, press and hold t he left (Mark or Unmark) soft k ey for 3 seconds, and then release it. If yo u want to delete one or more images (but not all the images) within a Timelapse sequence or a group of images, first follow the instructions in âEx panding and Collapsing Timelapse or Grouped Imagesâ on page 31 to expand th e Timelapse sequence or gr oup of images. Then s el ec t t h e i m a g e o r m a r k t h e i m a ge s yo u w a n t t o d e l e t e f r o m th e e x p a n d e d T i m e l a p se s eq u e n c e or group of images. Note: Protect ed i mages will not be d eleted. Se e âProtecting and Unpr otecting Imagesâ on page 34. 2 If you want to: î Delete only the curr ently selected single image, collapsed Timelapse seque nce of images, or collapse d gr oup of images, pres s the m iddle (Delete) soft k ey in the Review mo de scree n. î Delete all of the mark ed images, pre ss the MENU bu tton on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displayed, with the Delete menu option highlighted. Pr ess the middl e (Del ete) s oft key. 3 Press the left (Delete ) soft k ey again to delete the im age(s).
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 3 3 Using Review Mode Grouping Images an d Dissolving Image Gr oups Note: A g roup becom es a folder on the memory card, in which all the images in t hat group are stored. Y ou can group images to organize t hem in one folder on the mem ory card. T o group images: 1 Mark the images you wish to gr oup. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Gro up menu option. 4 Move to the Gr oup Name menu b y pressing eith er the left (Cr eate) soft k ey if there are no existing groups, or the le ft (Add) soft k ey and then the middle (C reate New) soft k ey if there are existing gr oups. Note: Group names must be eight char acters or less, and cannot contain spaces . Also, th e camera does not acce pt group name s that begin with BR or TL (regardless of language) because th ese lette rs ar e res erved. 5 Name the new group by doing the following. (See the Note on the left for restrictions on group names.) î Press the up or down arrow on the 4- way controller to scr oll to the letter you want to use. î Press the right arr ow on the 4-way control ler t o add a letter to the name , or the left arrow to dele te a l ette r. For e xample , if yo u se lect t he le tter âLâ a nd th en press the r igh t arrow on t he 4-way cont roll er, the l etter ap pears in the center o f the scr e en. Figure 17 : T wo Images in a Group 6 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to exit the Gr oup Name menu, and then press E xit again to exit the Review mode menus. Y ou are returned to the Review m ode scree n. The name of the gro up now appears in the image information for all the images in the group when each image is se lected, and the images in the group have a link icon between them (see the ex ample in Figure 17). T o dissolve (remove) the gr ouping on images: 1 Select any image included in the group you want to dissolve. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Gro up menu option. 4 Press the cent er (Dis solve) soft key to dis solve (remove) the g rouping. Note: Di ssolving a group does not delet e the images in the g roup, only the group name. 5 Pre s s t he ri g ht (E xi t ) s of t key . Y ou are re tu r ne d t o t he Re v ie w m o de sc ree n , a nd t he im ag es a re n o longer groupe d.
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 34 Using Review Mode Protec ting and Un protec ting Images Y ou can protec t images so that they wonât b e deleted accidentally. (Whe n an image is protecte d, it cannot be deleted fr om the mem ory card.) T o protect images: Figur e 18: A Protected Im age 1 S elect an image or mark the images you want to protect. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Pro tect menu option. 4 Press the center (Protec t) soft k ey. Y ou are returned to the R eview mode scree n, and a Protect icon a ppears in the i mage i nformatio n for the prote cted im age(s) (see Fi gure 18) . T o remove protection from (unpr otect) images: 1 Select an image or mark the images you want to unprotect. 2 Press the ME NU bu tton . 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Pro tect menu option. 4 Press the left (Unpr otect) soft k ey. Y ou are returned to the R eview mode scr een, and there is no longer a Protect icon in th e image information for the image(s). Protect icon
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 35 Using Review Mode Categorizing Images and Deselect ing Image Categories Y ou can assign a category to your images to mak e them easier to find and organize. Y ou can also play a slideshow of a category of images very easily. Y ou can eith er categ orize one im age at a time, or mark a numbe r of them and apply one catego ry to all of the marked images. T o categorize one or more images: 1 Select or mark the imag e(s) you wish to categ orize. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. Figure 19 : A Categorized Image 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Categorize menu option. 4 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey to move to the Categories sub menu. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4-way controller to scr oll to th e category you want to assign to the image(s). 6 Press the left (Select) soft k ey. A che ckmark appear s n ext to t hat cate gory, and you a re r eturned to th e Re v ie w m o de sc re en . A n ic o n r ep re se nt i ng th e ca te g or y y o u a ss i gn ed t o t h e i ma g e( s ) n ow appears in the image information for the se lected image(s) (see Figur e 19). T o deselect an imageâs category: 1 Selec t the image whose catego ry you want t o desel ect. 2 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to the Categorize menu option. 4 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey to move to the Categories sub menu. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4- way controlle r to scroll to the category you want to deselect. 6 Press the left (Deselect) soft k ey. Y ou are r eturned to the Re view mode screen, and the cat egory icon is no longer in the image information for the selected image. Categor y icon
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 36 Using Review Mode Searching for Imag es by Date and by Category Figure 2 0: Find By Date Y ou can use the Find me nu in Review mode to sear ch for images by date or by category . For m ore information on categories, see âCategorizing Images and Deselecting Image Cate goriesâ on page 35. T o search for images b y date: 1 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 2 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller to scr oll to the Find menu. 3 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey. Fig ure 21: Res ults of a Find by Date Operation 4 Enter the r ange of dates you want the cam era to u se to searc h for images (see Figure 20 ).: î Press the right arrow of the 4-way contr oller to scrol l to the month, day, and year fiel ds. î Press the up and down arrows to ch ange the month, day, and year. 5 Pre s s t he l ef t ( F in d) s of t key. T he re su lt s of y our s ea rc h app e ar on t he i ma ge LCD ( s ee Fi g ure 2 1) . Not ice th e Fin d ico n at t he bo ttom righ t of the scree n, wh ich indi cate s that the disp layed ima ges are the res ult o f a Fin d ope ration. 6 Press the arro ws on the 4-way con tro ller to scr oll thr ough the images. When you a re done, pr ess the center (Show All) soft key to resume viewing all the images stored on the memory car d. Note: I f th ere are n o ima ges with in th e range o f dates that you sp ecified, the im age L CD displays the message: âNo images m atched search criteria.â In this case, you can ei ther press the middle (Show All) soft k ey to r esume viewing all images stored on the mem ory card, or press the le ft (Find) soft k ey to select a new ran ge o f da t es . Find icon
Chapter 4: Viewing and Reviewing Images 37 Using Review Mode T o search for images b y catego ry: 1 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Edit menu of Review mode is displa yed. 2 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller to scr oll to the Find menu. 3 Press the down arrow on the 4- way controller to sc roll to By Category. 4 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4- way controller to sc roll to the category you want to view. 6 Press t he left (Se lect) soft k ey. The results of your sear ch appear on the image L CD. Notice th e Find icon at the bottom right of the screen, which indicates that the display ed images are the result of a Find oper a tion. 7 Press the arr ows on the 4-w ay contr oller to scr oll through the images. When you a re done, pr ess the center (Show All) soft key to resume viewing all the images stored on the memory car d.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 38 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer Chapter 5: Sharing Images Overvie w Y ou can use the images you capt ure with your camer a in many fun and creative ways. Y ou can transf er th em t o your com puter for use i n crea tiv e proje cts, or f or s hari ng wi th fa mily and f rien ds vi a the Internet. If you have a printer that supports the HP JetSend infr ared technology, you can use JetSend for wireless printing of your images. Y ou can even connect the camer a to your television to view a slideshow of your images on the television. This chapter covers t he followin g topics: î âT ransferring Images to Y our Computerâ on page 38 î âUsing a Digital Print Order F ormat (DPOF) Fileâ on page 44 î âJetSending Images to a Printerâ on page 46 î âT ransmitting Images Between T wo Camerasâ on page 48 î âConnecting the Camera to Y our T elevisionâ on p age 50 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer Caution: Be aware that any sound (namely, sound tags and other EXIF tags) you have captured and attached t o images with your camera may not b e supported and may be lost i f y o u u s e i ma ge ed i t i n g s o f t w a r e o t h er th a n th e HP Photo Imaging Software with the images on your comp uter. Y ou can transfe r images to your computer when the camer a is set to PC Co nnect mode. The PC Conn ect Mode subme nu of the P referenc es menu let s you spe cify how the cam era will app ear to yo ur co mp ut e r whe n co nn e ct e d vi a the USB int er fa c e. Y ou can set th e ca me ra to one of the fo l lo w in g settings in the PC Connect M ode submenu depending on the op erating system that is running on your comp uter: PC Co nnect Mod e PC Co nnect Mod e PC Co nnect Mod e PC Connect Mode How Imag es ar e Transferr ed How Im ages are T ransf erred How Im ages are T ransf erred How Images are Transferred Operating Systems Operating System s Operating System s Operating System s Digita TM Devi ce (default) Y ou can use s oftware included with y our compute r or camera to transfer im ages to the co mputer. Windows ® Me, 98 , and 2000 USB Disk Drive The camer a is operat ed as a USB Mass Stor age Device an d appear s as a disk drive con nected t o your comp uter. So you can copy images from your c amera to the compu ter a s yo u woul d from another disk drive. Mac® OS 8. 6 or better, and Wind ows Me, 98, and 2000
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 39 T ransferring Images to Y our Comp uter The one ex ception is Windows N T 4.0, because it does not support the USB interf ace . A Windows NT 4.0 computer mu st have either an HP P1000 /1100 or similar printer, or a memory card re ader conn ecte d to its seri al o r pa rallel int erfa ce. Y ou c an t hen t ransfe r im age s from t he c ameraâ s memo ry card to the compu ter via either the memory car d slot in the HP printer, or the me mory card r eader. The foll owing three subsect ions explain how to tra nsfer ima ges to a comput er dep ending on th e PC Connect Mode setting on the came ra and/or the op erating sys tem that is running on the computer: î T o use the Digita Device setting to trans fer images from your came ra to a Windows Me, 98, or 2000 computer, see t he first subsection be low. î T o use the USB Disk Drive setting to transfer images fr om your camera to either a Macintosh® computer running Mac OS 8 .6 or better , or a Windows Me, 98, or 2000 compu ter, see the subsection on pa ge 41. î T o trans fer imag es from the mem ory c ard to a Windo ws NT 4.0 co mput er, se e the subs ect ion on page 43. Note: If you have a Windows 98 or 2000 computer, it is assum ed in this subsection that you have already followed the HP 6 18 Digital Camera Quick Start Guide to install the HP Photo Imaging Software on your computer. T ransferring Images Using the Digit a Device Setting If your computer is running Windows Me, 98, or 2000, you can tr a nsfer images from your camera to the computer by us ing the defaul t Digita Device setting in the PC Connect Mode sub menu. If your camera is running: î Windows Me Windows Me Windows Me Wi n d o ws M e, you can then use the Microsoft® Scanner and Camera Wizard that is included on your Windows Me system to transfe r the images from the came ra to your computer. Figu re 2 2: Connec tors on the USB Cable î Windows 98 or 2000 Windows 98 or 2000 Windows 98 or 2000 Windows 98 or 2000, y o u c an th en us e th e H P Ph ot o Im ag in g S o ft wa r e th at c am e wi th yo ur camera to tr ansfer the images from the camer a to your compute r. T o transfer images to your Windows Me, 98, or 2000 computer, do the following: 1 Power off the camer a if it is still on. 2 Power on the computer if y ou havenât already. 3 Connect the rect angular end of the USB cable to the USB port on the front or back exterior of your computer (see F igure 22). To C o m p u t e r To C a m e r a
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 40 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer Figur e 23: Connecti ng the U SB Cabl e to the Camera 4 Open the door to the cameraâs connector compartme nt and connect the square en d of the USB cable to the bottom (USB) connector (see Figure 23). 5 Set the camer a to PC Connect mode . 6 Power on the camera. Within a few se conds, you r compu ter dete cts the camer a on t he US B port. What happens next depends on what ve rsion of Windows your computer is running: Windows Me Windows Me Windows Me Windows Me Your computer runs the Microsoft Scanner and Camera Wizard. Follow the pr ompts in the Wizar d to copy the images to your computer. Windows 9 8 Windows 9 8 Windows 9 8 Windows 9 8 or 2000 or 2000 or 2000 or 2000 The main window of the HP Photo Imaging Software opens. Do the following: 1. C l i c k Unload Camera Unload C amera Unload C amera Unload C amera i n t he m ai n win do w. 2. Click the St a r t Sta rt Sta rt St a r t but ton in th e Unload Images window. The images are copied to your computer.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 41 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer T ransferring Images Using the USB Disk Drive Setting If your computer is running either Macintosh OS 8.6 or better, or Windows Me, 98, or 2000, you can transfe r images from your camer a to the computer by using the USB Disk Drive setting in the PC Connect Mode submenu. In so doing, the camera will oper ate as a USB Mass S torage Device and appear as a disk drive connect ed to your com puter. Y ou can then copy images fr om your camera to the computer as you woul d from another disk drive. The following two sub sections explain how. Setting the USB Disk Drive Mode on the Came ra Note: If you have a Macintosh computer and have already followed the instru ctions in the HP 618 Di gital Came ra Quick Start Guide t o set the USB Disk Drive mode on your camera, s kip these instructions and go on to âUsing Y our Camera as a USB Mass Storage Device to T ransfer Imagesâ on page 42. Y ou must fir st set your camera to USB Disk Dr ive mode as follows: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Capture mode menus are displayed on the imag e LCD. 4 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller thr ee times to move to the Pr eferences m enu. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4- way controlle r three time s to move to the PC Connect Mode menu option. 6 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey. The PC Connect Mode submenu is displayed, and the USB Disk Drive option is highlighted. 7 Press the left (Select) soft k ey. The checkmark mo ves to the USB Disk Drive option, and you retur n to the Prefer ences menu of Capture mode. Th e camera is now set to USB Disk Drive mode. 8 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to exit the menu. 9 Power off the cam era by using the camer aâs power switch. The USB Disk Drive mode will remain set on your camera only if you power off the camera b y using the power swi tch. By poweri ng off the c amera correct ly, you w ill not have to r epeat t he pre v io u s pro ce d ur es wh en tran s fe rr i ng im ag es to you r co m pu te r via the US B Di s k Dr iv e mod e in the future .
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 42 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer Using Y our Camera as a USB M ass Storage Device to T ransfer Images Note: S oftware for Macintosh computers was included with your c amer a. If you wish, you can use this software to tr ansfer images to your Macintosh, instead of the pr ocedures her e. This software also provides tools for editing images and using them in creative pr ojects. Once your cam era is set to USB Disk Drive mode, y ou can tr ansfer images to either your Macintosh OS 8.6 or better computer, or your Windows Me, 98, or 20 00 computer, by doing the following: 1 Power on the computer if you havenât already. 2 Connect the rect angular end of the USB cable to the USB port on either your Macintosh computerâs k eyboard, or to the fr ont or back exterior of y our Windows compu ter (see Figur e 24). Figure 24 : Connectors on the USB Cable 3 Open the door to the cameraâs connector compartme nt and connect the square en d of the USB cable to the bottom (USB) connector (see Figure 25). 4 Set the camer a mode dial to PC Connect mode . 5 Power on the camer a. If you have a: î Macintosh computer, an icon labeled âUntitledâ appears on your com puterâs desktop. The camera is now view ed by your Macintosh as a new disk drive. î A Windows computer, the camer a appears as a r emovable disk drive connected to y our computer under th e My Computer folder in Windows Explorer. If you have a Windows 98 or 2000 computer and have installed the HP Photo Imaging Software on your computer (by following the instructions in the HP 61 8 Dig ital Camer a Quick Start Guide ), th en the ma i n wi nd o w of th e HP Pho t o Im a gi n g So ft w are al so op en s . Y o u can either follow step 6 below t o copy the image files fr om the camer a to the computer in Windows Explorer, or you can use the HP Photo Imaging Software to transfer the images. Fig ur e 25: Connecting the USB Cable to the Camer a 6 Cop y th e imag e fi les f rom the disk driv e (th e cam era) to t he har d dri ve of y our compu ter as you would from a floppy disk. To M a c i n t o s h Ke y b o a r d To C a m e r a or W in dows Comput er
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 43 T ransferring Images to Y our Computer T ransferring Images from a Memory Car d to a Windows NT 4.0 Computer Note: It is assumed in this subsection that you have already followed the HP 6 18 Digital Camera Quick Start Guide to install the HP Photo Imaging Software on your computer. T o transfer images to your Windows NT 4.0 comp uter, you must have either an HP printer (such as the HP P1000/1100 ) that has a slot for reading a me mory card, or a memory car d reade r connected to the computerâs serial or para llel interfac e. (This is because Windows NT 4.0 does not support the USB interface.) Y ou can then transfer images from the camer aâs memory card to your computer via either the HP printe râs memory card sl ot, or the memory c ard re ader. If you are us ing an HP pr inter that has a memory car d slot If you are us ing an HP pr inter that has a memory car d slot If you are us ing an HP pr inter that has a memory car d slot If you are us ing an HP pr inter that has a memory car d slot, r ef er t o the pr int erâ s d oc um en t at ion to tr ansfer images from th e memory card to your W indows NT 4.0 computer via the printe râs memory card sl ot. If you are us ing a memory car d reader If you are us ing a memory car d reader If you are us ing a memory car d reader If you are us ing a memory car d reader , tr ans f e r ima ges fr om th e m emo ry c ar d t o y our W in dow s NT 4.0 computer as foll ows: 1 Power off the camer a if it is still on. 2 Remove the memory car d from the came ra. T o do this, open the memory card door and pr ess th e m e mor y ca rd re le as e bu tt o n t o e j ec t t he ca rd . Gra sp th e ca rd by it s s i de e dg es an d p u ll i t o ut of the slot. 3 Insert the memory car d into the memory car d slot in the memory car d reader. 4 Power on the computer if you havenât alre ady. 5 Double-click the HP Photo Imaging Softwar e icon on th e Windows desktop. T he main window of the HP Photo Imaging Software opens. 6 Click U n l o a d C a m e r a Unload Camera Unload Camera Un l o a d C a me r a in the mai n window. Because no USB camera is found, the software displays a dialog box in which you can select the drive letter for your memory car d reader. 7 Select the drive letter (such as H : H: H: H :) for your memory card reader in the dialog bo x. 8 Click the St a r t Start Start St a r t b utton in the Unload Image s window. Th e images are copied to your computer.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 44 Using a Digi tal Print Order F ormat (DPOF) File Using a Digital Print Order F ormat (DPOF) File A DPOF file is a file you cre ate using your camer a that allows you to pre-sele ct which images you want to print. The file is stor ed on the memory card and contains information about which images ar e s el e ct e d, ho w ma ny of e ac h i m ag e is t o b e p r in te d, a nd a t w ha t si z e t o p r in t e a ch o f t he m . T he f il e is used by s elected HP printers an d other printing devices that can re ad a DPOF file direc tly fr om the memory card. Note: If you delete an image that is reference d in a DPOF file on the memory card, you must erase and t hen re-create the DPOF file before you can print images via the DPOF file. Creating a DPOF File T o create a DPOF file: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Either select one image or mark m ultiple images in the Revie w mode screen that you want to include in the DP OF file. (See â Selecting Imagesâ on page 30 and âMarking and Unmarking Imagesâ on page 31 for more information.) 4 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Review mode menu s are displayed. 5 Press the right arr ow on the 4-way controller once to mo ve to the Print Order F orm menu. Note: For more informati on on the Print Or der Form menu, see page 81. 6 Press the left (Add) soft ke y to select the highlighted Add Images m enu option. The Add to Order submenu is displayed. 7 Use the arrows on the 4-way contr oller to specify the number of Copies you want of t he selected or mark ed images, as well as the Size you want them printed. The Size settings include: î Standard (default ) â One of the standard print s izes. Y ou specify the exact size you want your Standard prints to be at the printer. For exa mple, you can specify that all Standard images be printe d at 4â x 6â. î Index â Thumbnails of the images. 8 Press the left (Add) soft key t o save the settings and return to th e Print Order F orm menu.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 45 Using a Digital Print Order F ormat (DPOF) File Viewing a DPOF File T o vi ew a DPOF file, do the following while in the Print Or der Form m enu: 1 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to highlight the View Or der menu option. 2 Press the left (Select) soft k ey. The Print Order For m screen is displayed, which lists the contents of the DPOF file. Y ou can scroll thr ough this list using the up and down arrows on the 4-way controller. However , you cannot edit this list. Era sing a DPOF File T o erase a DPOF file, do the following while in the Print Or der F orm menu: 1 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to highlight the Erase Orde r menu option. 2 Press the left (Er ase) soft k ey. Y ou will see a confir mation of yo ur c hoice to er ase al l e ntries from the Print Or der Form. 3 Press the middle (Erase) soft k ey to erase all of the entries from the Print Order F orm.
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 46 JetSending Images to a Printer JetSending Images to a Printer HP JetSend allows for easy, wireless printing. If your printer supports the HP JetSend infrared t ec h n o l o g y , y o u c a n t ra n s f e r y o u r i m a g e s d i re c t l y f r o m t h e c am e r a t o t h e p r i n t er wi th o u t co n n e c t i n g any cables. See your printerâs documentation for more information. Note: It will take an average of 20 seconds to JetSend an image from the camer a to a printer. There are two different ways you can JetSend images to a printer. Y ou can use the Send button on the back of the camera to JetSend only the curr ent image in the Capture, Playback, or Review mode to a printer. Or you can use the T ransmit menu in Review mode to JetSend the current image or all mark ed images to a printer. Each of these methods is expl ained in the following subsections. Using the Send Button to JetSen d Only the Current Image T o JetSend only the curr ent image to a JetSend-capable printer: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to either Capture , Playback , or Review mode. 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 If you are in: î Capture m ode, you will automatically be JetSending the last image you capt ured. Y ou do not need to do anything to select the image. î Playback or Review mode , press the right or left arr ow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll through your images in the Playback or Review mode scr een until the image you w ant to transfer is displayed or se lected. 4 Set your printer to receive images to print. See your printerâs docum entation for details. F igu re 26: Infrared Window on the Ca mer a 5 Aim the cameraâs infr ared window (see Figure 26) at the printerâs infr ared sensor, and place the camera about 10 inches away fr om the printer. 6 Press the Send button on t he back of th e camer a. The camer a immediately st arts a JetSend session, searches for a com patible printer, and s ends the curre nt image to the printer. (If the current ima ge is actually a collapsed Timelapse sequence or group of images, only the first image of the sequenc e or group is sent.) During the tr ansfer, the image L CD reads: âSending 1 image.. .â and shows a pr ogress bar. Y ou can cancel the transfer at any time by pressing the cente r (Stop) soft ke y on the camera. A confirmation screen will display to show that the Send was successful. 7 Press the right (Done) soft k ey when you have finished tr ansmitting images to the printer.
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 47 JetSending Images to a Printer Using the T ransmit Menu to JetSen d the Current or All Mark ed Images T o JetSend the current image or all mark ed images to a JetSend-capable printer: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Either select one image or mark m ultiple images in the Revie w mode screen that you want to JetS end. (See âSel ecti ng I mages â on page 30 an d âMa rkin g and Unmar kin g Ima gesâ on pag e 3 1 for more information.) 4 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Review mode menu s are displayed. 5 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller two times to move to the T ransmit menu. 6 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to highlight the C amera-Pr inter menu option. 7 Set your printer to receive images to print. See your printerâs documentation for details. 8 Aim t he came raâs infrared window (see Figure 26 on page 46) at the printerâs infr ared sensor, and place the came ra about 10 inches away from the p rinter. 9 Press the left (Se nd) soft k e y on the cam era. The camer a i mmediately starts a JetSend session, searches for a comp atible printer, and sends the cur rent or all m arked images to the printer. During the tr ansfer, the image L CD reads: âSending X image(s).. .â and shows a progress bar. Y ou can cancel the transfer at any time by pressing the middle (Stop) soft k ey on the camera. A confirmation screen will display to show that the Send was successful. 10 Press the right (Done) soft k ey when you have finished tr ansmitting images to the p rinter.
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 48 T ransmitting Images Between T wo Ca meras T ransmitti ng Images Between T wo Camer as Y ou can use the Camer a-Camera option in the T ransmit menu of Review mode to send images fr om your camer a to another camer a, or to receive images fr om another camera. The other camer a must use the standard Digita tr ansmit protocol. See the other camer aâs documentation for details. Sending Images to Another Ca mera T o send the current image or all marked images to another Digita camera: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Either select one image or mark m ultiple images in the Revie w mode screen that you want to send to the other camera. (See âSelecting Imagesâ on page 30 and âMarking and Unmarking Imagesâ on page 31 for more information.) 4 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Review mode menu s are displayed. 5 Press the right arrow on the 4-way controller tw o times to move to t he T ransmit menu. The Camera-Camera menu option is highlighted. 6 Press t he left (Sen d) soft k e y on your cam era. Y our camer a âs image L CD reads: âReceiving Camera Ready ?â 7 Set the other camera to rec eive images. See the other camer aâs documentation for details. 8 Aim your camer aâs infrared window (see Figure 26 on page 46) at the other camer aâ s infrare d sensor, and set th e camera s about 10 inches apart . 9 Press the left (Continue) soft k ey on your camera. Y our camer a immediately searches for another compatible camera and begins to transmit images to the other camera. During the tr ansfer, the image L CD reads: âSending X image(s).. .â and shows a progress bar. Y ou can cancel the transfer at any time by pressing the middle (Stop) soft k ey on your camer a. A confirmation screen will display to show that the transfer was successful. 10 Press the ri ght (D one) s oft key wh en you have finish ed transmit ting i mages to t he othe r ca mera.
Chapter 5: Sh aring Images 49 T ransmitting Ima ges Between T wo Cameras Receiving Images fr om Another Camer a T o receive images from another Digita camera: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Review mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Review mode menu s are displayed. 4 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller two times to move to the T ransm it menu. The Camera-Camera menu option is highlighted. 5 Press the middle (Receive) soft k ey on your came ra. 6 Set the other camer a to send images. See the other camer aâs documentation for details. 7 Aim your cameraâs infrared window (see Figure 26 on page 46) at the other camer aâ s infrared sensor, and set th e camera s about 10 inches apart . 8 Send the images fr om the other camer a. See the other camer aâs documentation for details. 9 Press the right (Done) soft k ey when your camer a has received all of the images.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 50 Connecting the Camera to Y ou r T elevision Connecting the Camer a to Y our T elevisi on Note: Y our camera comes with a 6 ft. audio/ video cable, which you can use to connect the camera to a television. When the camer a i s connected to a television, the television functions the same as the camer aâs image L CD. Y ou can use your television to view a slideshow, making it easy to shar e your images with family and friends. Selecting the Cameraâs Video Output F ormat Before you connect the camera to the television, you need to select t he cameraâs video ou tput format. The format that you choose (NTSC or PAL) depends on your televisionâs video input format: î NTSC is the video connection standard used in the United States and Japan. î P AL is the video connection standard used in Europ e. Note: R efer to y our t elev isionâ s or VCRâs documentation for mor e information about the video input format. T o select the video output format for the camer a: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Playback mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the b ack of the camer a. 4 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll to Video. 5 Press the left (Edit) soft k ey. 6 Press t he right or le ft arrows on the 4-way contr o ller to sele ct NTSC or P AL in the Video Preferen ces subme nu. Making the Con nection T o connect the camera to t he television: 1 Connect the video input end of the audio/video cable into your television: î If you are using an NTSC connection, plug the video input (yellow) end of the a udio/video cable into your tele visionâs video input connector (on most televisions, th is is also yellow). Note: S ee your t elevisionâs documentation for specific instructions on how to locate the video input connector, and how to set the video input. î If you are using a P A L connection, plug the video input (yellow) end of the audio video cable into your televis ionâs video input connector. On older television sets, plug the video cable into a SC ART adapter (pu rchased se parate ly), then plug the adapter into y our televisionâs video input connector.
Chapter 5: Sharing Images 51 Connecting the Camera to Y ou r T elevision Note: T o conserve battery power, you may want to use an HP-appro ved AC power adapter to power the camer a while you have it connected to a television. 2 Connect the audio input (red) end of the audio/video cable into the televisionâs audio input connector. This will allow you to hear sound that you rec orded and attached to your images. 3 Plug the other end of the video cab le into the camer a (see Figure 27). Figure 27: Connecting the Video Cable to the Came ra 4 On the television, set the video input to be t he video input connector where you connected the camer a. Viewing Images on the T elevision When the camer a i s connected to a television, you can play or r eview your images on the te levision screen just as you would on the camer aâs imag e L CD. Y ou can also mark, protect, categorize, group , or delet e image s, or creat e a slides how. T o vi ew images on a television: 1 T urn on the television and select the video input. See y our televisionâs documentation for specific instructions on how to select the video input. 2 Set the camer a mode dial to either Playback mode o r Review mode . Note: When the camera is connected t o a televis ion, the im age L CD turns off. 3 View your images on the tele vision using either Playback or Review m ode. The television functions the same as the came raâs image L CD. Y ou can use the buttons on the 4-way controller to scroll th rough your images, or p ress the MENU button on the back of th e camera to use th e camera men us on y our t elevis ionâs s creen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 52 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Chapter 6: Menu and S oft K ey Reference Overvie w Note: Up dates for your cameraâs firmware are posted from time -to-time on the HP web site at: www.hp.co m/photosmart www.hp.co m/photosmart www.hp.com/ photosmart ww w .h p . c om / p ho t o sm a r t . Y ou can i nstall these updates on your camer a so that you can always have the m ost current functionality running on it. This chapter contains a refer e nce to all of the menus and soft k eys you can use to mak e or adjust settings on your c amera. This chapter is divided into t hree main sections, which correlate to the thre e camera modes that have menus and soft k eys: î âCapture Mode Menus and Soft K eysâ on page 52 î âPlayback Mode Menu and Soft K eysâ on page 74 î âReview Mode Menu s and Soft K eysâ on page 78 Note: The PC Connect mode does not h ave any menus or soft k e ys; thus, that mode is not included in this chapter . Capture Mode Menus and Soft K eys T o a ccess the Cap ture mode men us and related soft k eys, turn the camera mode dial to Captur e mode and press the MENU but ton on the back of the camera. Y ou can choose options and settings from four Captur e mode menus: î âCapture Settings Menuâ on page 52 î âPhoto Assist Menuâ on page 55 î âImage Stamp Menuâ on page 62 î âPrefer ences M enuâ on page 66 Capture Settings Menu Figu re 28: Capture Settings Menu Use the Capture Settings me nu to specify character istics of how to capture each image. Ta b l e 7 : C apture Settings Soft Keys Soft K ey Function Edit Opens submenu associated with se lected menu opt ion. Exit Exits this me nu and returns the came ra t o Captur e mode.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 53 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys File Setti ngs Subm enu Note: All options you set ar e active fr om shot- to-shot; they also re main set when you cycle the power on the came ra. Use the File Sett ings submen u to set how your pictur es will be captur ed for all image types (One Shot, Continuous, and Timelapse). Figure 29: File Settings Submenu - JPEG Ta b l e 8 : File Setti ngs S ubmenu Fig ur e 30: File Settings Subme nu - TIFF Note: TIFF is an uncompressed file type used w h e n y o u n e e d t h e a b s o l u t e b e s t i m a g e q u a l i t y . Becaus e TIFF file siz e is v ery l arge, it may take up to 50 seconds to save the image. Setting Defaul t Options File T ype JPEG JPEG, TIFF Quality Level (Speci fies JP EG compression level and does not apply to TIFF images.) Bette r Good - Produ ces quality images and u ses less me mory than the B etter setting (us es the h ighest com pression rate). U se this s etting for i mages you plan to use on a comp uter, or t o print pho tos of up to 4â x 6â. Better - Produce s h igh-q uali ty im ages and uses les s memo ry t han the Best s etting ( uses a m edium compressio n rate). Use this s etting fo r images you plan to print photos of up to 5â x 7 â. Best - Produce s the highe st-qua lity im ages a nd uses the mos t memo ry (uses the lowest c ompression rat e). Use this sett ing for images you plan to enla rge and print pho tos of up to 8â x 10â. Resolution Full Size Full Size (1600 x 1200 pixels) 1/4 ( 800 x 600 pixe ls) Color Full Full, B& W, Sepia
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 54 C apture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Note: âStora ge Capacities of Memory Cardsâ on page 109 lists the numbe r of images an 8 MB, 16 MB, and 32 MB memory card can stor e, depending on the JPEG quality level or TIFF setting at which the came ra is set. Ta b l e 9 : File Settings Soft K eys Timelaps e Setting s Submen u Note: All options you set ar e active fr om shot- to-shot; they also re main set when you cycle the power on the came ra. Use the Timelapse Sett ings submenu to s pecify the number and inter val of images in a timelaps e sequence. Figur e 31: Timelapse Setting s Submenu Ta b l e 1 0 : Timel apse Settin gs Submenu Note: If you select more # Images than t here is space on the memory card, you will see the error mess age âNot enough memoryâ on the overlay bar. Ta b l e 1 1 : Timela pse Sett ings Soft K eys Soft K ey Func tion Default Returns all settings on screen to their defaults . Exit Saves th e setti ngs, exi ts this s ub m e n u, a n d re tu r n s t he c a m e ra t o the C aptu re S ettin gs me nu. Setting Default Options # Image s 2 2-1,000 Interval 15 seconds Seconds - 15 sec, 30 sec Minu tes - 1 min, 2 min, 3 min , 4 mi n, 5 m in, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 50 min Hours - 1 hr, 2 hr, 3 hr, 4 hr, 8 hr, 12 hr, 24 hr Soft K ey Function Default Returns all settings on screen to their defa ults. Exit Saves the settings, exi ts this su bm en u, a nd ret ur ns th e c ame ra to the Captu re Settin gs me nu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 55 C apture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Photo Assist Menu Use the Ph oto Assist menu to manipulate the se more advance d camera operations: Fig ur e 3 2: Photo Assist Menu î Exposur e î EV Compensation î White Balance î Foc us î AE Metering î ISO Speed Ta b l e 1 2 : Photo Assist Soft K e ys Soft K ey Function Edit Ope ns submenu associa ted with highl ight ed men u o ption. Exit Exits this menu and returns th e camera to Capture mode.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 56 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Exposure Mode Submenu Use th e Exp osure Mo de su bmenu to sel ect h ow the c amera ca lcul ates ex pos ure. Y o u can s elect from these setting opti ons: Figur e 33 : Exposur e Mode Submenu î Auto Auto Au to Auto (D e fa ul t ) â All exposure settings are at their def aults and cannot be changed. î Landsc ape P rogram Landsc ape P rogram Landsc ape P rogram Landsc ape P rogram â Automatically optimizes the came ra set tings for taking pictures of distant subject s, such as landsc ape scenes . î Portra it Pr ogram Portra it Pr ogram Portra it Pr ogram Portra it Pr ogram â Automatically optimizes the camera set tings for portrait ph otography. î Actio n Program Actio n Program Action P rogram Actio n Program â Automatically optimizes the camer a settings for taking pictures of subjects in action, such as people playing sports. î Apertur e Priority (Av) Apertur e Priority (Av) Apertur e Priority (Av) Apertur e Priority (Av) â Lets you select an aperture, and th e camera automatically sele cts the shutter sp eed. î Shutter Priority (Tv) Shutter Priority (Tv) Shutter Priority (Tv) Shutter Priority (Tv) â Lets you sele ct a shutter spee d, and the camer a automatically sele cts the ape rture settin g. If you select Landscape Progr a m, Portrait Pr og ram, Action Progr am, or Shutter Priority exposur e modes, then the ISO Speed submenu options will be gr ayed-out as soon as you exit the Exposure Mode submenu. Lik ewise, i f you change the exposur e mode from Landscape Progra m, Portr ait Progr am, Action Progr am, or Shutter Priority to either Auto or Apertur e Priority (Av) exposure m ode, then the ISO Speed options will become available as soon as you exit the Exposure Mode submenu. After you set the ex posure m ode to Apert ure Priority (Av) or Shutt er Priority (T v) and exit the submenu, the live vie w of Capture mode will turn on automatically. Y ou can then use the 4-way co nt ro ll e r t o ad ju s t t h e a pe rt u re va l ue (i f in A v mo d e) o r s hu tt e r s p ee d (i f i n Tv mo d e) by p re ss in g th e up a nd do w n a rr o ws (s e e b el o w) . If t he c am era c an n ot pr op er l y e x po se b ec a us e t h e p i ct ur e s u bj ec t is o u t o f ra n g e , a s i n v e r y b r i g h t o r v e r y d ar k s c en e s , t h e t e x t s t r i n g ( s u c h a s A v F 5 . 6 1 / 1 5 0 0 ) w i l l t u r n re d in the top overl ay bar of liv e vie w. If you tur n the i mage L CD of f, the ex posu re mode will not ch ange , but you will be u nable to adjust the ape rture value or shutter spe ed with the 4-way contr oller. When you set the exposur e mode to Aperture Priority (Av) and live view is on, press ing the up and down arrows on the 4-way cont roller will p erform these speci fic functions: î Up a rrow â stops down the aperture (toward higher f-num bers) î Down arrow â stops up the apertur e (toward lower f-numbe rs) When you set the exposur e mode to Shutter Priority (T v) and live view is on, pressing the up and down arrows on the 4-way cont roller will p erform these speci fic functions: î Up a rrow â decreases toward sh orter shutte r speeds î Down arrow â increases toward f aster shutt er speeds
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 57 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Ta b l e 1 3 : Exposure M ode Soft K eys EV Compen sation Submenu Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Use the EV (Expos ure V alue) Compensation subme nu to manually adjust the exposur e in 0.5 EV increments ( - values for dark er images, values for lighter images). Y ou can select from these optio ns: Figure 34 : EV Compe nsat ion Sub menu î -2.0 î -1.5 î -1.0 î -0.5 î 0 (Def ault) î 0.5 î 1.0 î 1.5 î 2.0 Ta b l e 1 4 : EV Compe nsatio n Soft K eys Soft Ke y Function Select Plac es a checkm ark b y the highlighted setting, then returns to the Photo Assist menu. Exit Return s to the P hoto A ssist me nu without changing the set ting. Soft Ke y Function Default Sets th e exposure compensa tion to the d efault va lue. Exit Saves the settin g and ret urns to the Photo Assist menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 58 Capture Mode Menus a nd Soft K eys White B alance Submen u Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Use the Wh ite Balance submenu to corr ect the color applied to a captured image unde r different lighting conditions in order to mak e white areas in the image appear white without any color cast. Y ou can select from these settin g options: Figu re 3 5: White Balance Submenu î Auto Auto Au to Auto (D e fa ul t ) â Use when you want the camer a to automatically sense the lighting conditions and adjust the white balance appr opriately for optim um color repr oduction in the image. î Daylight Daylight Daylight Daylight â Use when you are taking a picture in daylight without artificial lighting. î Tun gs te n Tun gs te n Tun gs te n Tun gs te n â Use when you are taking a pictur e under normal incandesce nt lighting, such as the light from tungsten filame nt light bulbs in household l amps. î Fluorescent Fluorescent Fluorescent Fluorescent â Use when you are tak ing a picture under fluore scent lighting. Ta b l e 1 5 : White Balance Soft K eys Soft Key Function Select Places a check mark by the selected setting, t hen returns to the Photo Assist menu. Exit Retur ns to the Photo Assist menu without changing the setting.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 59 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Focus Mode Sub menu Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Use the F ocus Mode submenu to control how your camer a focuses. Y ou can select from these setting options: î Auto Focus (Defau lt) î Manual Focus Figur e 36: Foc u s Mode Subm enu After you set the focus m ode to Manual Focus and exit the submenu, the live view of C apture mode will turn on automatically, and the focus distance will appear in the far le ft side of the top overlay bar. Y ou can then adjust the focus distance by pressing the left and right arrows on the 4-way controller (see b elow). If you turn off the image L CD, Manual Focus will still be on, b ut you will no longer be able to adjust the focus distance with the 4- way controller. When you set the focus mode to Manual F ocus and live view is on, pres sing the right and left arr ows on the 4-way controll er will perform these sp ecific functions: î Right arr ow â increases focus distance î Left arrow â decreases focus distance Note: S etting the came ra to Manual focus mode cancels any selected auto focus range (Ma cro or Infinity) a nd turns off the corr espo nding ico n on the st atus L CD. Ta b l e 1 6 : Fo cu s M od e So ft Keys Soft K ey Functio n Sele ct Places a chec kmark by the highlighted setting, then returns to the Photo Assist menu. Exit Returns t o the Photo Assist menu without changing th e setting .
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 60 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. AE Met ering Submen u Use the AE (Autom atic Exposure) Met ering submenu to sele ct the area of the scene that the c amera will use to set the exposure wh en you tak e a pictur e. Figu re 37: AE M etering Su bmenu Ta b l e 1 7 : AE Metering Submenu Ta b l e 1 8 : AE Met ering Soft Keys Setting Function Average (default) The camera us es the entire frame t o calculat e exposure . Center-weigh ted The camera us es the cent er half of the total pixel s to calculate exp osure. Spot The ca mera calc ulates exposur e based only on a small region in the center o f the scene. Soft K ey Function Select Places a checkmark by the highlighted set ting, then returns to the Photo Assist men u. Exit Returns t o the Photo Assist menu without changing th e setting .
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 61 Cap ture Mode Menus and Soft Keys ISO Speed Submenu Note: The option you set is active from shot -to- shot; it resets t o its default setting wh en you cycle the power on the camer a. Use the ISO Speed submenu to set the ISO spe ed. Similar to film, slower ISO speeds require longer exposures, but produce higher quality i mages. In contrast, faster ISO speeds all ow for shorter exposure s, but produce noisier images . Y ou can select from these setting options: Figur e 38 : ISO Speed Submenu î Auto (Defa ult) â The camera a utomat ically d etermine s the best I SO spee d for the sce ne. î 100 î 200 The ISO Speed submenu is onl y a vailable for Auto and Aperture Priority exposure modes. When the exposure mode is set to Landscape Pr ogram, Por trait Pr ogram, Action Progr am, or Shutter Priority, the ISO Speed submenu is gr ayed-out and the ISO Speed is set to Auto. Ta b l e 1 9 : ISO Speed Soft K eys Soft Key Function Select Places a checkmark b y the highlighted setting, th en returns to the Pho to Assist menu. Exit Returns to Photo Assist men u without changin g the setting .
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 62 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Image Stamp Menu Note: An image stamp becomes perman ently embedded in the image and o verwrites data in the imag e. Y ou cannot remove it l ater. Use the Image Stamp menu to place waterm arks on your images as you capture them. The Image Stamp menu ha s these options: Figure 39: Image Stamp Menu î Date & Time î Te x t î Logo Ta b l e 2 0 : Image Stamp Soft Keys Date/Ti me St amp Su bmenu Figu re 4 0: Da te/Time Sta mp Submenu Use the Date/Tim e Stamp subm enu to stamp an image with the curr ent date, time, both date and time, or ne ither. Y ou can set the following pr operties of the date/time stamp: î Ty p e î Placem ent î T ransparency î Te x t c o l o r î Background Soft K ey Function Edit Opens submenu associated with the selec ted menu optio n. Exit Exits this menu and returns to the live view in Capture mode.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 63 Capture Mode Men us and Soft Keys Ta b l e 2 1 : Setti ngs for Dat e/Time, T ext, and Logo Stamp Su bmenus Note: If you have set the Color in the File Settings subm enu to either B&W (black and white) or Sepia, the Image Stamp will also be B&W or Sepia, regar dless of the color you set for the T ext and Background Color s in the Image Stamp menu. T able 22: Date/Time S tamp Soft Keys Setting Options Ty p e None (defau lt), Bo th, Date, Time Placement T op right quadr ant of imag e Cente r of imag e Bottom l eft quadr ant of image Bottom r ight quad rant of imag e T op left quadr ant of im age T ransparency Opaque - The re will be a background box around the text. Semi - There will be a translucent bac kground box. Clear - There will be no back ground behind the tex t. Te x t C o l o r White, red, green, blue, cyan, ma genta, y ellow, bla ck Backgr ound Black , whi te, red, green, blue, cy an, ma genta , yell ow Soft K ey Function Default Returns all sett ings on screen to their def aults Exit Saves t he set tings, exit s this submenu, and returns to the Image Stamp m enu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 6 4 Capture M ode Menus and Soft Keys Te x t S t a m p S u b m e n u Figu re 41: T ext Stamp Submenu Use the T ext Stamp submenu to stamp an image with text that you enter using the text entry dialog. T ext Stamp is either On or Off, and the default is Off. When it is On, you can set the following proper ties of the t ext stamp: î Placem ent î T ransparency î Te x t c o l o r î Background Note: T ext strings can be a maximum of 31 characters. Ta b l e 2 3 : T ext Stamp Soft K eys Soft Key Function Edit O p e n s t e x t e n t r y s c r e e n t o e n t e r the te xt stam p that w ill appear on the ima ges. ( Avai lable only when the first line is set to On.) Default Returns all sett ings on screen to their de faults. Exit Exits this subme nu and retu rns to t he Ima ge St amp menu .
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 65 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Logo Stamp Subm enu Figure 42: Logo Stamp Submenu Logo Stamp is either On or Off, and the d efault is Off. When it is On, you can: î Stamp the image with a logo file î Choose o ne lo go from a list î Choose the pl acemen t of th e logo î Choose the co lor î Choose t he transparenc y level Ta b l e 2 4 : Logo Sta mp Soft K eys Logo Files D ialog Note: By de fault, no logo files are included with your came ra. T o le arn h ow to get logo fil es, s ee the HP website at: ww w . hp . co m /p h o to s ma r t www.hp.com/ photosmar t www.hp.com/ photosmar t www.hp.com/ photosmar t. W h en y ou p re s s th e Ed i t s of t ke y in th e Lo g o St a m p su b m e n u , th e Lo g o Fi l e s di a l o g is di s p l a y e d . Us e th e u p a nd do wn ar ro ws on th e 4 -w ay co n tro l le r to sel e ct th e f il e you wa nt to us e a s the Lo go St am p from the list of available files. Ta b l e 2 5 : Logo Files Soft K eys Soft Key Function Edit Opens the Logo Files dialog. (Avail able onl y when Lo go Stamp is on.) Default Returns all settings on sc reen to their defaul ts. Exit Exits this submenu and returns to the Image Stamp men u. Soft K ey Function Select Places a checkmark nex t to the logo file, returns to th e Logo Stamp subm enu, and disp lays the select ed file name in the seco nd line of the su bmenu. Exit Exits this d ialog and r eturns to Logo Stamp s ubmenu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 66 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Note: All options you set in the Pre ferences menu are active fr om shot-to-shot; they also remain set when y ou cycle the power on the camer a. Preferenc es Menu Use the Pre fer ences menu t o ch ange a varie ty o f yo ur cameraâs genera l set tings. Y ou c an select from these optio ns: Fig ur e 43: Preferences Menu î Display î Sound î For ma t C ard î PC Connect Mode î Date & Time î Image Counter î Camera N ame î Language î Reset Sett ings Note: For more information on using the Preferen ces menu to se t up your came ra, see â Appendix A: Using the Prefere nces Menuâ starting on page 94. Ta b l e 2 6 : Pref erence s So ft Keys Soft K ey F unction Edit Opens s ubmenu assoc iated with the highlighted menu option. Forma t Available only when Forma t Car d is highlighted. Reset Available only when Reset Settings is highlighted. Exit Exits this submenu and returns camer a to Captur e mode.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 67 Capture Mode Menus and Soft K eys Displa y Su bmenu Figu re 44: Display Submenu Use the Disp lay submenu to control the disp lay on the ca meraâs image L C D. Ta b l e 2 7 : Display Sub menu Note: The Instant Review setting deter mines the amount of time an Instant Review of an image you just capture d is displayed on the image L CD. See âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25 for more information. The Live View setting determines wh ether the live view of Capture mode will automatically display on the image L CD or not when you power on the camer a a nd set the camer a to Capture mode. The Sleep Timeout set ting det ermines how quickly the camer a goes into sleep mode and turns off the image LCD when y ou are not usin g the camer a. Ta b l e 2 8 : Displ ay Soft Keys Setti ng Def ault O pti ons Brightness Level 4 1 (dimmest) - 7 (brightest) Instant Review (see Note) 3 sec 1-10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 se c 30 sec Off Live View (see Note) Off On / Of f Sleep Time out (see Note) 2 min 30 s ec 1 min 2 min 5 min Soft K ey Function Default Returns al l settings to their de faults. Exit Saves the settings, exi ts this submenu, and return s to the Preferences menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 68 Capture Mode Menus a nd Soft K ey s Sound Su bmenu Figu re 4 5: Sound Submenu Use the Sound submenu to control the sounds used on your camer a . Ta b l e 2 9 : Sound Submenu Note: The System Sounds setting determines whether or not you will hear t he camer aâs system sounds , such as shutter cl icks, beeps, and so forth. Ta b l e 3 0 : Sound Soft K eys Format Car d Option Figur e 46 : For mat Card Confirmation Screen Use the Format Car d option to reformat the memory card. Reformatting will er ase all of the files on the card, including all im ages, protecte d files, folders, scripts , and so forth. Y ou will see a confirmation of your choice to format the me mory card (see Figur e 46). Ta b l e 3 1 : For ma t Ca rd Sof t Keys Setting Default Options Vo l u m e L e v e l 7 1 (lowes t) - 7 (hi ghest) System Sou nds (see Note) On On / Off Soft Key Function Default Retur ns all settings to th eir defau lts. Exit Saves t he setti ngs, ex its thi s submenu , and re turns t o the Preferences menu. Soft Ke y Function Forma t Reformats the memory c ard. Cancel E xits the confirmati on screen a nd retu rns t o th e Pre feren ces m enu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 69 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys PC Connect Mode S ubmenu Figur e 47 : PC Connect Mode Submenu Use the PC Connect Mode submenu to specify ho w the camer a will ap pear to your computer when connected via the USB interface in PC Connect mode. Y ou can then transfer images from your camera to the computer via the USB interface. Ta b l e 3 2 : PC Con nect Mode Submenu Note: For more information on using the PC Connect Mode settings, see âT ransferring Images to Y our Computerâ on page 38. Ta b l e 3 3 : PC Connect Mode Soft Keys Setting Function USB Di sk Driv e The came ra is oper ated a s a U SB Mass S tor age Dev ice and appears as a disk drive connected to t he comput er. Y ou can cop y images from you r camera to the com puter as you would fr om another disk drive. Use this s etting to conne ct the c amer a to a Mac O S 8.6 or better compute r, or to a Windows Me, 98, or 2000 com puter. Digita D evice (defaul t) Y ou can use software incl uded with your computer or camer a to tr ansf er images to the compu ter. Use this setting to connect the camer a to a Windows Me , 98, or 2000 comp uter. Soft Key Function Select Places a checkmark next t o the selected item and returns to t he Pref er ence s men u. Default Resets the se ttings to their default s. Exit Exits this submenu without c hanging the sett ings and retur ns to the Pref er ence s men u.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 70 Capture Mode Menus a nd Soft K eys Set Date & Time S ubmenu Figure 4 8: Set Date & Time Submenu Use the Set Date & Time submenu to set the camer aâs date and time. Press the up and down arrows on the 4-way contr oller to scr oll throu gh the list of numbers. Press the left and right arrows to move between th e date/time fie lds. Ta b l e 3 4 : Set Da te & Tim e Soft K eys Format Dialog Fig ur e 49: Form at Dialog When you press the F ormat soft key in the Set Date & Time submenu, you see the F ormat dialog, which allows you to sele ct from a list of six, pre defined date and time formats. Ta b l e 3 5 : Fo r m at S o f t Key s Soft K ey Function Format Opens the F ormat List dialog where you can se lect the format. Exit Saves the date and time settings, exits this submenu, and return s to the Preferences m enu. Soft K ey F unct ion Sele ct Places a checkmark next to the selected format and retu rns to the Set Date & Time subme nu. Exit Exits this dialog and retu rns to the Set Date & Time subme nu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 71 Capture Mode Men us and Soft K eys Image Co unter Sub menu Figur e 50: Image Counter Submen u Use th e Image Count er subm enu to se t how the im age counter works. Ta b l e 3 6 : Ima ge Count er Submenu Note: Once you have changed the Image Counter se tting, yo u must power the camera off and then on again for the new setting to tak e effect. Ta b l e 3 7 : Image Counter Soft K eys Setting Function Reset When Empty E ach time you delet e all o f the ima ges on your cam er a, the cou nter rest arts t he first image capt ured at nu mber 1. Continuous Counter (default) The imag es are count ed accordi ng to the hi story of the camer aâs u se. F or example: image # 400 is the 400th image to be captured with this ca mera. Soft Ke y Function Select Places a ch eckmark next to the selected setting and returns to the Preferences menu. Exit Return s to th e Pre ferenc es m enu without changing the set ting.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 72 Capture Mode Menus and Soft Keys Camera Name Su bmenu Figure 5 1: Camera Name Subm enu Use the Camer a Name submenu to enter a unique name for your camer a. Press the left (Character Set Icon) soft k ey to toggle through the four character sets (capital letters, lowercase letter s, number s, and symbol s) until you see the char acter set you want to use displayed in the left soft k ey label area on the overlay bar. Then p ress the: î Up or down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to scroll thr ough the list of char acters. î Right arrow on the 4- way controller to e nter the selec ted char a cter and advance the insertion point in the center of the scre en. î Left arrow on the 4-way controller to back up and delete a char acter. î Middle (Space) soft key to create a space between wor ds in the camera name. Note: Words wr ap to the nex t line when they get to o long. Ta b l e 3 8 : Cam era Name Soft K eys Soft K ey Function Chara cter Set Icon T oggles throu gh four char acter sets: ca pital le tters, l owercase lett ers, numbe rs, and symb ols. Space Adds a sp ace, instead of a letter, and advances the insertion point. (The Space k ey does not appear if a space is not a valid char acter.) Exit Saves the text entered and retu rns t o th e Pre feren ces m enu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft K ey Reference 73 Capture Mode Menus a nd Soft K eys Langua ge Subm enu Figure 52: Language Submenu English is set as the default language that is used on the camera. Use the Language submenu to select a language from the list of installed languages. Ta b l e 3 9 : Language Soft Keys Reset Settin gs Option Fig ure 53: R eset Settings Confi rmation Screen Use the Reset Settings op tion to reset all of t he came ra settings (e xcept for the Languag e, F orm at for the Set Dat e & Time, PC Connec t Mode, and Video Preferen ces sett ings) to their defau lts in one st ep. Y ou will see a confirmation of your choice to r eset the camera settings (see Figure 53). Ta b l e 4 0 : Re set Settings Soft K eys Soft K ey F unction Sele ct Places a ch eckma rk nex t to th e highlighted language and r eturns to the Preferences menu. The s elected language is now used. Exit R etu rns to th e P referen ces menu without changing the set ting. Soft Key Functio n Reset Resets all camera settings to their default s and r eturns to the Pref er ence s men u. Cancel R eturn s to the P referen ces m enu without changing the set tings.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 74 Playback Mode Men u and Soft Keys Playback M ode Menu and Soft K eys T o access the Playback mode menu and re lated soft k eys, turn the came ra mode dial t o Playback mode and press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. Once you have captured images, you can choose options and setting s for the images within th e one menu (Play Set tings) of Playback mode. Play Settings Menu Figure 54: Play Settings Menu There are th ree options in this menu: î Slideshow î Playback Rate î Video Ta b l e 4 1 : Play Settin gs Soft K eys Soft K ey Function Edit D isplays submenu for th e highlighted option. Exit Exits this menu and r eturns to the Playback mode scre en.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 75 Pl ayback Mode Men u and Soft Keys Slidesho w Subm enu Figure 55: Slideshow Submenu Use the Slides how submenu to select the criteria for a slideshow to be viewed âon the fly.â Ta b l e 4 2 : Slidesh ow Submenu Ta b l e 4 3 : Slidesho w Soft K eys Setting Default Options Cont ent All All, Category Durati on 2 sec 1-10 se c Sound On On, Off Loop On On, O ff Soft K ey Func tion Start Exits this submenu and displays the slideshow. Canc el Exits this s ubmenu without changing th e settings and returns to the Pl ay Settings m enu. Exit Sets all the settings, exits this subm enu, and returns t o the Play Settings menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 76 Playb ack Mode Menu a nd Soft K eys Playback Rate Submenu Figur e 5 6: Playback Rate Submenu Use the Playback Rate sub menu to e stablish a def ault playback r ate for each image typ e. T able 44: Play back Rate Su bmenu Ta b l e 4 5 : Pl ayback R ate Soft Keys Setting Default Opti ons Timelap se 3 se c 1-10 sec rate Group 3 sec 1-10 sec rate Soft K ey Func tion Default Returns all settings to their d efaults. Canc el Exits this submenu without changing the settings and returns to the Play Settings m enu. Exit Sets all the settings, then exits t his submenu, and returns t o the Play Settings menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 7 7 Playback Mode Menu a nd Soft Keys Video Prefere nces Submenu Figur e 57: Video Prefe rences Submenu Use the Video Prefer ences submen u to specify the video format: NTSC or P AL. The form at that you choose (NTSC or PAL) depends on your televisionâs video input format: î NTSC is the video connection standard used in the United States and Japan. î P AL is the video connection standard used in Europ e. Ta b l e 4 6 : Video Preferences Submenu Ta b l e 4 7 : Video Preferences Soft K eys Setti ng Defaul t Op tions Video Out NTSC NTSC, PAL Soft K ey Function Cancel Exits this subm enu without c h an g i n g t h e s e t ti n g s a n d r e t ur n s to the Play Se ttings menu. Exit Saves th e setting , exits this submenu, a nd returns to the Play Settings menu.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 78 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Review Mode Menus and Soft K eys T o acc ess the Re view mode menu s and relat ed sof t keys, turn t he ca mera mod e dia l to Revie w mode and press the MENU button on the camer a . Once you have captu red images, you can change specifications for the images within the four Review mode m enus: î âEdit Menuâ on page 78 î âPrint Order F orm Menuâ on page 81 î âT ransmit Menuâ on page 84 î âFind Menuâ on page 86 Edit Menu Figur e 58: Edit Menu Use the Edit menu to perform the following actions on selected images: î Delete î Group î Protect î Categor ize Delete Option Figur e 59: Delete Confirmation Screen Use the Delete option to delete the current image, a group of images, or all of the marked images from the mem ory card . Note that prote cted images within a group m arked for del etion will not be deleted until you unprot ect them. Y ou will see a confirmation of your choice to delete the images (see Figure 59). Ta b l e 4 8 : Delete Soft Keys Soft K ey Func tion Delete D eletes the sele cted image(s) and then returns to the Review m ode scre en. Canc el Exits a nd retu rns to the Rev iew mode screen wi thout del eting im age(s).
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 79 Review Mode Menus a nd Soft Keys Note: A g roup becom es a folder on the memory card, in which all the images in t hat group are stored. Group Name Su bmenu Use the Grou p Name submenu to gr oup all of the images that y ou have mark ed. Y ou can start a group, add images to an existing group, or move images fr om one group to a new group. Note that you ca n use the D issol ve sof t key to disso lve groups. Figur e 6 0: Group Name Submenu Ta b l e 4 9 : Group Name Soft Keys Protect Optio n Figur e 61: Prote ct Option Use t he Protect option to pr otect or unprotect marked images. When an image is p rotected, you canât delete it. If ther e are no mark ed images, then the Protect command pr otects the currently selected image. If the mark ed or select ed single image is unprotected, o nly the Pr otect s oft k ey appears. If the image is protected, only t he Unprotect s oft key app ears. If multiple images, both protec ted and unprotecte d, are mark ed, then both the Protect and Unpr otect soft k eys appear. Once you have prot ected an image, the following restrictions appl y to the image file: î Y ou cannot delete the image nor an attached sou nd. î Y ou cannot attach or re-r ecord a sou nd. î Y ou cannot attach, change, or r emove a category. î Deleting a group will dele te only the un protected images within th at group. î Y ou cannot change the fil e name. î Y ou can move the image file int o and out of groups. î The image file will be marke d âRead Onlyâ in Windows when tr ansferred to a PC. Soft Key Functio n Add (If current image is not group ed, but at le ast one group exis ts.) Create (If cur rent image is n ot grou ped a nd no groups exist.) Displ ays a d ialog that a llows yo u to cre ate a new group or add to an existing grou p. (Images are mo ved int o grou ps, not r eplic ated.) Dissolve Remove s an y gro uping pr evio usly appli ed. Exit Ex its and retu rns t o th e Rev iew mode scre en.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 80 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Ta b l e 5 0 : Protect Soft Keys Note: A ca tegory is an image tag which is useful for finding images or playing a slideshow of a category of images. Categori es Sub menu Use the Categor ies submenu to assign images to a category. The camera has predefined categories, such a s vacati on, work , pets , fa mily, a nd fri ends Figure 62: Categori es Su bmenu Choose the category you want using the 4-way controller, then use the Selec t soft key to attach the category to the image. Y ou can assign categories to one image at a time, or you can categorize all mark ed images at once. Ta b l e 5 1 : Catego ries Soft K eys Soft K ey Funct ion Protect Appear s if selec te d images are unprote cte d. Allows you to p rotect the curre nt image. Unprotect If multi ple im ages are ma rked, this soft key appears al ong with the Pr otect soft k ey. Allows yo u to unpr otect im ages. Exit Cancels the protect ope ration a nd returns to the R eview mo de scree n. Soft Ke y Function Select Ass igns a category to an im age or mark e d images. Places a checkma rk next to the assigned c ategory. Exit Upda tes the image files with the new categories and re turns to the Rev iew mode sc reen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 81 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Print Order Form Menu Figure 6 3: Print Order For m Menu Use the Print Ord er Form me nu to create a Digital Print Order F o rmat (DPOF) file. Ta b l e 5 2 : Print Order Form Menu Note: S ee âUsing a Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Fileâ on page 44 for more information. Ta b l e 5 3 : Print Order F orm Soft K eys Option Fun ction Add Images Allows you to add current image or mark ed im a g es t o t h e D P O F fi l e . O p e n s a s e c o nd a r y sc ree n t o s pe ci fy nu mb er o f co pi es an d s i ze of photos. View O rder Displays a scro lling list of the c ontents of the DPOF file. Erase Order Erases the contents of your DPOF file . Soft Key Function Add/Select Open s approp riate submenu. Era se Asks for conf irmation to delete al l entries of the D POF f ile. Exit Exits and returns to t he Review mod e screen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 82 Review Mode Menus and Soft K eys Add to Order Submenu Figure 64: Add to Order Submenu Use the Add to Order submenu to add curren t or marked images to the DPOF file and to set up the print sett ings for those images. If you have any mark ed images, they ar e added to the order. If no images ar e mark ed, the image currently selected in the Review mode is added to the order. Ta b l e 5 4 : Add to Order Submenu Note: S tandard means one of the standard print sizes. Y ou specify the exact size you want your Standar d prints to be at the printer . For example, you can specify that all Standard images be p rinted at 4 â x 6â. T able 55: Add to Order Soft Keys Setting Options Copies 1-999 (1=default) Size Index - Thumbnails Standard (default) - One of the sta ndard prin t si zes (see Note) Soft K ey Fun cti on Add Adds image s to t he DP OF file . Canc el Exits without adding images.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 83 Review Mode Menus and Soft K eys View O rder O ption Fig ur e 65: Print Order F orm Screen of the View Or der Opti on Use the View Orde r option to view a list of order ed images in the DPOF file. Y ou can scroll thr ough this list using the up and down arrows on th e 4-way control ler. However, you cannot edit this list. Ta b l e 5 6 : View Order Option Soft K ey Erase Order Option Figure 6 6: Erase Order Confirmation Scre en Use th e Erase Order option to er ase all of the entries fr om the DPOF file. Y ou will see a confir mation of your choice to er ase all entries (see Figure 66). Ta b l e 5 7 : Eras e Order S oft Keys Soft K ey Fun cti on Exit Returns to the P rint Or der F orm menu. Soft Key Function Era se Eras es the content s of th e DPOF file. Exit R et ur ns to t he Pr in t O rd er F orm m enu without clearing the DPOF file.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 84 Review M ode Menus and Soft K eys Tr a n s m i t M e n u Fig ur e 67: T ransmit Menu Use the T ransmit menu t o transfer im ages in one of two ways: î Camera-C amera î Camera-Pr inter Camera-Camera Option Use the C amer a-Cam era o ption to s end curr ent or mark ed images to, or rece ive images from, another Digit a camera. Note: For more information, see âT ransmitting Images Between T wo Camerasâ on page 48. Ta b l e 5 8 : Camera-Ca mer a Soft K eys Soft K ey Functi on Send Sets the camera into sender mode. Displa ys a screen t o confi rm se nding images to anothe r camer a and then returns to the Review mode scree n. Receive Sets the camera to receive r mode. Brings up a scr een to confirm receiving images from another camer a and retur ns t o the Re view mode scre en. Stop Stops transmitting and returns to the Tra n s m i t m e n u . Exit Exits this screen and r eturns to the Review mod e screen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 85 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Camer a-Printe r Option Use the C amer a-Printer o ption to se nd curr ent or mark ed images to a p rinter via the HP JetSend in frar ed technol ogy. Note: For more information, s ee âJetSending Images to a Printerâ on page 46. Ta b l e 5 9 : Camer a-Pr inter Sof t K eys Soft K ey Function Send Sets the camer a to sender mode. Displays a screen t o confi rm send ing imag es and then retur ns to t he Re view mode scr een. Exit Exits this screen and ret urns to the Review m ode screen.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 86 Review Mode Men us and Soft Keys Find Menu Figure 68: Find Menu Use the Find menu to sear ch for specific images, either by c a tegory or by date (but not bot h at the same time). When you return t o the Review mode to view the results of th e find oper ation, the Find icon will appear in the lower, right corner. All find r esults will be c hronologically displayed . If no images match your sear ch criteria, then you will see an err o r message. Ta b l e 6 0 : Find By Dat e and Find By Categor y Soft Keys Soft K ey Functio n Edit Display s speci fic fi nd opti ons (Fin d By Date, or Find By C ategory). Sele ct Selects the category to find. Exit Exits the Find screen and returns to the Review mod e screen. Mark After the Find ope ration, mark s a selected image. Show All After the Find o peration, returns the thumbnail row to t he origi nal, chronological list of images and turns off the Find icon.
Chapter 6: Menu and Soft Key Reference 87 Review Mode Menus and Soft Keys Find B y Dat e Subme nu Figure 69: Find By Date Submenu Use the Find By Date submenu to enter the r ange of dates using the 4-way controller. Ta b l e 6 1 : Find By Date Soft Keys Find B y Categ ory Sub menu Fig ure 70: F ind By Category Submenu Use the Find By Category submenu to scro ll through the list of categories and enter the âfindâ category with the 4-way controlle r. Y ou can then use the Select soft k ey to select the category with which you want to do the sear ch. Ta b l e 6 2 : Find By Cate gory Soft K eys Soft K ey Function Find Executes the Fi nd cri teria and retu rns to the Review mode sc reen to display re sults. Exit Exits this screen and r eturns to the Find menu withou t executi ng th e Fin d com mand. Soft Key Function Select Selects th e check marked c ategor y from the F ind B y Category list and execut es the Find com mand. Exit Exits this scre en and returns t o the Find me nu without executing the Find command.
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 88 T roubleshooting Common Probl ems Chapter 7: T roubleshooting Overvie w This chapter explains how to troubleshoot some common problems you may encounter while using your camera. If you still cannot re medy the pro blem, contact HP for help. See âContacting HP Customer Care â on page 93. T roubleshooting Common Problems Note: For in formation abo ut pr eservin g batte ry life and about HP accessories you can use t o power the camer a (such as the HP AC p ower adapter, and the HP rechargeable batteries and battery rechar ger), see Appendix B start ing on page 103. Problem Solution The camera will not power on î If you ar e using batterie s: î Check the type of batteries t hat you have inst alled in the came ra. They may not be t he approp riate type for a digital camer a. Use only high quality AA phot o lithium, hi gh dr ain alkal ine, or NiMH b atteries. î Check t o make sure the batter ies are ins erted c orrectly. The positi ve an d negati ve pole s may be r eversed. î The batteriesâ charge m ay be low or com pletely dr ained. T ry installing new batteries or r echar ged batteries, î If you ar e usin g the HP AC power adap ter inste ad of ba tteries : î Is the A C power adapter plug ged in? î Is ther e power at the ou tlet? î Is the A C power adap ter dead? î Also see the ne xt pr oblem an d soluti on, bel ow. The cam era is not responding at all â it wonât po wer on or off Open the battery compartment door, re move the batteries and/or unplug the HP AC power adapter, and let the camer a sit for abou t 20 minute s with the bat tery door open to allow the camer a to dis charge full y. Then eit her re- install the batte ries or plug in the A C power adapter, close the batte ry door, and try powering on the camer a again. The came ra i s power ed on, but th ereâ s no dis play on the ima ge LCD î Press the DISPLA Y button again. î Power t he came ra off a nd the n on ag ain. î The ba tteries m ay be ne arly drained . (If s o, you s hould see an em pty bat tery status ic on on t he status L CD.) Leave the i mage L CD turned off, or insert charged batte ries.
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 89 T roubleshooting Common Problems The came ra i s power ed on, but when I pr ess a button, the cam era does not respond î T ry powering the camera o ff and then on again. î Remove the bat teries o r unpl ug the HP AC power adap ter. Th en r einstal l the batter ies or pl ug in th e AC power adapter, and pow er on the c amer a again. I always have t o re-set the date and time af ter I change the batte ries in the c amera or unplug th e HP A C power ad apter from t he camer a This will happen i f eithe r you r emove the ba tteries fr om the camer a, or you remo ve the b atterie s and u nplug the HP AC power adapter , fo r more t han 5 m inutes. (Not e that even if the b atterie s are dra ined, the date and time will remain set as l ong as you leave the drained batteries in t he camer a.) When cha nging b atterie s, try to put the new batterie s in w ithin 5 m inutes of whe n you rem ove the old ba tteries . Sim ilarly , if you are u sing th e HP AC po wer ada pter, either l eave bat teries in the ca mera (even if the bat teries a re drained) whe n you unplug the adapt er, or unpl ug the adapt er fo r les s than 5 min utes a t a t ime. The rec hargeable HP NiMH ba tteries Iâm us ing donât seem to power the camer a for very long Y ou must re charge all 4 HP N iMH batter ies afte r fully dr aining them four t imes for the ba tteries to re ach the ir opt imum cap acity an d performan ce. F or mo re information, see âUsing the HP NiM H Batteries and Rechar gerâ on page 108. The incor rect language is set o n the camera 1. Set the camer a mode dial to Captur e mode . 2. Power on th e camer a if you ha venât already . 3. Pre ss th e MENU butto n to di splay the Capt ure m ode men us on the i mage L CD. 4. P ress the righ t ar row o n th e 4 -way cont roll er three times to move to th e Preferences menu. 5. Press the down arr ow on the 4-way contr oller seven time s to mo ve to th e Language menu o ption. 6. Press t he left (Edit ) soft k ey. The Language submenu is disp layed. 7. Pre ss the down or up arr ow on the 4- way cont roll er to hig hlight t he lang uage you want. 8. Press t he left (Select) soft key to select t he highli ghted l anguage and to ex it this screen. Y ou retu rn to the Prefer ences m enu of Capture mode, and the camera is now using the language you set. 9. Pre ss the right (Exit) soft key to ex it the menu. Problem Solution
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 90 T roubleshooting Common Pr oblems The camer a is displaying an error m essage There are 3 different t ypes of error m essages y ou may see on the camera: î Memory car d is not fo rmatted - âErrâ is displayed on the status L CD and the message âCar d requir es formattingâ is displayed on the image L CD. This means the me mory car d needs to b e formatted. Eit her see âFormat ting the Memory Car dâ on page 98 for information o n how to format the car d, or replac e the curr ent memory c ard with anot her, format ted one. î Fl a s h c a n no t c h a rg e - â E r râ a nd t h e l i g ht n i n g b ol t i c o n b l in k s o n t h e st at u s LC D for 3 seconds, then the camera powers off. âErrâ and the l ightning bolt will remain display ed on the status L CD until t he batte ries are dra ined. This problem requires repair of t he camer a. See âContacting HP Customer Care â on page 93 to ca ll HP for he lp. î Oth e r er ro rs - Th e ca m era l oc ks up an d bl in ks a 3- di gi t erro r cod e o n th e s ta tu s L CD. T ry powering the camer a off and the n on again. Y ou may also need to remove the batteries and install them again. If the pr oblem per sists, see âContacting HP C ustomer Car eâ on page 93 to call HP for hel p. Be sur e to tell the HP repr esentative the err or code t hat you se e displaye d on the status L CD. The cam eraâs stat us LCD is flashing 000 There is no memory card installed in t he camer a, or th e memory card is full. If the re isnât one ins talled, power off the c amera, inst all a m emory c ard in it , and the n power on the camer a again. If the memory card is full, tr ansfer the ima ges you want to kee p to your comp uter (see âT ransferri ng Images to Y our Computerâ on p age 38), and then delete images from the memor y card to free-up s pace. The image counter on the cam era âs status LCD wonât reset when the m emory card is empty The defaul t setting for the image counter is co ntinuous cou nting of images. If y ou want to have i t reset to zero wh e n the memory card is empty, you can change t he setting in t he Image Count er subme nu (under the P references m enu in Ca pture mode). See âImage Counter Su bmenuâ on page 71. Once you have changed the image counter setting, you mus t power the camer a off and then on again. Also ensure that the camer aâs mem ory card is comple tely empt y. The camera w ill not fo cus î Ensure that the camer a mode dial is set t o Captur e mode . î Y ou may be too close to th e subject. T ry using the Mac ro auto focus r ange. î T ry using Focus Lock . See âUs ing Focus Lockâ on page 18. Digital zoom is no t working For digit al zoom to work correc tly, the came raâs image L CD must be turned on. Ensure that the camer a mode dia l is set to Captur e mode . Then pres s the DISPLA Y button. Problem Solution
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 91 T roubleshooting Common Problems The HP Remot e Control is not working î The HP Remote Control does no t work wh ile the flash is charging. T ry pressing the Remote Contr olâs trigger again once the flash has charged. î The HP Remote C ontrol may not work if the camer a is sitting under bright lights or in full sun. In this case, use the 1 0-Second Ti mer mode, inst ead. (See âSetting the Timer Modeâ on page 11.) î The battery in the HP Re mote Control may be dead. If so, re place the batt ery. The cap tured images are over- or u nder-expose d Change the exp osure com pensation set ting in the EV C ompensation sub menu of the Phot o Assi st menu . See âEV Compen sation Submen uâ on pag e 57. The comp uter does not recognize th e camera when co nnected v ia the USB cable On both Windows and M acintosh comp uters: î Is the camer a powered on? î Is the camer a mode dial set to PC Connec t mode ? î Is the USB cable firmly attache d to both the camer a and computer? î Is the USB port en abled on the compute r? î Are you using a USB hub? If so , you may need to reset the hub. (It may have become disab led due to a n electrical dis turbance suc h as that gen erate d by static elect ricity.) T o reset the USB hub, leave the camera connected to the hub, disco nnect the hub fro m the co mputer , and rem ove po wer from the hu b. Then reco nnect the powe r to the U SB hu b an d re conn ect t he hu b to the compu ter. î T ry powering the camera o ff and then on again. On Windows Me, 98, and 2000 computers: î If you are using the Microso ft Scanner and Camer a Wizard (for Windows Me) or the HP Photo Imaging Software (for Windows 98 and 2 000) to tr ansfer images, is th e PC Conn ect Mode subm enu setti ng (und er the Pre ferences menu o f Capture mo de) in the came ra se t to Digita D evice? î If you ar e using the PC Connect Mode s ubmenu settin g of USB Disk Drive in the cam era i nstead, doe s the came ra app ear as a disk drive in Windows Explor er? Note: Computer s running Windows NT 4. 0 cannot connect to the camera via the USB cable, becaus e Windows NT 4.0 does not support the USB interface. Y ou must use either an HP P1000/11 00 or similar printer, or a memory card reader to transfer the images to your Windows NT 4.0 computer, i nstead. On Macint osh comp uters: î Is the PC Connect Mode submenu setting (unde r the Prefer e nces menu of Capture mode) in the camera set to USB Disk Drive? Problem Solution
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 92 T roubleshooting Common Pr oblems A TW AIN error oc curs when a s oftware pro gram tries to acquire an image from t he camer a î V erify that the sof twar e progr am can see th e camer a through its own TW AIN select source. Whil e sof tware pro grams v ary on how to se lect a TWAIN so urce, generally the easiest w ay to d etermine w hether a p rogram supports TWAIN is to see if ther e is an Acquir e sele ction in the F ile me nu. If not , then chec k for a TWAIN c ommand locate d under the Imp ort select ion of the File me nu. If neither exits, and you have a scanner, che ck the manual f or the software prog ram t o see if you can use T W AIN to sc an image s, inste ad. î For m ore detailed inf ormation about this p roblem, c onsult the T echnical Support section for this camera that i s located on the HP website at: www.hp.com/photosm art www.hp.com/photosm art www.hp.com/photosm art www.hp.com/photosm art. I am trying to name a group of image s, but t he camera is not responding î T ry using a different group n ame. Note that the camera does not accept group names th at begi n with BR or TL ( regar dless of language ). î Group names must be eight characters or less, and cannot cont ain spaces. I am s earchi ng t hrough images by date, and have select ed the f ind dates, but the camera is not responding Mak e sur e that the Fr om date is prior or equal t o the T o date. I canât get images to display on m y television when I connec t my camera to it Mak e sur e th at the video output format ( NTSC or P AL) that you set in the Vide o Prefer ences subme nu of Playback mode is cor rect for t he video input format of your tel evision. (See â Video Preference s Submen uâ on page 77.) Iâm having troub le JetSending an image to my pr inter î Be awar e that i t will t ake an aver age of 20 seco nds t o tr ansfer an image from the camer a to a printer via JetSe nd. î Make sure that your printer is Je tSend-capabl e. î Make su re that th e cameraâ s infr ared window is lined-up with the printerâs infrare d sensor, and that the c amer a and printer ar e about 10 inches apart. Iâm having troub le sending images to another camer a î Make sure th at the other camer a is a Digita camera. î Ma k e s u r e t h a t t he c a m er a âs i n f ra r ed w i n d ow i s l i ne d - u p wi t h t he o t h e r c a m e ra âs infrar ed sensor, and that the c amer as are abou t 10 inches apa rt. Problem Solution
Chapter 7: T roubleshooting 93 Contacting HP Customer Care Contacting HP Custom er Care HP Customer Care Online Click your way to a great solution! The HP we bsite, w w w . hp . c om / p ho t o s ma r t www.hp .com/p hotosm art www.hp .com/p hotosm art www.hp.com/pho tosmart, is a g re at p lac e to start for answers to ques tions about your HP produ cts. Y ouâll get instant access to help ful tips and tricks, downloadable drivers, and the latest product and software updates â 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. HP Customer Care by Ph one If you encou nter a prob lem wi th yo ur cam era that is not cove red in t his c hapt er, co ntac t HP for hel p. HP has Customer Support Ce nters worldwide, some of which are listed below. Note: Fo r a complet e list of HP âs Customer Support Centers worldwide, go to the HP we bsi te, ww w.hp.com/ph otosmart, www.hp.com/ph otosmart, www.hp.com/ph otosmart, www.hp.com/ph otosmart, an d c lic k th e Assistance Assistance Assistance A ss i s ta n c e button on the navigation bar. HPâs Custo mer Support Centers Replace a with your international teleph one access code. North America Canada: 905- 206-4663 Mexico - M exico City: 52 58 9922 Mexico - Outside Mexico C ity: 0 1 800 472 6684 United Sta tes: 2 08-376-368 6 Europe Belgium - Dutch : 32 ( 0)2 626 8806 Belgium - Frenc h: 32 (0)2 626 8807 Denmark: 45 39 29 4099 Finland: 358 (0)203 47 288 France: 33 (0)1 43 62 34 34 Germany (24PF / min): 49 (0)180 52 58 143 Italy: 39 0 2 264 1 0350 Neth erland s: 31 (0)20 606 8 751 Norway: 47 22 11 6299 Spain: 34 902 321 123 Sweden : 46 (0)8 619 217 0 United Kingdo m: 44 ( 0)207 5 12 52 02 English language support from other Eu ropean count ries: 44 (0)171 512 52 02 Asia/Pacific Austr alia: 61 3 8877 8000 Korea: 82 (2 ) 327 0 0700 Singa pore: 65 2 72 53 00 T aiwan: 886 (2 ) 2717 0055
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 94 Accessing the Preferences Menu Appendix A: Using the Prefer ences Menu Overvie w Note: For reference i nform ation regarding the options and soft k eys in the Prefer ences menu, see âPre ferences Menu â starting on page 66. Use the Pr efere nces menu in Capture m ode to change a variety of your came raâs gene ral se ttings. For ex ample, with the Pr eference s menu options you can change the br ightness of the camer aâs image L CD or the volum e of the camer aâs sounds, reformat the memory card in the c amera, change the date and time on the camer a , or set the m ode for connecting the camer a to a computer. This appendix covers the following topics: î â Accessing the Preferences Menuâ on page 94 î âSetting the Displayâ on page 95 î âControlling Camera Soundsâ on page 97 î âForma tting the Memory Car dâ on page 98 î âSelecting the PC Connect Modeâ on page 98 î âSetting the Date and Timeâ on page 99 î âSetting the Image Counterâ on page 100 î âNaming Y our Cameraâ on page 101 î âSelecting a Languageâ on page 102 î âResettin g Camer a Setting sâ on page 102 Figur e 71: Preference s Menu Accessing t he Preferences Menu T o access the Prefer ences menu: 1 Set the camer a mode dial to Capture mode . 2 Power on the camer a if you havenât already. 3 Press the MENU button on the back of the camer a. The Capture mode menus are displayed on the imag e LCD. 4 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller three times to move to the Pr eferences m enu (see Figure 71). Note: All of the settings you make in the Preferen ces me nu are active from shot- to-s hot; they also remai n set when you cycle t he power on the camer a. 5 Press the down arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move the highlight to the menu option you want to select. 6 Press the left (Edit, Form at, or Reset) soft k ey to select the highlighted menu op tion.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 95 Setting the Display Setting the D isplay Figure 72: Display Submenu Use the Display subme nu to control the display on the cameraâs image L CD. Brightness Level Use the Brightne ss Level setting to control the b rightness of the display on the c amer aâs image L CD. Y ou can set the Brightness Le vel from 1 (dimme st) to 7 (brightest). T he defaul t value is 4. T o change the Br ightness Level: 1 Press the down or up arr ow on the 4-way controller, if needed, to highlight the B rightness Level option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the values until you see the value you want. 3 Press the ri ght (Ex it) s oft key to save the se tting, exit t he D isplay submen u, and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu. Instant Review The cameraâs Inst ant Review featur e allows you to see displayed on the image L CD either the One Shot image, the final image of a Continuous image sequence, or the first image of a Timelapse sequence you just captured. (Se e âUsing Instant Reviewâ on page 25 for more information.) The default setting is that Inst ant Review is on for 3 seconds, and the maximum set ting is that it is on for 30 seconds, after you captur e either a One Shot image or the final image in a C ontinuous or Timelapse sequence. T o change the durati on of the Instant R eview period, or to turn Instant R eview Off: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way contr oller to highlight the Instant Review option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the values until you see the value you want. 3 Press the ri ght (Ex it) s oft key to save the se tting, exit t he D isplay submen u, and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 96 Setting the Display Live View Note: The image L C D uses a l ot of battery power. If you ar e runn ing your camer a on batteries r ather than with the HP-approved AC power adapter, you may want to limit y our use of the image L CD. In turn, you may want to leave the Live View setting at its default Off value to p reser ve battery pow er. The Live View setting determines wh ether the live view of C apture Mode will automatically display on the image L CD or not when you power on the camer a and set the camer a to Capture mode. The default valu e for Live View is Off. T o change the setting so Live View is On (that it will always display on the image L C D when you power on the camer a and set the camer a to Capture m ode): 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way contro ller to highlight the Live View option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to change the value t o On. 3 Press the ri ght (Ex it) s oft key to save the se tting, exit t he D isplay submen u, and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu. Sleep Timeout Note: For c on ve n ie nc e as y ou le a rn t o u se y ou r cameraâs featu res and menu options, you may want to set the Sle ep Timeout to the longes t interval (5 minutes). This will give you time to consider a feature or m enu option before the camera goes into sle ep mode and the image L CD turns off. Prior to the camer a completely powering itself off due to inactivity, the camer a goes to âsleepâ by turning off the image LCD and either turning off or slowing down other functions to conserve power. Pressing any bu tton on the camer a (except the power switch) âwak esâ the cam era fr om sleep mode. After the camer a goes to sleep, it will power off afte r an additional 5 minutes of inactivity. Once the camera completely powe rs itself off, you must u se the power swit ch to power it on again. The Sleep Timeout se tting determines how quickly the cam era goes into sleep mode when you ar e not usi ng the camera. The default value is 2 m inutes . T o change the Sl eep Timeo ut: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way control ler to highlig ht the Sleep Tim eout option . 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the values until you see the value you want. 3 Press the ri ght (Ex it) s oft key to save the se tting, exit t he D isplay submen u, and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Men u 97 Controlling Cam era Sounds Controlling Camer a Sounds Figu re 7 3: Sound Submenu Use the Sound submenu to control the sounds used on your camer a V olume Level The V olume Level setting allows you to determine the vol ume level of the sounds on your camer a. Th is i n cl ud es b o th th e sy s te m so un ds ( s ee t he ne x t s u bs e ct io n ) a nd t he s ou nd s y ou at t ac h t o im a ge s via the Sound Record button (see âRecording Soundâ on page 26). Y ou can set the Volum e Level from 1 (lowest/softe st) to 7 (highest/loudest). The default value is 4. T o chang e the Volume Lev el: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way control ler, if needed, to highlight the V olume Level option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to scroll t hrough the values until you see the value you want. 3 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to save the setting, exit the Sound subm enu, an d retur n to the Preferen ces me nu. System Sounds The Systems S ounds setting det ermines whethe r or not you will hear the camera âs system sou nds, su ch a s sh ut t er c l ic ks , be e ps , an d so f or th . Th e d ef au lt v al u e i s On ( th a t y o u wi ll h ea r sy s te m so un d s) . T o chang e the setting so that System Sounds are turned Off: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way controller to highlight the System Sounds option. 2 Press the right or left arrow on th e 4-way controlle r to change the value t o Off. 3 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to save the setting, exit the Sound subm enu, an d retur n to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 98 Formatting the Memory Card Figure 7 4: Format Card Confirmation Screen Formatting the Memory Car d Us e t h e Fo r ma t C a rd op ti on t o r ef or m at t he me m or y c a rd in yo ur c am era . R ef or m at ti n g w il l era s e a ll of the files (images) on the mem ory car d, including protect ed files, folders, scripts, and so forth. When you select the F ormat Card option b y pressing the le ft (Format ) soft ke y, you will see a confirmation of your choice to format the me mory card (see Figur e 74). Y ou can either press the middle (F ormat) soft ke y to reforma t the memory car d, or press the right (Cancel) soft key to exit the confirmation screen without r eformatting the memory card and return to the Prefer ences menu. Selecting the PC Connect Mode Figure 75: PC Connect Mode Submenu Use the PC Connect Mode submenu to specify how the camera will appe ar to your computer when connected via the USB interface in PC Connect mode. Y ou can then transfer images from your camera to the computer via the USB interface. T able 63 explains the PC Connect Mode settings and their functions. The curre ntly selected mode is indicated by the checkmark t o the left of it. The default mode is Digita Device. Ta b l e 6 3 : PC Connect Mode Submenu Note: The USB Disk Drive mode will remain set on your camer a only if you power off the camera by using the power switch. By powering off the camer a correctl y, you will not have to repeat the se procedur es when transferring images to your compu ter in the futur e. T o chang e the PC Connect Mode: 1 Press the down or up arr ow on the 4-way controller, if needed, to highlight the P C Connect Mode you want. 2 Press the left (Select) s oft key. T he checkmark move s to the highlighted mode, and you return to the Prefe rences m enu. The camer a is now set to the mode you just selec ted. Setting Function USB Disk Drive The camera is o perate d as a US B Mass S torage De vice and app ears as a disk dr ive conn ected t o the c omputer. Y ou can co py imag es fro m your c amera to the compu ter a s you would from anoth er dis k dri ve. Use this setti ng to conne ct the camer a to a Mac OS 8.6 or bet ter computer , or to a Windows Me, 98, or 20 00 computer. Digita Device (default) Y ou can use software included with your com puter or ca mera t o transf er im ages to the com puter. U se th is setti ng to connec t the camera to a Windows Me, 98, or 2000 computer.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 99 Setting the Da te and Time Figure 76 : Set Date & Time Sub menu Setting the D ate and Time Use the Set Date & Time submenu to set the camer aâs date and time. If you wish to change the format that is used for the date and tim e, see the next subsection, âF ormat Dialog.â Press the up or down arrow on the 4- way controller to scr oll through the list of numbers on the left side of the scree n until you r each the number you want. The number in the curre ntly highlighted field in the center of the scr een (such as the Month field, as shown in the e xample in Figur e 76) changes accordingly. Wh en you have selected the number for the cur rently h ighlighted field, pr ess the r ight arrow on the 4-w ay c ontrol ler to move to the n ext f ield. When yo u have fini shed sett ing th e date and time , press th e right (Exit ) soft ke y to save th e date and tim e settings and return to the Preferen ces me nu. Note: Press the up or down arrow on the 4-way contro ller t o scr oll t hrou gh the num bers on the left side of the scr een. Pre ss the right or left arrow to move bet ween t he date/ time f ields i n the center of the scre en. For exa mp l e, to s et th e da te to Sep t em be r 18, 20 00 an d th e tim e t o 2: 51 pm , as sh ow n i n th e exa mp le in Figure 76: 1 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 9 9 9 9, which sets the Month field in the cen ter of the scr een to 9 (for the month of September). 2 Press the right arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move to th e Day field. 3 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 1 8 18 18 18. 4 Press the right arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move to th e Y ear field. 5 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 00 00 00 00. 6 Press the right arrow on the 4-way contr oller to move to th e Hour field. 7 Press the up or down arrow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 02 02 02 02. 8 Press the right arrow on the 4-way cont roller to move to the Minutes field. 9 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way controller until you highlight 51 51 51 51. Since the am/pm setting is set to pm by default, simply leave the am/pm field as it is. 10 Press the right (Exit) soft k ey to save the date and time settings and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 100 Setting the Image C ounter Figure 7 7: Format Dialog For m a t D ia l o g When you press th e left (Format) soft k ey i n the Set Date & Time submenu, you see the F ormat dialog, which allows you to select fr o m a list of six, pre defined date and time formats. There are thr ee formats which use the 24-hour clock form at, and three form ats which use the 12-hour clock format. The default format for the date and time is MM/DD/YY 12 hr, which means the date is in the Month/ Day/Y ear format, and the time is in the 12-hou r clock format. For ex ample, to set your camera to t he MM/DD/YY 24 hour forma t (so that the date will be in the Month/Day/Y ear format, and the time will be in the 24- hour clock format), follow these steps: 1 Press t he left (F ormat) soft key in the Set Date & Time submenu to move to the F ormat dialog. 2 Press the up or down arr ow on the 4-way control ler to highlight the MM/DD/YY 24 hours format in th e Format dial og. 3 Press the l eft (Sel ect) sof tkey, The checkm ark moves to the highl ighted d ate and time format, and you return to the Set Date & Time submenu. The camer a is now set to the date and time format you just sel ected. Setting th e Image Counter Figur e 78: Image Counter Submenu Use the Image Counter submenu to set how the image counter works. Y ou can set the camera either to restart num bering at 1 (one) each time you de lete all the images fr om your camer a, or to k eep a continuous count of images from th e beginning of the cameraâs us e. T able 64 explains the Image Counter set tings and their functions. The curr ently se lected setting is indicated by the checkmark to the left of it. The defaul t setting is C ontinuous C ounter. Ta b l e 6 4 : Image Cou nter Submenu Setting Function Reset When Empty Each ti me yo u d el ete a ll of th e i mag e s on yo u r c ame ra , t he counter r estarts t he first image captur ed at num ber 1. Continuous Counter (default) The image s are c ounte d accor ding to the hi story o f the camer aâs use . F or exa mple: im age # 4 00 is t he 400t h image to be ca ptured with this cam era.
Appendix A: Usin g the Preferences Menu 101 Naming Y our Camera T o change the Image Counter setting: Note: Once you have changed the Image Counter se tting, yo u must power the camera off and then on again for the new setting to tak e effect. 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way control ler, if needed, to highlight the Image Counter setting you wa nt. 2 Press t he left (Se lect) soft k ey. The checkmark mo ves to the highlighted setting, and you retur n to the Prefe rences menu . 3 Power the camer a off and then on again for the new setting to ta k e effect. Fig ur e 79: Came ra Name Submenu Naming Y our Camer a Use the Camer a Name submenu to ente r a unique name for your camer a. The camera name is used to identify images in the Review mode when you have transmitte d images from one camer a to another. (See âT ransmitting Images Between T wo Camerasâ on page 48 for more information.) The default camera name is Digita Camera. For example, if you transmit images from camera B to camer a A, camera Bâs name appears in the image information area of the Review m ode screen on cam era A when any images fr om camer a B are viewed on camera A. The camera name does not appear in the image information ar ea when you view images in Review mode on the camer a you used to capture them . Note: If a group name is applied to an image, then the group name, rathe r than the camer a na me , ap pe a rs in th e im a ge in f or ma ti o n a re a o f the Review Mode scree n. T o name your camera: 1 Press the left arro w on the 4-way contr oller to delete the lette rs of the def ault camer a name. 2 Press the left (Character Set Icon) soft k ey to toggle through the four char acter sets (capital letters, lowerc ase letter s, numbe rs, or symb ols) until you s ee the char acter set you want to use displayed in the left soft k ey label area on the overlay bar. 3 Press the: î Up or down a rrow on the 4 -way con trolle r to s croll through the li st of charac ters o n the l eft side of the scree n. î Right arrow on the 4- way controller to e nter the sel ected char a cter and advance the insertion point in the center of the scre en. î Left arrow on the 4-way c ontroller to back up and delete a char acter. î Middle (Space) soft key to create a space between wor ds in the camera name. Note: Words wr ap to the nex t line when they get to o long. 4 Press the right (Exi t) soft k ey to save the camer a name you set and re turn to the Preferen ces me nu.
Appendix A: Using the Preferences Menu 102 Selecting a Langua ge Selecting a Language Figur e 80 : Language Subme nu English is set as the default language that is used on the camera. Use the Language submenu to select a language from the list of installed languages. T o select a langu age: 1 Press the down or up arrow on the 4-way control ler to highlight the language setting you want . 2 Press t he left (Sele ct) soft k ey. The checkmark mo ves to the highlighted language, and you return to the Pref erences menu . The s elected l anguage is now us ed on th e camera. Resetting Ca mera Settings Figure 8 1: Re s et S et t in g s C o nf ir m at i on S cre e n Us e the Re se t Set ti n gs op ti o n to res e t al l of the cam e ra set ti n gs (e xc ep t for th e La n gu a ge , t he Format for the Set Date & Time, the PC Connect Mode, and the Video Preferences settings) to their defaults in one step. When you select the Reset Se ttings option by pr essing the le ft (Reset) soft k ey, you will see a confirmation of your choice to res et the cam era settings (se e Figure 81 ). Y ou can either pre ss the middle (Reset) soft k ey to reset the set tings, or press the right (Cancel) soft k ey to exit the confirmation screen without r esetting the settings, and return to the Pre ferences men u.
Appendix B: Camera and Acc essories Informa tion 103 Camera Specifica tions Appendix B: Camer a and Accessories Information Overvie w This appendix covers the following topics: î âCamer a Specificationsâ on page 103 î âBattery Lifeâ on page 106 î âHP Accessories for Powering the Cameraâ on page 10 7 î âUsing the HP A C Power Adapterâ on page 108 î âUsing the HP NiMH Batteries and Rech argerâ on page 108 î âStorage Capacities of Memory Car dsâ on page 109 Camer a Spe cifications The following table lists the specifications for the HP 618 digital camer a. Camera Dimensions 127.5m m (L) x 56.5m m (W) x 71. 5mm (H ) (5.0 in. x 2.8 in. x 2.2 i n.) We i gh t 300 g (10.6 oz.) withou t batteries and m emory car d Zoom î 3x optical, 2x digital zoom î 5.2-16. 5mm î 34-10 8mm (35mm equiv ale nt) î Digital zoom: shoot ing 1.2/1.5/ 2x, playba ck 2x Sens or 2.11 meg apix el, 1/2 .7â C CD Color Depth 30-bi t (10 bit s x 3 co lors) Color Control Full color, B&W (blac k and white), and Sepia Resoluti on î Full Size: 1 600 x 12 00 pixels î 1/4: 800 x 600 pixels
Appendix B: Camera and Acc essories Informa tion 104 Camera Specif ications HP Imaging Te c h n o l o g y î Custom ASIC for higher-perfor mance image processing î Image processing at 220,000,000 ope rations per image in <1/2 second î Excellent en largements at 8â x 10â Lens î PENT AX TM power zoom (9 ele ments in 8 group s; 2 aspheric al elem ents) î f/2.4-f /4.0 î TTL ( through the l ens) au to focu s Image Type Setti ngs î One Shot î Continuous î Timelapse Exposure Compe nsat ion /-2.0 EV ( Exposure V a lue) i n .5 st eps Shutter Spe ed 1/1000 to 4 sec onds Sensit ivity Auto, Fixed (100 or 200 ISO speed) AE M eter ing TTL AE (auto expos ur e) met ering with choi ce of Aver age, Center-W eighted, or Spot Viewfi nder î Separate zooming optic al viewfinder with diopter adjustment î Diopter adjustment from -3m -1 to 1 m -1 î Field of view : 85% (at 3m or 9.8 ft .) Foc us î TTL cont rast-detectio n auto foc us î Normal: 0.5m (1 .64 ft.) to in finity î Macro: 0.1m (0.3 3 ft.) to 0.6m ( 1.97 f t.) î Infinity î Manual focus: 0.1m (0.33 ft.) to infinity Flash î Built-in flash î Flash modes: Auto, Auto wit h Red-Eye Reduction, Forced On, Forced On with R ed-Eye R eductio n, Force d Off, Night, and Night with Red-Eye Reduction î Effective r ange: 0.3m (0.98 ft.) - 5.4m (18 ft.) at 5.2mm 0.3m (0 .98 f t.) - 3.7m ( 12 ft .) at 16.5 m
Appendix B: Camera and Acc essories Informa tion 105 Cam era Specification s Exposure Settings Auto, Landscape Program , Portrait Pr ogram, Action Progr am, Aperture Priority, and Shutter Priority Memory Card CompactFlash TM card (T ype I or T ype II, Power level 0) shipped with camera Timer î 10-secon d delay î 3-second delay with HP Remote Contr ol (included) Sound Capture and play b ack sound with 45 seconds of recor ding per image White Balance Auto, Daylight , T ungsten, and Fluo rescen t Interfaces î USB connection to computers î HP JetSend and Digita infrar ed protoc ols î NTSC/PAL TV connections î Orientation sensor for automatic image ro tation on TV , computers, and camer as Ca mera Op era ti ng System Flashpoint Digita Image L CD î 2â low te mper ature poly-s ilicon T FT color LC D with 130,338 p ixels î Adjustable brightnes s control î Displays thumbnails or full scr een images Image Control Functi ons î Create slides hows of images î Send images via HP JetSend infrared techn ology to JetSend-c apable pr inters î Delete, protec t, group, and categorize images î Waterm ark images with Date and Time, T ext, or Logo stamps Status L C D Displays bat tery status, flash mode, timer mode , auto focus m ode, and pictur es re mainin g Powe r î 4 AA non-rechar geable batterie s (included) î Optional: A C power adapt er, or re chargeabl e NiMH batter ies and recha rger
Appendix B : Camera and Accesso ries Information 106 Battery Life Battery L ife Caution: Use onl y AA ph oto l ithium, high dr ain alkaline, or NiMH batter ies in the HP 618 digital camera. Do no t mix batterie s of different types . Replace all 4 batteries at the same time; do not repl ace the batterie s individually. Always follow all of the manufactu rerâs instructions on the battery package whe n handling, recharg ing, or disposing of batteries. The life of the batteries y ou use in your HP 618 camera dep ends on how you use t he camer a and on the type of batte ries you use. The following table pro vides estimates of battery life in a variety of usage scenarios, including: î Light use in Capture mode (image L CD off, no flash) î Moder ate use in Capture m ode (some use of image L CD and flash) î Leaving the camera in the idle state (image L CD off) î Using the camer a in Review mode î Using the camer a in live view of Capture mode (image L CD on) T o preserve batte ry life: î Limit the use of the image L CD, or turn it off. î Limit the use of the flash , or turn it off. î Set the camer a to take lower resolution and/or lower quality images. (See âFile Settings Sub- menuâ on page 53.) Higher resolution and higher quality images take the camer a longer to process and com press. î Limit operating the came ra in cold tem per ature conditions. Oper ating the camera at colder temper atur es re sults in short er battery l ife. î Always repl ace all 4 ba tteries at the same t ime. One low-char g ed b attery will re duce b attery l ife for all batteri es in th e camer a. This is tr ue of both non -rech argea ble and re chargea ble batte ries. Note: An AC powe r adapter provides power to the camer a â it does not rechar ge the batte ries. î Use the HP-appr oved A C power adapter with your camera instead of batter ies, or use rechar ge- a b le b at t e r i e s . T h e f o l l o w i n g s ec t i o n l i s t s t h e H P - a p p ro v e d a c c e s s o ri es y o u c a n u s e f o r p o w e r i n g the camer a. Usage Scenario Photo Lithium NiMH High Drain Alkaline Light Capture Mode (Shots) 81 0 450 230 Mode rate Ca pture Mode (S hots) 500 280 15 0 Idle State (Minutes) 600 300 300 Review M ode (M inutes) 220 120 90 Live View Captur e Mode (Minutes) 120 85 45
Appendix B: Camer a and Accessories Information 10 7 HP Accessories for Powering the Camera HP Accessories for Powering the Camer a Caution: Using a non-HP AC power adapte r will void your camer aâs warranty. Y ou can purchase any of the following accessories for power ing the camera, as well as ot her camera accessories, fr om the HP Shopping Village website at: w ww . h ps h o p pi n g .c o m . www.hp shoppi ng.com. www.hp shoppi ng.com. www.hp shoppi ng.com. (C l ic k t h e Digital Photogr aphy Digital Photogr aphy Digital Photogr aphy Digital Phot ography li n k on t he ma i n we b pa g e . T h e n cli ck t h e Digital Photography A ccessor ies Digital Pho tography A ccessories Digital Pho tography A ccessories Digital Pho tography A ccessories link on the second web pag e.) This table of power accessories was cur rent at the time this manual was publishe d. For t he most up-to-date accessories list, refe r to the HP Shopping Village website. HP Model Number Accessory Specifications A610 HP A C Power Adapt er (S e e th e n ex t se c t io n , âU s i ng the HP AC Power Adapterâ) Input: 100-240 V olts A C Output : 9 V olts DC, 1. 33 A mps, 12 W atts AA30 HP NiMH Battery Rech arger and 4 NiMH Batteries (See âU sing the HP NiMH Batteries and Rechargerâ on page 1 08) HP NiMH Ba ttery Rechar ger: Recharging time is appro ximately 3.5 hours Input: 9 V olts D C Output (charg ing volt age): 8.4 V olts DC HP NiMH Ba ttery: 1.2 V olts DC (e ach)
Appendix B: Camer a and Accessories Information 10 8 HP Accessories for Powering the Camer a Using the HP AC Power Adapt er Figur e 8 2: Connecting t he HP AC Power Adapterâs Cable to the C amer a T o connect the HP AC Power Adapter t o the camera : 1 Plug the A C power adapter into a power sour ce, such as a wall outlet or power strip. 2 Open the door to the connector comp artment on the camer a. The connector compartm ent is located on the far right side of the camera when y ou are looking at the fr ont of the camer a. 3 Connect the round end of th e AC power adapterâs cable to the middle (power adapter) connector in the camer a (see Figur e 82). Note: Use the HP-approved A C power adapter as the power source for the camer a during power-intensive operations, like when you are using the camer aâs image L CD for an extended period of time. Using the HP NiMH Batteries and R echarger If you purchase the HP NiMH Battery Rec harger, which inclu des 4 rech argeable NiMH batt eries, please no te the follow ing: î Before you install the batteries in the HP 618 camer a, you must charge all 4 NiMH batteries in the HP NiMH Battery Re charger per the in structi ons that came with the Batt ery Recha rger. î Y ou must r echarg e all 4 NiMH batteries afte r fully dr ai ning them four t imes for the batte ries to reach the ir optimum capaci ty and perfor mance. î Alway s recharge all 4 NiMH ba tteri es at th e same ti me. One low -charged batter y will red uce the battery life for all 4 batter ies in the camer a . î Do not store the b atteries in the HP NiMH Battery Rec harger for an extended period of time if it is not necessary. î Do not over-charge th e batteries. Disconnecting and reconnecting the HP NiMH Batte ry Recharger to A C power frequently, without dischar ging the batteries, may cause o ver-char ging. î Do not expose the NiMH batte ries to heat. Permane nt damage will r esult if the batter ies are exposed to tempe ratu res above 110° F or 43° C. Always store the batteries in a cool location. î After long-term stor age, recharge all 4 NiMH batteries be fore use. This is because the battery cells discharge ove r time. (At room te mper ature, NiMH batter ies gener ally discharge at about 1% per day.)
Appendix B: Camera and Acc essories Information 109 Storage Capaciti es of Memor y Cards Storage Capacities of Memory Car ds The following table lists the number of images an 8 MB, 16 MB, and 32 MB CompactF lash memory card can store, dep ending on the JPEG quality level or TIFF se tting at which the camer a is set. Note: T o make the most memory available on a memory card, r eformat the car d either on the camera (using the F ormat Card option in the Preferen ces me nu â see page 68), or thr ough the computer (using USB Disk Drive mode, reformat the card as you would a disk drive â see page 69). The number of images noted in this tab le are aver ages. In particular, the number of images per memory card can vary bas ed on the JPEG compre ssed file size of each image. Resolu tion JPEG-Good Quality Level JPEG-Better Quality Level JPEG-Best Quality Level TIFF 8 MB Card Full Size 27 14 7 1 1/4 82 50 28 5 16 MB Ca rd Full Size 56 29 15 2 1/4 165 101 57 10 32 MB Card Full Si ze 113 60 30 5 1/4 332 204 115 21
Appendix C: Product Warranties 110 Limited Pro duct Warranty Appendix C: Product W arranties Limited Pr oduct W arr anty A. Extent of Limited Warr anty 1 Hewlett-Packar d ( HP) warrants to th e end-user customer that th e HP products spe cified above will be free fr om defects in material and workmanship for t he duration spec ified above, which durat ion begins on the date of pur chase by the cu stomer. 2 For softwar e products, HPâs limite d warranty applies onl y to a failure to e xecute pr ogram ming instructions. HP does not warr ant that the oper ation of any product will be uninterrupted or error free. 3 HPâs limited warr anty covers only th ose defects which arise as a result of normal us e of the product, and does not cover any other problems, including those which arise as a result of: a. Improper maintenance or modification; b. Softwar e, media, parts, or s upplies not provided or supported b y HP; or c. Operation out side the productâs s pecification. 4 If HP receives, during the applicable warr anty period, notice of a defect in any product which is covered by HP âs warranty, HP shall either repair or re place the defective produc t, at HPâs option. HP Product Dur a tion of Limited War ranty HP 618 digital camera 1 year Comp actFlash mem ory car d 1 year HP Photo Imaging Softwar e 90 Days
Appendix C: Product W arranties 111 Limited Product W arranty 5 If HP is unable to r epair or replace , as applicable, a defective pr oduct which is covered by HPâs warranty, HP sh all, within a reasonable time after be ing notified of the defect, refund th e purchase pr ice for the pr oduct. 6 HP sha ll ha ve no obli gatio n to repair , repla ce, or refu nd unti l the c usto mer retur ns the defec tive product to HP . 7 Any replacement product may be either new or lik e-new, pro vided that it has functionality at least equal to that of the product b eing replaced. 8 HP product s may contain remanufa ctured parts, comp onents, or materials equivalen t to new in performance. 9 HPâs lim ite d wa rranty is vali d i n a ny co unt ry w here t he co vered HP p roduc t i s di str ibut ed b y HP. Contracts for additional warr anty services, such as on-site service, are available from any authorized HP service f acility in countries where the product is distribu ted by HP or by an authorized importer. B. Limitations of Warr anty 1 TO THE EXTENT ALL OWED BY L OCAL LA W , NEITHER HP NOR ITS THIRD P A RTY SUPPLIERS MAKE ANY O THER WARRANTY OR C ONDITION OF ANY KIND, W HETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT T O THE HP PRODUCTS, AND SPECIFIC ALL Y DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY , S A TISFA CTORY QUALITY , AND FITN ESS FOR A PARTICUL AR PURP OSE. C. Limitations of Liabi lity 1 T o the extent allowed by local law, the remedies provided in this Wa rranty Stateme nt are the customerâs sole and exclusive r emedies. 2 TO THE EXTENT ALLO WED BY L OCAL LAW , EXCEPT FOR THE OBLIGA TIONS SPECIFICALL Y SET FORTH IN THIS W ARR ANTY ST A TEMENT , IN NO EVENT SHALL HP OR ITS THIRD P ARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT , INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT A L, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA GES, WHETHER BASE D ON C ONTRACT , T ORT, OR ANY O THER LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER ADVISED OF THE POS SIBILITY OF SUCH D AMAGES.
Appendix C: Product Wa rranties 112 Hewlett-Packard Y ear 2000 Warr anty D. Local Law 1 This Warr anty Statement gives the customer specific legal rights. The customer may also have other rights which vary from state to state in the United States, from province to province in Canada, and from country to country elsewhere in the wor ld. 2 T o th e ex t en t tha t th is Warr an ty St at e me n t i s i nc on si s te n t w it h loc a l l aw , t hi s Warra n ty St at e me nt shall be deemed modified to be consistent with such local law. Under such local law, certain disclaimers and limitations of this Warr an ty Statement may not apply to the customer. Fo r examp le, some states i n the Un ited Stat es, as well as some g overnme nts outsid e the U nited States (inclu ding provinces in Canada), may: a. Precl ude the disclaimers and limita tions in this W arranty Statement from limiting the sta tutory rights of a consumer (e.g. the United Kingdom); b. Otherwise r estrict the ability of a man ufactur er to enfor ce such discla imers or limi tations; or c. Grant the customer additional warranty rights, specify the duration of implied warr a nties which the manufactur er cannot disclaim, or not allow limitations on the durat ion of implied warranties. 3 FOR CONSUMER TRANSAC TIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND, THE T ERMS IN THIS W ARRANTY ST A T EMENT , EXCEPT T O THE EXTENT LA WFULL Y PERMITTED, DO NO T EXCLUDE, RESTRICT , OR MODIFY , AND ARE IN ADDITION TO, THE MANDA TORY ST A TUT ORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE T O THE SALE OF THE HP PRODU CTS T O SUCH CUSTOMERS . Hewlett- Pack ard Y ear 2000 W arr anty For Consu mer Products Distributed Through Authorized Resellers Subject to all of the terms and limitations of the HP Limited Warr anty Statement pro vided with this HP Product, HP warr ants that this HP Product will be able to accur ately pr ocess date data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing and sequencing) fr om, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000, including leap year calculat ions, when used in accordance with the Pr oduct documentation pro vided by HP (including any instructions for installing patches or upgr ades), provided th at all other produc ts (e.g. hardwar e, software, firmwar e) used in combination with such HP Pr oducts(s) prope rly exchange date data with it. The dur ation of the Y ear 2000 warranty ex tends through Januar y 31, 2001.
Appendix D: P roduct Safety and Regulator y Information 113 Safety Information Appendix D: Product Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Information Using Batteries The HP 618 digital camer a comes with four non-r echargeable batter ies. Do not attempt to r echarg e these batter ies. D o not mix old and new batteries or b atteries of different t ypes. Fol low the battery manufact urerâs saf ety inst ructions . Disposing or Recycling of Batteries Follow the battery manuf acturerâs disposal and r ecycling instructions or the guidel ines that are recomme nded for y our a rea. Do not inciner ate or p uncture batteri es. Using an A C Power Adapter Use only the HP-app roved A C power adapter. Failure to do so could cause damage or destr oy the camera and cause a fir e. Use of a non-HP A C power adapter will also void your came raâs warr anty. Mercury Disclosur e Statement The image L CD of the HP 618 digital camera contains me rcury. Disposal of this m aterial may be regulated due to environm ental considerations. F or disposal or recycling information, please contact your local autho rities or EIA: w ww . e ia e . o r g www.ei ae.org www.ei ae.org www.ei ae.org.
Appendix D: Product Safety and Regul atory Information 114 Regulatory Notices Regulatory Notices U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of th e FC C rules. Oper ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this devi ce may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interfe rence th at may cause undesired operation. Canada This digital apparatus does not e xceed the Class B limits for radio noise e missions from digital apparatu s as set out in the interfer ence-causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatu s, ICES-003 of the De partment of Comm unications. Cet appareil numé rique res pecte les limites de bruits r adioélectriques ap plicables aux appar eils numériques de Classe B pr escrites dans la no rme sur les maté riels br ouilleurs: Appareils Numériques, NMB-003 édicté e par le ministre de la Communicat ion.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 115 Glossary Glossary 4-way controller A button on the back of the c amera that has four directional arr ows (up, down, right, and left) th at you can press to naviga te the menu s and imag es displa yed in th e image L CD. AC power adapter Alternating Current powe r adapter. A power tr a nsformer that provide s power to the digital camer a and preserve s batter y life. (Note that t he A C power adap ter does not re charg e the ba tteries.) Action Program exposure mode The exposur e mode setting in the Photo Ass ist menu that automatically optimizes the camera settings for taking pictures of subjects in ac tion, such as people playing sports. See also âexposur e modesâ on page 116. AE Metering Automatic Exposure Metering. A setting in the Ph oto Assist menu that deter mines the area of the scene used to set the e xposure for a capturing an image. aperture The variable diameter open ing in a camera lens that l ets you control th e intensity of light reaching the fi l m o r CCD . A c a me ra' s a pe rt u re a n d s h ut t er sp e ed d et er m in e a p h ot o âs ex p os ur e. A pe rt u re di am e te rs a re expr essed in f- number s â the large r the f-nu mber, the small er the lens openin g. Dividing the foc al lengt h of a lens by a specific f-numbe r gives its apertur e diameter. See also âC CDâ on page 116,âf-numberâ on page 117, and âfocal lengthâ on page 117. Aperture Prior ity (Av) exposure mode The exposur e mode setting in the Ph oto Assist menu that le ts you select an aper ture, and the c amera automatical ly selects the shutte r speed. See also âape rture â on page 115, âexposur e modesâ on page 116, âshutterâ on page 121, and âShutter Priority (T v) exposure modeâ on page 121. Auto exposure mode The expo sure mode se tting in t he Phot o Assist menu where al l setti ngs are at th eir defau lts and c annot be changed. See also âexposure modesâ on page 116. Auto Focus mode The defaul t focus mode of the ca mer a that automati cally focuses the c a mera lens on a pictur e subject. Y ou can change the focus mode t o Manual Focus in the Photo Assist menu. S ee also âManual Focus m odeâ on page 119. auto focus range This focus range is set b y pressing a status L CD button on top of the camera and determines whether the focus is set for infinity (pictur e of a distant subject), for macro (a clos e-up picture of a sub ject), or for normal focus range. auto focus range button A status L CD button on the top of the camer a that you pr ess to set the aut o focus range. auto focus range icon An icon that appears in the status L CD and shows the cameraâs curr ent auto focus r ange. automatic exposure (AE) The camera fea ture that calculate s the necessary shutter spee d, aperture, and ISO speed to get the best possible ex posure. automatic shutof f A featur e that automati cally shuts off the c a mer a after a certa in per iod in ord er to p reserve batte ry power . Av See â Aperture Priority (Av) exposure modeâ on page 115. battery status The amount of power that r emains in the batter y.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 116 Glossary battery status icon An icon that appears in the status L CD that indicates the amount of power left in the batteries. camera mode dial The dial on the top of the camer a that allows you to choose one of four operational modes (Captur e, Review, Playback, or PC Connect mode) for the camer a. Captur e mode An operational mode you use to tak e pictures (or âcaptur e imagesâ) with the camera. See also âcamer a mode dialâ on page 116. CCD Charge Coupled Device. An integrated micr o -electronic, light-sensing de vice built into a digital camera. The CCD image s ensor is a silicon chip containing hundreds-of-thousands to a fe w million light-sensitive cells that conve rt light to electricity. A C C D sensor, comb ined with the di gital image processin g capabil ity, is the functional equivalent of film in a digital camer a. CCD element A single photosensitive area within a C CD array that is able to record a unique image detail. Also known as a photosite. See also âCCDâ on page 116. Continuo us image ty pe Th e i m ag e t yp e s e tt i ng on th e c am e ra t ha t ca pt u res a s e ri es of i ma ge s i n rap i d s uc ce ss i o n. Th is im a ge ty pe is recommended for capturing action shots. See also âimage typeâ on page 118. default A setting tha t the camer a automatically uses until y ou change it. Delete A command associated with a soft k ey that is used to erase mark ed images or the current image fr om the memory card. digital zoom Refers to digital cropping of the image, giving the appearance of greate r zoom. After the optical zoom is at its ma ximum set ting, you c an digital ly zoom in three s teps (1.2 x, 1.5x , and 2.0x). The image LCD must be on in order for the digital zoom to operate . Note that, in digital z oom mode, enlargement is accomplished without changes in lens configuration. Since the lens is not involved in digital zoom, the changes appear only in the image LCD; they are not evident though the viewfinder. See also âoptical zoomâ on page 120. diopter cont rol A small dial next to the viewfinder that you can turn to adjust the focus of t he picture su bject in the view- finder. Note that th e diopter contr ol has no effect on the image y ou capture , however. DISPLAY button A button on the back of the cam era th at turns the image L CD on and off in Capture mode, and turns the overlay bars on and off in Playback mode. This button is inactive in Review and PC Connect modes. See also âimage LCDâ on page 118. exposure mo des The modes that you can sel ect in the Ph oto Assist menu to set the camer a exposur e to prope rly capture images, including: Auto, Landscape Program, Portr ait Program, Action Progr am, Aperture Priority (Av), and Shutter Prior ity (T v). See also â Action Program e xposure mode â on page 115, â Aperture Priority (Av) exposure modeâ on page 115, â Auto exposure mode â on page 115, âLandscape Progr am exposure modeâ on page 119, âPortrait Program exposure mode â on page 120 , and âShutter Priority (T v) exposure modeâ on page 121. file name A set of letters, num bers, and symbols assigned to a file to distinguish it fro m other files on the computer or in the camer a.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 11 7 Glossary file size The number of bytes in a file. The file size for images saved on a digital camer a is determined by the resolution of the camera's CCD and the amount of image data compr ession. Y ou can usually select the amount of compress ion on the camera and again in the compu ter software that p rocesses the images. Note that if you compr ess an image on the camer a and in the software, the compression is cumu lative. file typ e The digital format in which a file is saved. Computer progr ams can insert or impor t files th at wer e saved in a file type that the pr ogram su pports. Comm on file types for images include JPEG (Joint Ph oto Expert Group form at) and TIFF (T agged Image File F ormat). See also âJPEGâ on page 118 and âTIFFâ on page 122. firmwar e The low-level softwar e that runs in a digital camer a and controls the functionality and us er interface on the camer a. firmware update The process of updating to a new firmwar e version on the digital camer a. flash A brief, intense burst of l ight from an elect ronic flash unit on a camer a. Use flash when the lighting in a scene is inadequate for taking pictures. flash mode This mode is set by pr essing a status L CD button on top of the camera and determ ines how the flash will operate. flash mode button A status L CD button on the top of the camer a that you pr ess to set th e flash mode. flash mo de icon(s) An icon or set of icons in the status L CD that shows the current flash mode. f-number The f-number (also call ed the f-stop) is r elated to the diameter of the lens apertur e â dividing the focal length of t he lens by th e f-nu mber s pecifi es the aper ture di ameter. The f -number is us ed in conjun ction with the shutter s peed to set th e exposure . A standard set of f- numbers is comm only used in camer a lenses. A lower f-numbe r, such as f/2.8, indicates a larger apertu re, which lets in mor e light. A higher f-numb er, such as f/16, indicates a smaller aperture, which lets in less light. See also âapertureâ on page 115 and âfocal lengthâ on page 117. focal length The distance between the ce nter of the lens (mor e precise ly, its rear nodal point) and the C CD sensor in digital cameras wh en the lens is focuse d on infinity. The focal length is specified in millimeter s. focus Refers to adjusting the le ns in a digital camera in order to pla ce a clear image on the plane of the CCD sensor. focus mo de See â Auto Focus modeâ on page 115 and âManual Focus modeâ on page 119. focus range See âauto focus rangeâ on page 115. four-way cont roll er See â4-way cont roller â on page 115. f-stop See âf-numberâ on page 117. gro uped i mages A number of image s that ar e bundled togeth er. Y ou can gr oup images in the Edit menu of R eview mo de. Grouped images appe ar in a folder on the memory card whe n the camer a is connected to a computer.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 118 Glossary HP Im aging T echnol ogy State-of-the-art image pr ocessing technology develope d by HP that captures sharp , colorful images with exceptional levels of detail, individually optimizes every image, and produces great detail in highlights and shadows. icon A picture on an L CD, computer screen, or printed on a device th at represe nts a specific setting. Icons on a digital camera âs L CD communicate t he camer a's status, such as particular settings that have been made for taking a pictur e. See also âL CDâ on page 119. imag e The electronic version of a photogr aph as it is stored in a digital camera, computer, or other electro nic medium. Digital camera s capture and store an image when you tak e a picture. See also âpictur eâ on page 120 and âphotoâ on page 120. image L CD The Liquid Crystal Display on t he back of the camera. The image LCD and its accompanying buttons and soft k eys let you view and work with images on the camera . See also âDISPLA Y buttonâ on page 116, âMENU buttonâ on page 119, and âsoft k eysâ on page 122. image size See âsizeâ on page 122. image type The type of image the camera will capture . There are thre e image types: One Shot, Continuous, and Timelapse. Y ou can change the image type by pressing the left soft k ey while in Capture mode. Se e also âContinuous image typeâ on page 116, âOne Shot image typeâ on p age 119, and âTimelapse image typ eâ on page 123. image type icon An icon that appears on the left side of the bottom overlay bar in the image L CD and shows the image type set ting in Capture mode. image type soft key The left soft k ey on the back of the camera that y ou press to se t the image type in C apture mode. infrared A type of connection that allows images to be tr ansmitted between the camer a and another device (such as a p rint er) w itho ut co nnect ing w ires wh en th e infra red wind ow on the ca mera is l ine d-up with an inf rared sensor on the other device. See also âJetSendâ on page 118. infrar ed window The window on the front of the camera that uses the HP JetSend infr ared technology. See also âJetSendâ on page 118. interval The time betwee n images being captur ed for the Timel apse image type. ISO num ber The International Organization f or Standardizati on r ati ng for film or CCD sens itivity. A hi gher ISO number means less light is needed to tak e a picture. C C Ds in digital camer as are rated in terms of ISO numbers. ISO is not an acronym; it is derived from the Gre ek âisosâ, meaning equal. See also âCCDâ on page 116. JetSend A protocol devel oped by HP for sending image data from one device to another without using any connecting cables b etween the de vices. JetSen d uses infr ared tech nology to tr ansmit images from the camer a to a printe r for printing . JPEG A compressed image file format developed by the Joint Photo Exper t Group. Its str engths are very small file sizes a nd fast display r ates. (It is 7 to 1 0 times f aster tha n some oth er imag e file form ats.) See also âfile typeâ on page 117 and âTIFFâ on page 122.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 119 Glossary Landscape Progr am exposure mode The exposur e mode setting in the Photo Ass ist menu that automatically optimizes the camera settings for taking pictures of distant subjects, such as landscape scenes. See also âexposure modesâ on page 116. LC D Liquid Crystal Display. A display technology that is used on digital c ameras. An L CD displays numeric characters and/or icons to communicate the camer a's status, such as the particular settings that you have made for taking a picture. See also âimage L CDâ on page 118 and âstatus LCDâ on page 122. LED Light Emitting Diode. An indicator on the camer a that shows the status of som e feature or p rocess by either lighting solid or blinking on and off. lens One or mor e pieces of opt ical glass or similar material designed to collect and focus r a ys of light to form a sharp image on the film (for tr aditional film cameras) or the C CD (for digital camer as). Lenses are r ated accordin g to their maximum a pertur e (smallest possible f- number) an d their foca l length (us ually specified in millimeters). See also âapertur eâ on page 115, âCCDâ on page 116, and âf-numberâ on page 117. live view Using t he imag e LCD on the back of th e camera to vi ew th e picture subject before taking t he pict ure. Manual F ocus mode The focus mode th at you set in the Photo Assist me nu that lets y ou control the focus dist ance of the lens when capturing images. See also â Auto Focus mode â on page 115. marking Specifying an image or several images to which you will then apply a single action. memory car d A small remov able, non-volatile stor age medium for digital information that acts as the film in a digital camera . The memory c ard store s the images so you can pr ocess or view them at a later time. Mak e sur e th e ca me ra i s p o we re d off any time you re move the memory car d from the camera. memory car d access LED The LED that blinks to indicate the memory card is in use. See also âLEDâ on page 119. memory car d door The door on the side of the camer a that you open to acc ess the memory c ard in the camer a. MENU button A bu tton on t he bac k of the came ra that let s yo u vie w me nus o n th e imag e LCD in the C aptu re, R eview , or Playback mode. See also âmodesâ on page 119. menus These appear on the image L CD when you press the MENU button in the C apture , Review, or Playback mode and are used to choose and se t camera settings. micropho ne The audio device on the front of the cam era us ed to recor d sound that is then attached to an image. mode dial See âcamer a mode dialâ on page 116. modes These set the way the camer a functions. There are four operational modes: Capture, Review, P layback, and PC Connect. NTSC c onne ction National T elevision Standards Committee connection. The video (TV) connection standard used in the United Sta tes and Jap an. One Sh ot image type The image type setting on the camera th at captures one image at a time. See also âimage typeâ on page 118.
HP 618 Digital Camera Userâs Guide 120 Glossary optical re solution The true resolution of an imaging device, and the r esolution at which the device capture s images. Se e also âresolutionâ on page 121. optical zo om The process of changing the field of view and magnification of the lens by moving different len s groups within the lens to change its overall focal length. See also âdigital zoomâ on page 116. orientation senso r An electro-m echanical device in the camer a that determ ines whether the camer a i s being held horizontally or vertically, and which side is u p. The camera use s t he data from this sensor to make sure the image is displayed right side up in t he image L CD, regardless of the camer a position when the image was captured. overlay bars Opaque or translucent information b ars that appear on the image L CD. PA L c o n n e c t i o n Phase Alternating Li ne connection. The vi deo (TV) connection used in Europe. PC Connect mo de An operational mode y ou use to contro l the camer a via a computer (PC or Macintosh) t hat you have connected to the camera. Y ou use this mode to downl oad images from the camer a to the computer. See also âcamera mode dialâ on page 116. PCMCIA adapter Personal Computer Manufacturers Common Interface Agreement adapter. A small, electronic card that fits in a PCMCIA slot and controls or communicates with an exte rnal device. For digital cameras, this is usually an adapter into which you can plug the memory car d from the c amera for t ransferr ing images to your comp uter. PCMCIA slot The slot in a computer that holds a PC MCIA card. A PCMC IA slot is usually found in laptop comp uters. photo The printed version of an image. See also âimageâ on page 118 and âpictureâ on page 120. photo type See âimage typeâ on page 118. photosite See âCCD el ementâ on page 11 6. pictur e Picture refers to the original composition when capturing an image with a digital cam era. See also âimageâ on page 118. pictures remaini ng indicato r A numeric indicator in the status L CD that shows how many more images you can captu re and store on the memory card. pixel Picture e lement. The small est elem ent that can be assigned an inde pendent c olor and intensit y and d is pl a ye d on a co m pu te r mo n it o r s c ree n or o n an LCD . A p ix el i s a do t wi th e it h er a sq u ar e o r re ct a ng ul a r shape. Digital images displayed on a monitor screen or L CD are composed of thousands of pixels. Playback mode An operational mode y ou can use to view the capture d images on the camer aâs image L CD. Y ou can view images as full-sized stills, play back timelapse and gr ouped photo sequences, and cre ate slideshows of the images. See als o âcamer a mode dialâ on page 116 andâslideshowâ on page 122. Portrait Progr am exposure mode The exposur e mode setting in the Photo Ass ist menu that automatically optimizes the camera settings for portrait photogr aphy. See als o âexposur e modesâ on page 116.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 121 Glossar y power switch The switch on the camer a that turns it on or off. preview See âlive viewâ on page 119. protect Marking an image so that no one can delete it. record button Se e â so u nd rec o rd bu tt onâ o n p ag e 12 2. red -e ye Refers to a humanâs or animalâs eye s that appear red in captu red images, which is cause d by using the flash on a camera. red-eye reduction A flash mode you can use to minimize red-eye in capture d images of humans or animals. The came ra does this by flashing twice. See also âflash modeâ on page 11 7. ref or ma t Reformatting completely er ases the memory car d, including all images (protected and unprotect ed) and all o ther f iles. re mote contr ol A d ev ic e us ed to tr i gg e r t he sh ut t er fr om a l oc at i o n t ha t i s re m ot e f ro m t he ca m era , s u ch a s wh en yo u w a nt to tak e a self portr ait or want to b e in a grou p pictur e. When you pr ess the HP R emote Controlâs trigger, the image capture is delayed by a length of time specified by the timer mode. See also âtimer modeâ on page 123. res ol ut ion The measure of how many pixels ar e displayed or printed. The r esolution of a CCD is determined by multiplyin g the X pi xels by t he Y pix els. The greate r the r esolution, t he gre ater the amount of detai l visible, and the lar ger the file size. The final ou tput device (computer monitor or p rinter) on which an image is displayed or printed determines the actual resolution you w ill see. F or example, if you c apture an image at 1600 x 1200 pix els, and your printer is capable of printing at only 300 dpi (dots per inch), the printed image will be no more than 300 dpi. rev ie w The process of u sing the image L CD to view the images stored on the memo ry card. Review mode An operational mode you can use to sort and edit the captured images on the camer a. See also âcamer a mode dialâ on page 116. self-timer See âtimerâ on page 123. Send but ton A button on the back of the cam era you can use to send images fr om the camer a to a printer via the HP JetSend infrared t echnology. The Send button is active in the Capture, Review, and Playback modes. See also âJetS endâ on page 11 8. shutter A set of surfaces th at block light from the film or C CD in a camera. W hen the sh utter is rele ased, the surfaces op en for a pr edefined time , admitting a measur ed amount of light. See also âC CDâ on page 116. Shutter Prior ity (T v) exposure mode An exposure m ode setting in the Photo Assist m enu that lets yo u select a shutte r speed, and the camera automatically selects the apertur e setting. See also âaperture â on page 115, âA perture P riority (Av) exposure modeâ on page 115, âshutterâ on page 121, and âshut ter speedâ on page 122.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 122 Glossary shutter rel ease button A two-stage button on the top of the camer a that is enabled in Captur e mode. Pr essing this button halfway down allows the camer a to mak e various settings, such as Auto F ocus Lock. Pressing this button all the way down in one motion allows the camer a to mak e various settings and to capture one or more images, depending on the image type selected. Th e camera mak es a shutter sound as each image is captured. shutter speed The amoun t of time the shu tter stay s open when y ou pres s the shu tter rele ase button . size The actual height and width of an image when you have saved the image. Y ou wil l not see the image size change in the imag e L CD after you save it. sleep mode A fea ture that conserves bat tery power by au tomatically shutting off the image L CD after a period of time (default 2 minutes) t hat the camer a hasnât been used. slide sho w The sequential viewing of images stor ed on the camer a's memory card in Playb ack mode. soft k eys Three but tons that are locate d just below the image L CD on the back of the camer a. The soft k e ys let you work with images and menu s on the image L CD. See also âimage L CDâ on page 118. sound record button A button on the back of the cam era th at allows you to recor d sound that is then attached to an image. speak er The audio device on the back of the camera th at allows you to hear the cam eraâs sy stem sounds (shutte r clicks, beeps, and so forth). It a lso allows you to hear sound that was previous ly recor ded and attached to an image via the cameraâs sound r ecord button. status L CD The Liquid Crystal Display on the top of th e camera that u ses a combination of numeric char acters and icons to communicate the cam era's statu s, such as particular camer a settings. status L CD buttons The three buttons beneath the status L CD that you can press to set the fla sh mode, timer mode, and auto focus range . See also âauto focus range buttonâ on page 115, âflash mode buttonâ on page 117, and âtimer mode buttonâ on page 123. strobe See âflashâ on page 117. subje ct The main object, person, or sce ne that you want to captu re with your camer a. telephoto A lens that has a longer focal length and narrower field of view (includes less subject ar e a) than a normal lens. A telephoto le ns make s a subject appear lar ger and/or closer than does a normal lens at t he same camera-to-subject distance. See also âwide angleâ on page 124. thumbnail A miniature of the original image that is lar ge enough to allow you t o identify the image, but is small enough to allow you to see multiple images in a single software window. Thumbnails are use d to display on-scre en images of the contents of a di gital cameraâs mem ory card. TIFF T agged Image File Format. A bitmappe d file format for images. TIFF does not compr ess the image. TIFF files are supported by many pr o grams and can also be used on many types of computers. See also âfile typeâ on page 117 and âJPEGâ on page 118.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 123 Glossary Timelapse image type The image typ e setting on the camer a that captu res a s low proces s with a series of images. See als o âimage typeâ on page 118. timer A device that lets you tak e a self portrait or be in a grou p picture. Wh en you pre ss the shutter release button or the HP Re mote Controlâs t rigger, the image captur e is delayed by a length of time specified by the t imer del ay. See also â timer delay. â timer delay The amount of time the came ra waits to tak e the pictu re when using th e timer. timer LED The Light Emitting Diode on the front of the c amera th at flashes to indicate the countdown of the timer delay when you h ave set the timer an d then pre ssed the shu tter re lease butt on or the HP Remote Controlâs t rigger. timer mode This mode is set by pr essing a status L CD button on top of the camera and dete rmines how the shutte r rele ase butto n will be tri ggere d. timer mode butt on The status L CD button on the top of the camer a that you press to set the time r mode. timer mode icon (s) An icon or set of icons that appears in the status L CD and shows the current time r mode. Tv See âShutter Priority (T v) exposure modeâ on page 121. TV (video) con nection The connector into which you plug th e video cable t o connect the came ra to a television (TV). See al so âNTSC connectionâ on page 119 and âP AL connectionâ on page 120. unload The process of cop ying images from the memor y card dire ctly to the computer. unmark The proces s of d eselec ting imag es in t he camera th at have p revious ly bee n marked. unprotect The proces s of removi ng the protectio n on images in th e camera so t hat the y can be delet ed. USB Universal Serial Bus . An interface for connecting periphe rals, such as digital camer as, to a computer. USB Mass Storage Device Class A Microsoft Windows device class that lets the operating syste m display the files in a camera as though they are stor ed on a separate, additional compu ter device similar to a disk drive. video cable The wire that can be use d to connect the camer a to a television. video input con nector The conn ector on a t elevisi on into w hich you plug t he vi deo cab le. viewf inder The window on the back of the camer a through which you look to fra me the subject th at will be recor ded when you captur e an image. wak e up The process of bringing the cam era out of sleep mode.
HP 618 Digital Ca mera Userâs Guide 124 Glossary White Balanc e A setting in the Photo Assist menu th at is used to corr ect the color applied to a capt ured image under different lighting conditions in order to make the white areas in the image appear white without any color cast. wide angle A l en s th at h as a s h or te r fo ca l le ng t h a nd a wi de r f i el d of vi e w ( in c lu di n g m o re s ub j ec t a re a) t ha n a n or ma l lens. A wide angle lens mak es a subject appear smaller t han does a normal lens at the same camera-to- subject dist ance. See also ât elephotoâ on page 122. zoom T o enlarge the subject by changing the field of view and magnification of the lens by using the zoom lever. Once the cam era lens is at maxim um optical zoom, you can switch into digital zoom mode, if the image L CD is on. See also âoptical zoomâ on page 120 and âdigital zoom â on page 116. zoom leve r A lever on the back of the camer a that moves the lens continuously betwe en telephoto and wide angle focal lengths. The zoom lever also controls the digital zoom. See also âdigital zoomâ on page 116, âfocal lengthâ on page 117, âtelephotoâ on page 122, and âwide angleâ on page 124.
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 125 Index Index Numerics 4-way controller, usin g 15 A AC power adapter purchasing from HP 107 safety information 113 usin g 108 Accessories for powering the camera 107 Add to Order submenu 82 AE Meterin g submenu 60 Aperture indicator 12 Auto focus range Macro and Infinity indicators 13 setting 11 B Batteries purchasing from HP 107 safety information 113 using rechar geable 108 Battery life 106 Buttons 4-way controller 15 auto focus range 11 flash mode 10 timer mode 11 C Camera AC power adapter 107 accessories 107 batte ry l ife 106 connecting television t o 50 firmware updates 7 HP Year 2000 warranty 112 limited product warrant y 110 NiMH batteries and recharger 107 Prefer ence s menu 94 Reset Setti ngs menu option 73, 102 specifications 103 Status screen , viewing 14 transf erring im ages to com puter 38 using Focus Lock 18 Camera Name subm enu 72, 101 Camera-Cam era me nu option 84 Camera-P rinter m enu opti on 85 Capture mode menus accessing 52 Capture Se ttings 52 Image Stamp 62 Photo Assist 55 Preference s 66, 94 using 15 Capture m ode, settin g the camera to 8 Capture Settings me nu 52 Categories submenu 80 Categorizing i mages 35 Collapsing Time lapse or grouped images 31 Connecting camera to television 50 Continuous images, shooting 20 Customer Supp ort Centers, HP 93 D Date and time, setting 70, 99 Date/Time Stamp submenu 62 Delete menu option 78 Deleting imag es 32 Dialogs Format for Set Date & Time 70, 100 Logo Files 65 Digital Print Order Form (DPOF) 81 Digital zoom indicator on image LCD 13 Digital zoom, us ing 22 Diopter contr ol, using 22 Display submenu 67, 95 Disposing of batterie s 113 Dissolving image groups 33 DPOF (Digital Print Order Form) 81
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 126 Index E Edit menu 78 Erase Order menu opt ion 83 EV Compensation submenu 57 Expanding Timelapse or grouped images 31 Exposure mode indicator 12 Exposure Mode sub menu 56 F File Setti ngs subm enu 53 Find By Category submenu 87 Find By Date submenu 87 Find menu 86 Firmware upda tes 7 Flash mode, setting 10 Focu s Lo ck, usin g 18 Focus Mode subme nu 59 Focus range , au to 11 Focu s, M anua l 12 Format Card menu option 68, 98 Format dialog, Set Date & Time submenu 70, 100 G Group Name submenu 79 Grouped images expanding or collapsing 31 viewing 28 Grouping images 33, 79 H HP Customer C are 93 HP JetSend 46 HP Shopping Vill age website 107 HP Year 2000 warranty 112 I Image Cou nter submenu 71, 100 Image LCD, using 12 Image S tamp menu 62 Image typ es Continuous images 20 One Shot ima ges 19 setting 13 soft key 13 Timelapse images 21 viewing Timelaps e in Play back mode 28 Images categorizing 35 collapsing Timelap se or grouped 31 Continuous 20 creating slideshows 29 deleting 32 dissolving groups 33 expanding Ti melapse or group ed 31 grouping 33, 79 JetSending to printer 46 marking 31 One Shot 19 protecti ng 34 searching for 36 selecting in Review mode 30 sharing 38 Timelapse 21 transferr ing to compute r 38 unmarki ng 31 unprotecti ng 34 viewing full screen 28 viewing on tel evision 51 viewing Timelaps e and grouped 28 Infinity auto focus range indicator 13 Instant Review, using 25 ISO Speed submenu 61 J Jetsendin g image s to printer 46 L Language submenu 73, 102 LCDs image LCD 12 status LCD 9 LEDs memory card access LED 24 timer LED 24 understandin g 23 viewfinder LED 23 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 23
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 127 Index Limited product warranty 110 Logo Files dialog 65 Logo Stamp submenu 65 M Macro auto focus range indicator 13 Manual focus 12 Marking images 31 Memory card access LED 24 Memory card, Format Card me nu option 68, 98 Menus Capture mode 15, 52 Capture Se ttings 52 Edit 78 Find 86 Image Stamp 62 Photo Assist 55 Play Settings 74 Playback mode 74 Pref erence s 66, 94 Print Or der Form 81 Review mode 78 Transmit 84 Mercury disclosure statement 113 Modes Capture 8, 52 Flash 10 Playback 27, 74 Revie w 27, 30, 78 Timer 11 N NiMH batteries and recharger purchasing from HP 107 usin g 108 O One Shot images , shooting 19 Output format, video 50 Overlay bars , using 12, 14 Overlay soft key 12 Overlay soft k ey, usi ng 14 Overview camera introduction 5 camera troubl eshooting 88 menu and soft ke y reference 52 preparing to take pictu res 8 reviewin g images 27 shar ing ima ges 38 taking pi ctures 16 P PC Connect Mode submenu 38, 69, 98 Photo Assist menu 55 Pictures advanced picture taking 17 point-and-shoot picture taking 16 Play Setti ngs menu 74 Playback mode accessing 27 creating a slideshow 29 viewing full screen image s 28 viewing Timelapse and grouped images 28 zooming in on images 28 Playback mode menu accessing 74 Play Settings 74 Playba ck Rate submen u 76 Point-and-shoot pictures 16 Preference s menu 66, 94 Print Or der Form men u 81 Printer, JetSen ding images to 46 Problems, troublesh ooting 88 Product safety information 113 Product warr anty, limi ted 110 Protect menu option 79 Protecting images 34 R Recharg ers, ba ttery purchasing from HP 107 using 108 Recording sound 26 Recycling batte ries 113 Regula tory not ices (USA & Canad a) 114
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 128 Index Removing grouping on images 33 Reset Setti ngs menu option 73, 102 Review mode accessing 27, 30 categorizin g images 35 collapsing Timel apse or grouped images 31 deleting images 32 diss olv ing image groups 33 expanding Ti melapse or group ed images 31 grouping im ages 33 marking images 31 protecting images 34 searching for images 36 selecting images 30 unmarking images 31 unprot ecting image s 34 Review mode menus accessing 78 Edit 78 Find 86 Print Or der Form 81 Transmit 84 Review ing images 27 S Safety AC power adapter 113 batte ries 113 mercury disclosur e statement 113 Searching for images 36 Selecting images in Revie w mode 30 Set Date & Tim e submenu 70, 99 Setting the format for date and time 70, 100 Sharing images 38 Shutter Speed i ndicato r 12 Slideshow submenu 75 Slideshows, creating 29 Soft keys Add to Order submenu 82 AE Meterin g submenu 60 Camera Na me submen u 72 Camera-Camera option 84 Camera-P rinter o ption 85 Capture Settings me nu 52 Categories submenu 80 Date/Time Stamp submenu 63 Delete op tion 78 Display submen u 67 Erase Order option 83 EV Compensation submenu 57 Exposure submenu 57 File Settings subm enu 54 Find By Category submenu 87 Find By Date submenu 87 Find menu 86 Focus subm enu 59 Format Card option 68 Format List dialog 70 Group Name submenu 79 Image Counter subm enu 71 Image Stamp menu 62 image types 13 ISO Speed submenu 61 label s 12 Language submenu 73 Logo Files dialog 65 Logo Stamp submenu 65 Overlay 12, 14 PC Connect mode subme nu 69 Photo Assist men u 55 Play Setti ngs menu 74 Playba ck Rate submen u 76 Preference s menu 66 Print Or der Form men u 81 Protect option 80 Reset Setti ngs option 73 Set Date & Time submenu 70 Slideshow submenu 75 Sound submenu 68 Status 14 Text Stamp submenu 64 Timelaps e Settings submenu 54 using 12
HP 618 D igital Camera User âs Guide 129 Index Video Preferences submen u 77 View Or der op tion 83 White B alance s ubmenu 58 Sound submenu 68, 97 Sound, recording 26 Specifications, camera 103 Status LCD auto focus range 11 flash mode 10 timer mode 11 using the button s 9 Status screen , viewing 14 Status soft key 14 Subme nus Add to Order 82 AE Meterin g 60 Camera Name 72, 101 Categories 80 Date/Time Stamp 62 Display 67, 95 EV Compensation 57 Exposure Mode 56 File Settin gs 53 Find B y Catego ry 87 Find B y Dat e 87 Focus Mode 59 Group Name 79 Image Counter 71, 100 ISO Speed 61 Language 73, 102 Logo Stamp 65 PC Connect Mode 38, 69, 98 Playback Rate 76 Set Date & T ime 70, 99 Slideshow 75 Sound 68, 97 Text Stamp 64 Timelapse Settings 54 Video Preferences 77 White Balance 58 Support, HP customer 93 T Technical support, HP 93 Television, connecting to camera 50 Text message area, understanding 12 Text Stamp submenu 64 Time and date, setting 70, 99 Timelapse images expanding or collapsing 31 shooting 21 viewing 28 Timelaps e Settings submenu 54 Timer LED 24 Timer mode, setting 11 Transferring images to a computer 38 Transmit menu 84 Troubleshooting common probl ems 88 U Unmarking images 31 Unprotectin g images 34 Updates to firmware 7 Userâs Guide how to use it 7 related in formation 7 whatâs in it 6 V Video output format, selecting 50 Video Preferences submen u 77 View Or der m enu opti on 83 Viewfind er LE D 23 Viewing images on television 51 W Warranty HP Year 2000 112 limited camera 110 Websites HP Customer Care 93 HP Shopping Village 107 White Balance submen u 58 Z Zoom lever, using 22